Home

Core Services User Manual

1. Type Exceptions Holiday Working Date Reversed Flag BC E E Input By Authorized By Modification Date Time Date Time Number W Authorized E Open In this screen for a clearing house you can maintain a range of dates every date within which will be designated as holidays for the clearing house You can also provide a reason for the designation Every unexpected holiday you designate must be authorized for it to be effective 22 1 3 1 Reversing Designated Holiday In the Unexpected Holiday Maintenance screen you can also reverse a designated holiday before the actual date Specify the holiday date in the Holiday Date field and check the Reverse box field alongside it When you designate unexpected holidays any bank or customer value dates for clearing transactions that coincided with the holiday are rolled forward Any accounting entries passed are reversed and fresh entries are passed to reflect the new value date Note For the release of uncollected funds the original transaction date is considered for avail ability calculations 228 ORACLE 23 1 23 Document Maintenance Introduction 23 2 Before opening an account the customers are expected to furnish the documents to the bank The following sections in this chapter discusses about the type of document to be submitted and the document checklist to be maintained Maintaining Document Type
2. Fields Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status Specify the following details Transfer ID The system generates a unique transfer ID This will be used as a unique identifier of the account transfer G2 ORACLE Current Branch Specify the current branch of the account On processing the transfer the system will move the account from this branch to the target branch Current Branch Name The system displays the name of the current branch Target Branch Specify the target branch code The option list displays all valid branch codes maintained in the system Choose the appropriate one On processing the transfer the system will move the account from the current branch to the branch selected here Target Branch Name Based on the branch code selected the system displays the name of the target branch Transfer Date Specify the effective date of the account branch transfer Click the date button to choose a date from the calendar The transfer date must be a date in the future You cannot process the transfer on the current date or a past date Account Details You need to specify the following account details Account Number Specify the account number that you need to transfer The option list displays all valid account numbers at the selected branch Choose the appropriate one Account Description Based on the account selected the system displays the de
3. Account Currency Authorized By Accounts Due To Branch 1 Description Due From Branch 1 Description Trans Currency Branch 1 Due To Branch 1 Description Due From Branch 1 Description Modification Number Account Currency Es Date Time Date Time W Authorized E Open For a fund id specify all the details necessary to define the Inter branch GL that will be used The option list against the field Fund ID includes all the valid funds maintained in the system For an explanation on each of the other fields refer to the previous section 29 ORACLE 9 2 1 Querying on Netting Batch You can view all netted and non netted transactions of the netting process from the Netting Batch Query screen You can invoke this screen by typing STDNETQY in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Netting Batch Query fF New amp Enter Query Group Code Account Number Date Netting Batch Details 1 Of 1 Netting Reference Number Branch Module You can query on the basis of one or more of the following parameters Netting Group Code Account Number Date On searching the system displays the following details Netting Reference Number Date Branch Code Account Module Event Reference Number Transaction Code Amount
4. Record Stat Displays the current status of the external account record Authorization Status Displays the current authorization status of the record Joint Holder Code Displays joint holder CIF ID Joint Holder Description Displays description of the joint holder Joint Holder Displays linked entities of the joint holder 35 17 Document Check List Report This report gives you the details of the customer account whose documents are pending for submission expired or about to expire oe 20 ORACLE You can invoke this screen by typing STRDOCL in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Document check list Branch Code Document Status Pending Date Range From Date To Date ReportFormat PDF Printer At Client Report Output Print Printer Branch Code Specify the branch code Document Status Specify the status of the document submitted by the customer from the adjoining option list You can select one of the following e Pending e About to Expire e Expired Note Ifyou select the document status as About to Expire then the From Date should be greater than the current date Ifyou select the document status as Expired then the To Date should be less than the current date From Date Specify the date from which details should be made available in the report
5. 1 0f1 Contract Reference Currency Amount Outstanding Amount Maturity Date e You can view the following details e Contract Reference e Currency e Amount e Outstanding Amount e Maturity Date eed ORACLE 33 6 33 7 Querying Dashboard Details Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to query the dashboard details based on the Project ID Project Name Customer ID Customer Name Account Number You can view these details using Dashboard Summary screen To invoke this screen type STSPJDSH in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button The screen is as shown below Dashboard Summary C Advanced Search Reset Project ID z Project Name Customer ID H Customer Name Account No Account CCY Project Amount Records per page 15 v 10f1 Project ID Project Name Customer ID Customer Name Account No Account CCY Project Amount You can query the record based on the following details Project ID Customer ID Account Number Project Limit Project Name Customer Name Account Currency You can double click on a specific record to view the detailed screen Querying Accounting Entries Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to view the accounting entry serial number which can be used in PPC liquidation screen for marking a specific credit entry for query You can view these details using
6. 2 cccceceeeeeeceeceeeeteeeeeeesesecenseneeaaeeeeeeseeettettees 35 38 35 22 Demand Draft Issued Report ccceeeeeeeeceececeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeececneaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenea 35 38 35 22 1 Contents Of the REPOOt asp a 35 39 35 23 PDC Apt Re POM a s sanvesatt a atiaaadey anime a a eae 35 40 35 23 1 Contents of the REPOST ccccecceeeecceecceeeeeeeeeeeteseeensenneaaeeeeeeeneettettees 35 41 35 24 Temporary Overdraft Report cccccccececeeeeeeeeeeccneaeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeecccnceeeeeeeeeeeeees 35 42 35 24 1 Contents of the Report 1 ccccccccceeeeeececeneeneceeeeeeeeeeeeseeseesteniesaeeaseeeeess 35 43 39 29 BIV Sales Report a nuked itches eed aE EA E Aas 35 44 35 25 1 Contents of the Report 1 1 ccccccccceceeeceecenteneceeeeeeeeeeeetestecsseseeaaecaseeeeess 35 45 36 Function ID Glossary lt ssc iccccsssiscsiccali cs ack se coc sscticec den nnck saneccbeaesaverecoeeceee 36 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 Preface Introduction This manual is designed to help you quickly get acquainted with the Core Services module of Oracle FLEXCUBE You can further obtain information specific to a particular field by placing the cursor on the relevant field and striking lt F1 gt on the keyboard Audience This manual is intended for the following User User Roles Role Function Back office clerk Input functions for contracts Back office managers officers Authorization functions Pr
7. Amount This is the amount credited from the account during the specified period Out Net Flow This is the net amount available in the account for the specified period S28 ORACLE 35 5 Future Dated Account Balance Report 35 5 1 This report gives balances of future dated transactions You can invoke the screen by typing ACRPFVBL in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Future Dated Contracts Select Account Class Account Account Class Account Report Preferences All Records Specific Records Account Class Account 1 Of 1 1 Of 1 A gt e o Report Format PDF Printer At Client j Report Output Print Printer You can specify the following parameters Select Account Class Account Select account criteria for generating the report from the following options e Account Class e Account Report Preferences Select report preference criteria for generating the report from the following options e All Records e Specific Records Account Class Specify valid account classes for which you need to generate the report from the adjoining option list if you have selected Account Class Account Specify valid account classes for which you need to generate the report from the adjoining option list if you have selected Account Contents of the Report Header The Header carries the ti
8. Field Name Field Description Reference Number Indicates the reference number Customer Number Indicates the customer number Customer Name This indicates the name of the customer Nationality Indicates the nationality of the customer Unique ID Name Indicates the unique identification name RM Code Indicates the relationship manager code RM Name Indicates the name of relationship manager 35 20 Black List Report During File Upload Report You can invoke Black List Report During File Upload screen by typing CSRPBLUP in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button The screen is as shown below Black List Report During File Upload Report Format PDF v Printer At Client Report Output Print Printer 35 20 1 Contents of the Report The contents of the report are discussed under the following heads 32 30 ORACLE Header The header carries the Report Name Branch Branch Date User Id Module Run Date and Time Body of the Report Field Name Field Description Customer Number Indicates the customer number Customer Name This indicates the name of the customer Nationality Indicates the nationality of the customer Unique ID Name Indicates the unique identification name Unique ID Value Indicates the unique identification value RM Code Indicates the relationship manager code RM Name Indicates the name
9. Previous Statement Balance Gives the balance of the previous statement Previous Statement Number Gives the number of the previous statement 35 29 ORACLE TOD Limit The temporary overdraft limit facility granted to the customer account Sublimit It the overdraft facility maximum permitted to this account associated and tracked against the line id maintained for the liability Limit Currency Displays the currency code of the limit TOD Limit Start Date The start date for the temporary overdraft facility TOD Limit End Date The end date for the temporary overdraft facility Uncollected Funds Limit The funds hit the account which are debited credited to the account with effect from the mentioned value days Line ID The line code is associated with the liability ID against which the overdraft facility is being tracked Tanked Status It is the status of the transaction that hit the account in a specific branch once the branch is marked for EOTI Account Balance Gives the total account balance Maker ID The identification number of the maker Maker Date Stamp This is the date on which the contract was uploaded Checker ID This is the Login ID of the user who authorized the product Checker Date Stamp This is the date on which the product was authorized Mod Number Displays the number of times the record was modified
10. LHS The system displays the LHS of the filter expression 20 5 ORACLE Operator The system displays the operator for the filter RHS The system displays the RHS or the value for the expression based on which data is purged However RHS can be modified Branch Restrictions Click on Branch Restrictions to allow or disallow entities across branches Branch Restriction Entity Id Branch Restriction Allowed Disallowed 1 Of 1 m Branch Code Entity Id The system displays the entity ID Branch Restriction Indicate whether the branch restriction is Allowed or Disallowed Branch Code The system displays the branch code However you can add the branch codes here You should configure the branch restrictions as part of first time entity configurations 26 4 2 Viewing Purge Parameter Configuration Details You can view the purge parameter configuration details maintained in the Purge Parameter Configuration screen using the Purge Parameter Configuration Summary screen You can 26 6 ORACLE 26 4 3 invoke this screen by typing STSPGMNT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Purge Parameter Configuration Summary E gt search C Advanced Search 9 Reset K Clear All Case Sensitive Authorization Status x Record Status x Entity Id Records per page 15 x 10f1 LC Authorization Statu
11. Processing Utility Payment Transactions The utility payment transactions are processed with the tanked status as Yes if the branch is not available for transaction During the UP transaction Query the transaction can be viewed as tanked if the UP transaction is tanked and that the request was processed when the branch available status is No or when branch date was ahead of host date The process when the utility transaction is received when the branch is unavailable or when branch date is ahead of host date is as follows e The UP transaction would be accepted with transaction status as Tanked e The accounting entries would be posted with tanked status After the branch available status is changed to Yes then e The transaction status of the UP transaction will be changed to Active e The tanked accounting entries if any would be un tanked by the batch process for releasing the tanked accounting entries ate ORACLE The different categories which get processed during the End of the Day batch run are explained in the table below Maintenance Transactions Branch Status Not Available Branch Status Available After date change Customer Account The process is tanked till TD account status is Creation the branch available sta changed from tanked to tus is yes un tanked Initiation accounting Initiation accounting entries will be posted as entries are un tanked and tanked entries
12. Total 113 days 30 Euro 360 Method 10 000x10 100x1 14 360 In this method the number of days is calculated as follows Dec 30 days include from date exclude to date Jan 30 days In 30 Euro Method all months have 30 days February included Feb 30 days In 30 Euro Method February always has 30 days leap year or not March 24 days include from date exclude to date Total 113 days 30 US Actual Method 10 000x10 100 x 30 365 84 366 In this method the number of days is calculated as follows Dec 30 days include from date exclude to date Jan 30 days In 30 US Method all months have 30 days only for February are the actual number of days calculated Feb 29 days In 30 US Method actual days are accounted for the leap year 19 11 ORACLE 10 2 7 March 24 days include from date exclude to date Total 113 days Note When the interest period crosses from a non leap year to a leap year or otherwise the basis of actual days has to be treated separately in each year 30US 365 Method 10 000x10 100x114 365 In this method the number of days is calculated as follows Dec 30 days include from date exclude to date Jan 30 days In 30 US Method all months have 30 days only for February are the actual number of days calculated Feb 29 days In 30 US Method actual days are accounted for the leap year March 24 days include from date exclude to date Total 1
13. 12 Expressing Amounts in Words Introduction You can describe the amounts printed on account statements messages advices etc in words for the benefit of your customers To describe amounts in a specific language you have to maintain the verbal equivalents of numerals in the language You can maintain verbal equivalents of numerals in the Amount Text Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing STDAMTRN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Amount Text Maintenance EX New E3 Enter Query m Language Description Text HE _ Amount Description Prefix One mi 4 Currencies Currency Pre Decimal Post Decimal Final Text Text Before Fractions la 7 Input By Authorized By Modification Date Time Date Time Number Wi Authorized Open Amount translation details can be maintained as one time maintenance at the time Oracle FLEXCUBE is installed at your bank Once maintained the amount descriptions printed on account statements and other messages will be described according to your specifications in this screen Language You can maintain verbal equivalents of numerals in any language that Oracle FLEXCUBE supports This means that you can maintain the verbal equivalents of n
14. 25 Maintaining Features Introduction 25 2 In order to improve the performance of the system during online or batch processes you can install some features on need basis on the system This chapter explains the process of installing features Maintaining Feature ID You can maintain required features using the Feature ID Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing CSDFEAMT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Feature Id Maintenance E New amp Enter Query Branch Code az Branch Name Feature Id a Installed Input By Authorized By Modification Date Time Date Time Number WB Authorized H Open You can specify the following details Branch Code Specify the branch where the feature needs to be installed The adjoining option list displays all valid branch codes maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one Branch Name The branch name is displayed here based on the chosen branch code Feature Id Specify the feature that should be installed in the branch You can also choose any of the following values from the adjoining option list Mode Feature Id Description Online Batch 2071 ORACLE ACCRESTR Account Restriction feature which need Online to be en
15. HO Code defaulted click to disolav all codes maintained select a Reaional Branch 2a HO Code defaulted click to display all codes maintained select a Basic Parameters for Branch In Oracle FLEXCUBE the Head Office and the Regional Offices are defined as branches You can maintain the details of the Head Office regional offices and branches in the Branch a ORACLE Parameters Maintenance screen Invoke this screen by typing STDBRANC in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Branch Parameters Maintenance E New amp Enter Query Branch Code Branch Name Branch Available Status General Details Account Financial Details Duplication Check Details Parent Branch Description Time Zone Offset Regional office Description Hours Country Code Description Minutes Customer Identity Description Ahead Local Currency Description GL Class Report DSN Time Level Fund Branch Allow Corporate Access EOC Status External Value ATM Details Cutoff Offset Time Local Payments ATM Branch Hours Clearing Branch Institution Id Minutes File Consol Transaction Inter Branch Transaction Code Code Customer Transfer Address BIC Branch Address Line 1 Telex Branch Address Line 2 Host Name Branch Address Line 3 Preferences SWIFT Address AccountMask CIFRange GlobalinterdictFunctions Tax Branch Currency Fields WELGI Date Time
16. Settlement Days Cutoff Time Hour Minute E Generate 103 _ Index Currency New Cover format Required E CLS Currency E Euro Conversion E Validate Tag 50F Rounding Amount Format Mask Euro Type Rule Truncate Ad 99 999 999 999 Euro Currency unit 99 99 99 99 999 IN Currency Out Currency Euro Closed PC Currency Country Mapping Fields Input By Authorized By Modification E Authorized Date Time Date Time Number Wi Open Tolerance Limit When you are maintaining an In Currency or the Euro in the Currency Definition screen you can define a Tolerance Limit for it The limit is expressed as a percentage The Implication During the transition period settlements of components in In currencies can be made either in the same currency or in the Euro EUR depending on the settlement account s maintained Similarly components in Euro can either be settled in EUR or in an In currency In the settlement messages that are generated MT 100 MT202 the settlement amount would be reported in the Settlement Account Currency However you can opt to additionally furnish the value of the component in Euro Related Information ERI currency You have to manually specify the settlement amount value in the ERI currency in the Settlement Message Details screen When generating the message towards settlement MT100 MT202 the system ensures that the value you
17. next working date by either clicking unlock icon on the toolbar selecting unlock from the action menu Previous working date cannot be modified Today s date if modified should always be greater than the previous working date and less than the next working date Similarly next working date if modified should be greater than today s date On modifying the dates the system will ask you for an override On confirmation the change will be effected Date change should be immediately authorized because no application of Oracle FLEXCUBE can be run without date change authorization Ifyou have input any date modification you cannot authorize it A user with a different login ID should do it For a branch you can have only one system dates record Any modification in date be it an authorized or unauthorized record can be done any time after today s EOD and before BOD for the next day is run You can modify the next working date any time before running the EOD for the current day To authorize click authorize icon on the toolbar If any modifications were made on the system date the old and the new values will be displayed After which an alert box will warn you that the dates change will be authorized You will be prompted to confirm Click to confirm The change will be authorized If you do not want to authorize the change then click delete icon you will be returned to the scre
18. sa ORACLE 9 1 2 1 e ROsand HO For the above mentioned reporting structure the system will offer the following branch pairs to be maintained 1 HO RO1 2 HO RO2 3 HO BR1 4 HO BR2 The system has an in built auto escalation path for inter branch accounting transaction which escalates from Direct to Through RO to Through HO For example in the Bank preferences screen you have defined a direct inter branch accounting relationship But in the Inter branch Accounts maintenance screen where all inter branch accounts are maintained you have not maintained an accounting relationship between two branches 000 and 002 Then in case of an inter branch accounting transaction between 000 and 002 the system will first look for a direct relationship since that has not been maintained it will look for a relationship through RO i e if the two branches have a common RO if that too does not exist then through HO the transaction would take place Specifying Customer Accounts System determines the settlement route for inter branch transactions by considering the customer accounts that you specify for a particular currency in this screen For example your bank has to processes a transaction in USD involving your branch Branch Code 001 and another branch Branch Code 002 If you maintain the customer accounts for the branch pair 001 002 and currency USD system will accordingly determine the settlemen
19. Due to Branch 1 This identifies the customer account maintained at Branch 2 into which a credit entry will be passed Due From Branch 1 This account identifies the customer account maintained at Branch 2 into which a debit entry will be passed System uses the customer accounts specified in this screen and determines the settlement route for a transaction between two different branches of your bank Defining Accounts for Inter Branch Fund Transac tions A fund transaction that takes place in a branch of your bank may involve accounts that are maintained in another branch As mentioned earlier if you have selected the option Allow Corporate Access in the Branch Parameters screen and the branch is a fund branch the IB Entity will be defaulted as General Ledger The GL that will be used will be based on the maintenance in the Fund Inter Branch Accounts Maintenance screen for the fund id To invoke this screen type IADIBMNT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Fund inter Branch Parameters Detailed E New Enter Query Branch 2 Description ml Branch 1 Description Fund Branch _Fundid E General Ledger Accounts Due To Branch 2 Description Due From Branch 2 Description Trans Currency Branch 2 MIS Group Due To Branch 2 Description Due From Branch 2 Description Input By
20. Milestone No Specify the milestone number Description Specify the description of the milestone Percentage Completion Specify the percentage of completion with respect to the milestone Start Date Specify the start date of the milestone End Date Specify the end date of the milestone 33 3 4 Specifying the Venture Details You can maintain the details of the joint venture You can also change the joint venture ratios during the course of the project but these ratios are effective only for future loans Each loan created for the project can store the ratios at the loan level which is defaulted based on the application ratio at the time of loan creation All limits tracking for joint venture parties will be based on this ratio The system will create the limit lines for each of the project venture parties when joint venture limit tracking is required at the project level The line ID maintained at the limits is used to create the limits automatically Each time the PPC is created the system will create a new limit line using the same line for each of the liability of each joint venture Different joint venture parties will have the same commitment product which can have different interest rate a8 ORACLE The screen is as shown below Project Details and Maintenance E New E3 Enter Query Project Details Customer Number Project ID Project Name Project Account Branch Project Account Liability No
21. Step 1 Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon Step 2 Enter the year 2000 or move to the year 2000 using the arrows Step 3 To build the calendar for the year 2000 click the Refresh button This button is called the refresh build up button because it builds the calendar for you Please note e Oninvoking the calendar of any year you will notice that Saturdays and Sundays are marked as weekly holidays This is the default setting of the system e For identification the working days are marked in black and the holidays in red 20 2 ORACLE 20 2 2 20 2 3 20 2 4 e All unauthorised records appear against a blue background On authorisation of that record the background is cleared Defining Holidays To define any other weekly holiday other than the default double click the day of the week listed on the top row of the screen For instance if you double click on F all Fridays in the year would be marked as holidays To clear off the default weekly holidays Saturdays and Sundays double click on sa and s written on the top row To specify other annual holidays double click on the date the date would be marked as a holiday If you want to unmark a day specified earlier as a holiday double click on it once again You will notice that the day gets marked in black Because the change is yet unauthorised it appears against a blue
22. VDBALINIC VD balance update This is equivalent to Online flag at bank parameters level Installed Check this box to indicate that the feature should be installed in the branch Click save icon in the Application tool bar to save the changes Specifying UDF Values 25 3 All User Defined Fields UDFs linked to the function ID CSDFEAMT are displayed in the User Defined Fields screen Invoke this screen by clicking Fields button on the Feature ID Maintenance screen The screen is as shown below User Defined Fields Field Name Value Description Here you can specify values for each UDF Refer the User Manual titled User Defined Field for details about defining UDFs Viewing Feature ID Summary You can view summary of all feature IDs installed across branches using the Feature ID Summary screen To invoke this screen type CSSFEAMT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and click the adjoining arrow button aoa ORACLE The screen is as shown below q4 Advanced Search 5 Reset Authorization Status Record Status X Branch Code J Feature Id Installed Records per page 15 First Previous 4 of 1 Nex Last Authorization Status Record Status Branch Code Feature Id Authorizai Record St You can query on records based on any one or all of the following cri
23. the date and time at which the report was generated and the page number of the report Body of the report The details of the customer information details that would be displayed in the report are as follows Field Name Description Customer Information Customer Customer Identification Number of the customer Customer Name Customer name Address lines Displays the address of the customer Country The country the customer belongs to Nationality The nationality of the customer Type Type of the customer individual or Corporate or Bank Unique ID Name Displays the customer s unique id name 35 23 ORACLE Unique ID Value Displays the customer s unique id value Creation Date Displays the date of customer s number creation Input By The Login ID of the user that created the customer record Input Date and Time The date the customer record was created Auth By The Login ID of the user that has authorized the record Auth Date and Time The date of the authorization Mod Number Displays the number of times the record was modified Auth Stat Displays the current status of the customer record Record Displays the record status Exposure Country Displays the exposure country details Frozen Displays the frozen status of the customer s account Local Branch Displays the customer s local
24. 33 11 ORACLE Limit Type Specify the type of limit Limit Description The system displays the limit description Credit Line Specify the credit line Serial No The system displays the serial number for the limit created Commitment Product Specify the commitment product details used when the respective limit line is created Rate Specify the rate Margin Specify the margin ele ORACLE 33 3 6 Specifying Non PPC Limits Details The screenshot for Non PPC Limits is as follows Project Details and Maintenance E New amp Enter Query Project Details Customer Number Project ID Project Name Project Account Branch Project Account Liability No Project Value Branch Code Currency Number Of PPCs Default PPC Clearance Days Start Date End Date Sponsor Retention Margin Remarks Bank Margin J Ratio Change Allowed J JV Limit Tracking Required Main Milestones Venture Details PPC Limits RE Joint Venture Line Details 1 Of 1 I Limit Type Customer No Limit Description Liability No 4 Line Code Auto Line Creation for PPC Limit Track Required through Commitment Party Line Details 101 gt Di Customer No Liability No Line Code Line Serial ELC Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status 33 3 6 1 Maintaining Joint Venture Line Details Limit Type Spe
25. Contract Level k l Deterred Statement Generation Enterprise General Ledger 18 Back Valued Check Required Profit and Loss Adjustment Track Previous Year Profit And Loss Adjustment Revaluation Split Details Revaluation Split Required Suspense Product Maintenance Debit Product Description Credit Product Description international Banking Account Number Masks Bank Code Account Number Cheque Number Mask Cheque Number Mask FGL Integration FGL Handoff Required ELCM Integration ELCM Replication LDAP DN Template LDAP DN Template LCY Message Preferences exit In this screen you define the following preferences 5 18 ORACLE e The netting suspense GL into which settlement entries for netted FX Contracts should be posted e The CIF Number against which all Walk in customers should be identified e The format in which the IBAN Account Number and the Bank Code should be captured e The duration for which spool files should be stored in the spool file directory e The directory into which the files should be spooled e MIS codes for posting of automatic balancing entries These details can be maintained by the respective branches For a branch you maintain the following in the Preferences screen Netting Suspense GL All settlement accounting entries relating to a netted FX contract is passed into the specified Netting suspense GL The net amount of the set
26. For example if your period length is a quarter you can enter Q1 for the first period Q2 for the second Q3 for the third and so on If your period length is a bimonthly you can enter BM1 BM2 If your period length coincides with a month you can input M1 M2 Start Date This is the first day of the corresponding period End Date This is the last date of the corresponding period End date of a period should always end on a month end Please note e The period codes could be of varying lengths but no gaps should be left between periods e The duration of two periods should not overlap e You can modify the period code of the current or a future period however a past period cannot be modified even if it has not been closed e All details maintained in the Period Code Screen will automatically apply to any new branch opened by you in the Branch Parameters Screen 2 ORACLE 16 3 e The current financial cycle code and the current period code are displayed in the Branch Parameters Screen Period Code Status After authorisation you can view whether a financial period is open or it has been closed Each branch can view the status of a period in every other branch Click the period whose status you want to view Branch Displays the codes of the different branches of your bank Status Displays the corresponding status of the period code highlighted O indicates open status C indicates closed statu
27. Mod No Record Status Authorization Status You need to specify the following details Branch Code Specify the branch code The adjoining option list displays all the branch codes that are maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Customer A C Specify the customer account for which you are maintaining the dormant status The adjoining option list displays all the customer account numbers that are maintained in the selected transaction branch You can choose the appropriate one Debit Check this box to indicate that no debits should be posted to the selected customer account Credit Check this box to indicate that no credits should be posted to the selected customer account Frozen Check this box to indicate that the customer account is frozen due to some unavoidable reason Dormant Check this box to indicate that the account is in dormant status which means not used for along time Dormant Param Indicates the parameters for re activating the dormant account You can select one of the following options e Debit e Credit te ORACLE 17 4 e Any Manual Remarks Specify the remarks if any Maintaining CR DR Statistics Details You can maintain the credit debit statuses for the customer account in the CrDrStat Maintenance screen To invoke this screen type STDSTCDM in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and click the adjoining arrow button Transact
28. Note Duplicate transaction check is applicable only for FT and SI transactions Branch Parameters Maintenance E New E3 Enter Query Branch Code Branch Name Branch Available Status General Details Account Financial Details i Duplication Check Details 1 Of 1 Module Duplication Check Required Duplication Days al Preferences SWIFT Address AccountMask CIF Range Global interdict Functions Tax Branch Currency Fields Maker Date Time Mod No Checker Record Status Date Time Authorization Status You can specify the following details here Module Specify the module for which you wish to maintain duplicate check days or select the module from the option list provided Duplication Check Required Check this box to indicate that duplication check is required for the transactions related to the module selected Note However despite checking this box if the duplication check criteria are not specified in the following screens the system will not perform duplication checks for all the respective contracts under this branch Payments and Collection Product Category Maintenance Funds Transfer Product Preference Standing Instruction Product Definition Duplication Days Specify the number of days for which the duplication checks for transactions need to be carried out Calendar days are considered for duplication check Note You need to specify a value here if
29. Since you need to define transaction online individual daily and monthly limits for each customer each product category that you maintain should be linked with a customer To facilitate this linking you are required to maintain AML Customer Groups You have to link one of the limit codes of the respective type attached to the product category to the customer group alog ORACLE You can define product categories applicable to customer groups through the AML Customer Group Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing CSDAMLCG in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button AML Customer Group Maintenance E New 5 Enter Query Customer Group Next Review Date Description Risk Profile High Tracking Customer Group Low Customer Product Details Product Category Description Online Limit Code Individual Limit Code Daily Limit Code j a zz l az JEE Input By Authorized By Modification Date Time Date Time Number Wi Authorized E Open Customer Group This is the AML group to which the particular customer belongs You can select from the available option list and identify the AML group to which the customer belongs Note In the CIF maintenance screen when you capture the customer code of a customer the same will b
30. Specify the branch s TELEX address using a maximum of 14 characters alphanumeric Host Name Against HOST enter the name of the Host server for this branch in not more than 35 characters alphanumeric Time Level In this field is displayed the system time level status represented by a number between 0 and 9 In Oracle FLEXCUBE user access to the system can be controlled by assigning each user and the system a time level Both the system and the users are set to different time levels Only those users who have a time level equal to or greater than the system time level can log into the system A control clerk during the EOC process does the change in time level status Fund Branch Even though the fund and the bank are in the same database the fund is treated as a different legal entity and as such the books of the fund are maintained separately from those of the bank Funds are created in a separate branch and any transaction initiated in the fund branch belongs to a fund Check this box to indicate that the branch you are maintaining if is a fund branch Since the fund is a different legal entity it should not be possible to initiate inter branch accounting entries from the fund branch Any settlement with an external entity is routed through the normal settlements interface In order to facilitate this all the account fields in the system accept only the accounts in the transaction branch if the branch happens to be a
31. Spouse Employment Status Indicates Spouse Employment Status 35 16 Customer Accounts Report This report gives details of the customer account and you can generate this report using the Customer Accounts screen 35 27 ORACLE You can invoke this screen by typing STRCUSAC in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Customer Accounts From Record Account Number To Record Account Number ReportFormat PDF Printer At Client Report Output Print Printer 35 16 1 Contents of Report The parameters specified while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the report Other content displayed in the report is as follows Header The Header carries the branch information on the branch date the user ID the module name the date and time at which the report was generated and the page number of the report Body of the report The details of the customer accounts details that would be displayed in the report are as follows Field Name Field Description Account Number Details about customer account Number Account Class Details about account class Account Description Account Description Opening Date The opening date of the account Dormant The account status as dormant Frozen Account status as frozen No Credits Gives no credit status of the acc
32. The system displays the following details e Entity ID e RunID e Date e Start Time e End Time e Status e Error e Number of Records e Query 26 9 ORACLE 27 Support 24x7 27 1 Introduction Oracle FLEXCUBE is available on a 24x7 basis for two broad channels Web service amp Web Branch During EOD batch process transactions are tanked and then get processed after the batch is completed This document details about the 24x7 support feature in FCUBS 27 1 1 Gateway Messaging Oracle FLEXCUBE processes the following channel transactions 24x7 e FLEXCUBE UBS Gateway Web service Customer New Modify Close Customer Account New Modify Close Fund Transfer Payment amp Collections Consumer Loans All new requests for maintenance functions or online functions when the branch available status is No are accepted at the Gateway messaging layer The Gateway messaging layer does not route the transaction requests during the Date Change Window 27 1 2 Web Branch Oracle FLEXCUBE processes the following channel transactions 24x7 e FLEXCUBE UBS Retail Web Branch UI Retail Teller Instruments Clearing Utility Payments Retail Loan 27 1 3 Batch Processing Every day while processing a channel transaction system checks for the branch availability status The system displays the Branch Available status If the status is Yes it indicates that the branch can acc
33. The system will include all customers whose date is equal to or greater than this date To Date Specify the date till which details should be made available in the report The system will include all customers whose date is equal to or lesser than this date Report Format Select the format in which you need to generate the report from the adjoining drop down list This list displays the following values e HTML Select to generate report in HTML format e RTF Select to generate report in RTF format e PDF Select to generate report in PDF format e EXCEL Select to generate report in EXCEL format amal ORACLE Report Output Select the report output in which you need to generate the report from the adjoining drop down list This list displays the following values e Print Select to print the report e View Select to print the report e Spool Select to spool the report to a specified folder so that you can print it later Printer At Select location where you wish to print the report from the adjoining drop down list This list displays the following values e Client Select if you need to print at the client location e Server Select if you need to print at the server location Printer Select printer using which you wish to print the report from the adjoining option list 35 17 1 Contents of the Report Header The Header carries the title of the report information on the branch code the
34. bank You can specify an offset time for your branch in the Branch Parameters screen Hours amp Minutes The offset time is expressed in hours and minutes The time you specify here is added or subtracted from the cut off time maintained for the bank This depends on the time difference between your branch and the Head Office Indicating Local Payments Clearing Branch Select the clearing branch from the adjoining option list Transaction Code for Consolidation Across Products Select the transaction code for consolidation from the adjoining option list Maintaining Financial Details for Branch You can specify the details regarding suspense GLs Financial cycle preference for floating rate message generation 103 103 for the branch in this screen The screen appears as shown below Branch Parameters Maintenance E New amp Enter Query Branch Code Branch Name Branch Available Status General Details PEM EE Ener Duplication Check Details Suspense General Ledger Description Financial Cycle Real Local Currency Description Current Cycle Cont Local Currency Description Current Period Real Foreign Currency Description Cont Foreign Currency Description ATM Amount Block Processing Referral Cut Off Time Hours Minutes Transaction Code for Amount Block Release Revaluation Position Transfer Details Transfer Type X Transfer Branch Position Asset GL Position Liability GL Transaction Code Euro Redenominati
35. e Both ae ORACLE If you select Customer Accounts as an inter branch entity you can specify the currency and the actual customer accounts involved in an inter branch transaction between two branches of your bank If the inter branch entity is specified as General Ledgers you need to specify the internal accounts that would be involved in a transaction between two different branches of your bank If you select Both option it indicates that inter branch accounting entries could be posted for both GL and Customer accounts Fund Inter Branch Scheme Indicate the following details Inter Branch Account Schedule You can indicate the route through which accounting entries for inter branch fund transactions should be settled You can select one of the following routes from the option list that is available e Choose Normal to indicate the inter branch routing defined for corporate transactions will be applicable to the inter branch fund transactions as well e Choose Through HO to indicate inter branch transactions should be settled through the Head Office e Ifyou specify Through RO the accounting entries would be routed through the regional office If two branches involved in a transaction do not report to a common regional office the accounting entry would be routed through the HO e f you specify Through RO and HO the accounting entries would be routed through the Regional Office of the firs
36. e dash e comma e asterisk e Full Stop e Forward slash For example You wish to create a two level GL structure for your bank You could define the first two characters of the GL to represent the category asset liability etc aa the next two characters nn to represent the first level GL and the next three characters nnn to represent the second level GL A GL based on the given structure would read as AS01001 where AS represents the GL category asset 01 represents the first level GL 001 represents the second level GL 2 ORACLE 2 1 3 2 For creating this structure you would define your GL mask as aannnnn d D If you want to define your second level GL with a 4 digit numeric code instead of 3 other parameters remaining the same your mask would read as aannnnnn d D Indicating Year end Profit amp Loss General Ledger At the end of any financial year the balances in the income and expense accounts are posted by Oracle FLEXCUBE into a separate year end account for the purpose of consolidation of balances and turnovers This account is called the Year End profit and loss General Ledger Account You also specify year end profit and loss GL for each GL account you maintain in the Chart of Accounts screen The year end account specified at the bank level is the default year end profit and loss GL for all GL accounts maintained in the Chart of Accounts GL screen If you
37. rCustomer Account Transaction Query screen To invoke this screen type ACDTRNQY in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button 32de ORACLE The screen is as shown below Customer Account Transaction Query E gt Execute Query Query Criteria Related Reference Number Contract Reference Account Number Transaction Code Event Code Value Date From Date Last N number of transactions Account Details Branch Currency Starting Balance Debit Credit Balance Account Number Transaction Details 10f1 Debit Credit Transaction Currency Module Transaction Date Related Account To Date Contract Reference Entry Serial Number Module Code Transaction Code Event Code Transaction Date Valu You can query the record based on the following details Contract Reference Account Number Debit Credit Transaction Code Currency Event Code Module Code Value Date Transaction Date Related Reference Related Account From Date Last N Number of Transactions To Date 33 23 ORACLE Clicking on the Query button the system displays the transaction details You can double click on a specific record to view the detailed screen Note You can query for a specific number of previous records by entering the value in Last N Number of Transactions By default it is
38. you have opted for revaluation split then Revaluation Loss as opposed to Trading Loss is posted into this GL Revalue into This GL account is debited if the result of revaluation is a profit and credited if the result of revaluation is a loss This would typically be the GL code being revalued For all non contingent GLs belonging to the asset or liability categories the system defaults to the GL being revalued If you wish to specify a different account for posting these entries specify by selecting from the list of maintained GLs A list of all GLs would be displayed Select Trading Profit Account Trading Loss Account This indicates the GL for posting profit loss due to trading revaluation Trading Profit Loss if you have indicated that revaluation split is required for a GL Netting of offset entries A check against this indicates whether the offset entries for all accounts linked to the GL code need to be netted or not If checked a single consolidated entry would be passed one for profit and one for loss Note Netting of offset entries is applicable only for normal account revaluation and not for ac counting entry based revaluation of Income Expense GLs 192 ORACLE Accounting entry based revaluation of Income Expense GLs Income expense GLs that are marked for entry based revaluation are picked up by the EOD revaluation batch process which executes before the account revaluation batch process on a give
39. you might require an online authorization for the operation to proceed Accordingly the implementers at your installation configure the sensitivity of such errors Subsequently you might also need to configure errors to suit your requirements Types of Overrides In Oracle FLEXCUBE you can assign a level of sensitivity to each override that arises or occurs during system operation This level of sensitivity that you assign to an override indicates the action that will result when that specific override occurs Accordingly you can assign any of the following sensitivity levels to an override Ignore This would mean that no override message would be displayed and the exception would be ignored Override This sensitivity indicates that an override message should be displayed seeking confirmation from the user If the user confirms or accepts the override processing of the transaction would proceed if not the exception would have to be corrected before transaction processing can proceed For such overrides you can assign an additional parameter to indicate whether an online authorization is required if the override is accepted If you have assigned online authorization to be required then for transactions involving such overrides an online authorization is requested as a mandatory procedure The online authorization limit specified for the authorizer would be checked during authorization in addition to the time level of the autho
40. By Authorized By Modification Date Time Date Time Number Wi Authorized H Open 26 3 0 1 Specifying Module In the Purge Details Maintenance screen you must first specify the module for which you are defining parameters All parameters that you define subsequently will only apply to the module that you specify You can enter a description of the module for which you are maintaining purge details Note For purging limits history which is Liability Lines and Lines Utilization history you must specify LM as the module code Limits history data is purged for the current branch only 26 3 0 2 Specifying Nature of Data to be Purged You can opt to purge contracts of the module you specified along the following criteria You may either choose to purge any of the following e _Liquidated contracts e Closed applicable only to the BC and LC modules e Reversed contracts 20 2 ORACLE 26 4 When you run the purge process only those contracts that are in the status that you specified will be purged Thatis only contracts in the module you specified that are liquidated closed and or reversed depending on your specification will be purged from the system Similarly if you want to purge e Exchange rates from the Currency module you should choose the None option e Data from the Reconciliation module you should choose any of the following options depending on the data that you want to purge The opti
41. CIF mask for the corresponding instance node Select a CIF mask from the option list provided Autogenerate Customer Identification File Number This indicates whether or not the CIF should be generated automatically Check this box to indicate the CIF number needs to be generated automatically Allow Inventory Tracking You can use this check box to allow disallow inventory management and tracking To use inventory management module check this box Note If inventory tracking is allowed then Cheque Numbering Scheme should be left blank null For more details on Inventory Tracking refer the Instruments Inventory Tracking User Manual Maintaining FATCA Preferences In this screen you can maintain the details regarding the banks own FATCA classification You mainly need to maintain the details in the following screen to identify e If FATCA is applicable to the bank e The banks own FATCA classification e The banks IRS issued EIN as well as its issue and expiry date oy ORACLE You can maintain these details by clicking the FATCA tab The screen appears as shown below Bank Parameters Maintenance Enter Query Bank Code Bank Name Head Office Branch Branch Code Branch Description Financial Preferences General Preferences FATCA FATCA Applicable Banks FATCA Classification FATCA Classification GIIN Employer Identification No Remarks EIN Issue Date Date of Agreement Expiry Date Date of
42. Change Allowed Check this box if the joint venture ratio change is allowed during the course of the project This field is enabled only for new loans under the project financing JV Limit Tracking Required Check this box if joint venture limit tracking is required Branch Code The system displays the branch code Currency Specify the currency details Number of PPCs Specify the number of PPCs in the project Default PPC Clearance Days Specify the default PPC duration for the payment Start Date Specify the start date of the project End Date Specify the end date of the project Sponsor Retention Margin Specify the retention margin for the sponsor while paying the PPC Bank Margin Specify the margin retained by the bank for the PPC Auto Line Creation for PPC If you check this box then the system will automatically create the credit lines while authorizing the PPC Else you need to manually create the line and link them in the PPC screen By default this field will be checked Limit Track Required through Commitment If you check this box then the system will create the commitment contracts for every automatic line creation 336 ORACLE 33 3 2 Specifying the Main Details You can specify the main details of the project such as sponsor details and consultant details to validate the PPC and to recommend the sponsor for the payment Project Details and Maintenance E New amp Enter Query
43. Duplicate Check Required option is selected You can not specify a negative value Maintaining SWIFT Address for Branch Click the SWIFT Address in the Branch Parameters screen to invoke Additional SWIFT Address screen oe ORACLE The screen appears as shown below Branch Parameters Additional SWIFT Address Branch SWIFT Addresses 1 Of 1 SWIFT Address Description You can specify the SWIFT addresses related to the branch in this screen 5 1 8 Defining Account Mask Customer Account Masks can be defined at the Branch Level or at the Bank Level Click the Account Mask in the Branch Parameters screen to invoke Account Parameters screen The screen is as shown below Account Parameters Customer Account Mask Checksum Algorithm User Defined Algorithm Customer Account Consumer Number Start Account Number End Account Number Auto Generate Account Loan Account Auto Generate Auto Account Creation Start Account Number End Account Number Fund Subscription Start Account Number End Account Number ORACLE For further details please refer the Section Specifying the Account generation Parameters at bank level under Bank Parameters Fund Subscription You may wish the system to automatically create deposit accounts for customers at the time of fund subscription These system created deposit accounts are for u
44. Enter a description using a maximum of 35 SWIFT characters For example taking the above example you can input here Past Due Obligation 1 for Loan if you are maintaining status codes for Loans Link to This represents the category of the product asset or liability to which the contract status is applicable For example if you are maintaining status codes for loans or any money market placements click on assets type of product If you are maintaining status codes for deposits click on liability type of products we ORACLE 17 2 2 17 3 Effective days from Maturity This indicates the number of days after the due date when this status becomes applicable to the contract You can specify any number of days from 0 999 The effective days defined here is defaulted to the product level in the Bills and Loans modules You have the option of redefining the number of days at the product level Maintaining Status Codes for OD Account Oracle FLEXCUBE provides a facility to maintain status codes for Charge off and Write off satus of the OD account These status codes are maintained in Status Code Maintenance screen and the details of the same are as follows Status Code Description Status Sequence Status Type CROF Status code for Should be less Account Charge off of OD than SUSP status accounts sequence SUSP WOFF Status code for Should be greater Account suspended status than CROF statu
45. ID of the user who generated the report the date and time at which it was generated and the modules covered in the report ars ORACLE Body of the Report Field Name Field Description Branch Code Current branch code Customer Number Customer identification number Customer Name Customer name Customer Account Customer account number Number Document Type Type of document Expiry Date Expiry date of the document Expected Date of Expected date of document submission Submission Actual Submission Actual document submission date Date 35 18 Memo Revaluation Report You can invoke this screen by typing ACRMREVU in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Memo Revaluation Report ReportFormat PDF Printer At Client Report Output Print Printer 35 18 1 Contents of Report Header The Header carries the title of the Report information on the branch code the branch date the user ID the module name the date and time at which the report was generated and the page number of the report oe 39 ORACLE Body of the Report Field Name Field Description Currency This is the currency for which transaction details is being reported Revaluation Rate This is the revaluation rate Account This is the account for which transaction details is being reported Descrip
46. IN Currency Out Currency Euro Closed PC Currency Country Mapping Fields Modification Number Wi Authorized E Open Authorized By Date Time input By Date Time Maintaining Currency Details Currency Code Currencies are identified in Oracle FLEXCUBE by the SWIFT codes assigned to them The currency will be identified by this code in all transactions that involve it Currency Name You can enter the detailed name of the currency in not more than thirty five alphanumeric characters Currency Type As per your bank s requirement you can choose to classify currencies into different currency types The bank can use its own discretion to decide the basis of classifying currencies into different currency types A currency type can consist of a maximum of three characters Depending on the customer account mask maintained the value in the currency type field would be used during the generation of customer account numbers through the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen 10 1 ORACLE If you have decided to include currency type as part of the customer account number in the account number mask then at the time of creating a new customer account number you will need to select the currency of the account number being generated In the option list provided for currency the currency code is displayed along with the associated currency type say USD 1 GBP 2 etc When the account number gets populated
47. Limits tab The customer will utilize this clean limit line until he furnishes a PPC against part or full completion of a milestone On receiving the PPC the bank does the following Captures the PPC details If it is a joint venture then the system will default the joint venture details to this screen based on the details captured in the project maintenance venture details screen If Auto Line Creation for PPC field is unchecked You should manually create the line whenever a PPC is received The line currency can be other than project currency also but the PPC CCY should be either project currency or line currency You should manually enter the limit line details in the project maintenance screen limits tab if the project lines are created manually and in the PPC maintenance screen Joint Venture tab if PPC lines are created manually If joint venture party limits tracking is not required then the system will attach one line for the project customer with 100 tracking The system will also update the project ID and the PPC ID in the Facility Maintenance screen once the linkage between a line and a PPC Project is established manually during PPC maintenance If Auto Line Creation for PPC field is checked Onauthorizing the PPC the system will create the limit lines for each of the PPC for liability ID of the project customer You should allocate the limit to the project line equal to the len
48. Line Serial Currency You can view the following details e Project Line Details Line ID Line Serial Limit Utilized Paid e Customer Line Details Party ID Share Line ID Line Serial Limit Utilized Paid 33 5 3 Viewing Commitment Details You can view the commitment details by clicking on the Commitment Details tab in the Dashboard Details screen 33 20 ORACLE The screen is as shown below Dashboard Detail E New amp Enter Query Project ID Customer ID Account No Project Name Customer Name Account CCY Project Amount Available Balance Current Balance Project Utilization Currency PPC Details Limit Details eJn cnan EtE Loan Details 10f1 Contract Reference Currency Amount Outstanding Amount Maturity Date a You can view the following details e Contract Reference e Currency e Amount e Outstanding Amount e Maturity Date 33 5 4 Viewing Loan Details You can view the loan details by clicking on the Loan Details tab in the Dashboard Details screen The screen is as shown below Dashboard Detail E New E Enter Query Project ID Customer ID Account No Project Name Customer Name Account CCY Project Amount Available Balance Current Balance Project Utilization Currency PPC Details Limit Details Commitment Details REW eSei
49. MT 103 format Note Since the system is also capable of processing incoming MT 103 messages in the MT 103 format Therefore during the upload process for your branch the system considers an MT 103 payment message to be of MT 103 format for those customer currency and product combinations for which the MT 103 option has been enabled CLS currency To allow customers of your bank to settle their FX deals via the CLS Continuous Linked Settlements Bank you can identify the currency to be a CLS Currency FX deals in the CLS currency only will be eligible to be routed through the CLS bank From the available list of CLS currencies you can further maintain a list of allowed or disallowed currencies for a specific customer Every customer who is a CLS Participant will be allowed to trade in all the available CLS currencies unless specifically mentioned Refer the Continuous Linked Settlements chapter of the Foreign Exchange User Manual for details on maintaining currency restrictions and other maintenances required for processing CLS deals in Oracle FLEXCUBE Index Flag Check this box to derive index rate of the currency in Lending module Validate Tag 50F Check this box to indicate that validations need to be performed for the 50F details captured for the ordering customer during contract input For more details on 50F validations refer the chapter titled Maintaining Addresses for a Cust
50. Modification Date Time Date Time Number Wi Authorized Open The following parameters need to be maintained to define a dealer ID Dealer Id Enter a unique code to identify the dealer The identification code can have a maximum of six alphanumeric characters The dealer will be identified by this code for all transactions entered in Oracle FLEXCUBE You can also retrieve dealer wise information on the treasury deals entered into by your bank Dealer Name You can also enter a detailed name of the dealer The name of the dealer will be displayed whenever the dealer Id is used 4 ORACLE 5 1 5 1 1 5 Branch Parameters Creating Branches In the Branch Parameters screen you create the various branches of your bank define their reporting hierarchy and maintain parameters such as their names their address of location SWIFT TELEX and HOST addresses In this screen you can do the following e Create the Regional Offices and branches of your bank by assigning each a unique branch code e Maintain the address of location of each of the branches and also their SWIFT TELEX and HOST addresses e Specify the Suspense GL for posting all those accounting entries for which no GL has been specified or the specified GL has been closed e Define preferences such as the retention duration a CIF number for walk in customers and the GL for netting FX contracts e Maintain customer number range for generation of CI
51. Project Details Customer Number Branch Code Project ID Currency Project Name Number Of PPCs Project Account Branch Default PPC Clearance Days Project Account Start Date Liability No End Date Project Value Sponsor Retention Margin Remarks Bank Margin 7 Ratio Change Allowed J Auto Line Creation for PPC F JV Limit Tracking Required J Limit Track Required through Commitment Main Milestones Venture Details PPC Limits Non PPC Limits Sponsor Consultant 101 1 Of 1 Sponsor ID Sponsor Name Sponsor Consultant ID Consultant Name Consulta Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status 33 3 2 1 Maintaining Sponsor Details Sponsor ID Specify the sponsor identification details of the project If the sponsor is the customer of the bank then you can specify the CIF identification details Sponsor Name Specify the name of the sponsor The system will display the sponsor name if you had specified the CIF ID in the Sponsor ID field Sponsor Address Specify the address of the sponsor The system will display the sponsor address if you had specified the CIF ID in the Sponsor ID field Sar ORACLE 33 3 2 2 Maintaining Consultant Details 33 3 3 Consultant ID Specify the consultant identification details of the project If the sponsor is the customer of the bank then you c
52. Query lis E Customer Borrow Lend Borrow Lend Currency Customer Spread Maintenance HE a Amount Slab Input By Authorized By Modification Date Time Date Time Number W Authorized E Open 15 1 2 1 Making Margin Applicable to All Customers For a given currency you can define borrow and sell margins to be applied to All customers At the customer field choose ALL However if you have maintained currency margins for a specific customer and currency combination it takes precedence over the margin defined for all customers Currency margins can be maintained for customers across branches In effect a branch can maintain margins for a customer belonging to another branch These margins are propagated across branches of your bank 153 ORACLE 16 1 16 2 16 Period Code Maintenance Introduction Banks like all business houses compute their profits and losses and assess their financial position at the end of each financial year which typically extends to 12 months from January to December or from March to April However this could be changed depending upon the Bank s policies and regulatory requirements For interim reporting needs the financial year is further divided into accounting periods the duration of which is again determined by the bank s accounting requirements For example your bank s Board of Directors meets once a m
53. Re validation Preferences AccountMask Field Properties Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status FATCA Applicable Check this box to indicate that the FATCA rules are applicable to the bank Banks FATCA Classification FATCA Classification Specify the bank s own FATCA classification The adjoining option list displays the all the allowed classifications maintained for customer type bank using the Customer Type Wise FATCA Parameters screen Employer Identification No EIN Specify the employer identification number EIN issued to the bank by IRS Note All the statuses do not require employer identification number EIN Issue Date Date of Agreement Specify the date on which the employer identification number EIN was issued by IRS or the date on which the bank entered into an agreement with IRS Expiry Date Date of Revalidation Some classification requires revalidation of employer identification number EIN periodically Specify the date on which the EIN is to be revalidated GIIN Specify the global Intermediary Identification number issued to the bank by the IRS a0 ORACLE Remarks Provide any remarks comments or observations regarding the Bank s FATCA Classification 200 ORACLE 3 1 3 2 3 Ramadan Maintenance Introduction Zakat is a charge which is applied on the balance in an account if the balance is above a certain thresh
54. SAVINVG CCCCSSd BP15005624019 LLLL TTCCCC Case 1 Modulo 11 SAVIGBP CCCCSSd SA15005624028 ORACLE eee Chk sum Generated Mask maintained Booked against Algorithm Account Number LLLLLL ZZCCC Case 2 Modulo 11 CACINGB CCCnnd PO005624997 nnnnnnnD Case 1 Modulo 11 09888994 bbb Case 4 Modulo 11 015SAVYA105624 bLLLZZZZCCCCC 074 nnd LLLLLL CCCC Case 1 2 Modulo 97 Error Will not be CCCSSDD able to generate the check digit The control digits value must be numeric for Mod ulo 97 LLLLLLT Case 3 Modulo 97 123456890900562 TTTTCCCCCSSD 40150 D Customer Account Number Containing a UDF Value While defining a customer account if you include U in the account mask it indicates that the customer account numbers will have the value of a user defined field The number of U s will depend on the length of the UDF value that has to be included in the customer account number For example if you want to include 3 characters from a UDF the account mask should consist of UUU in addition to other parameters which you want to include in the customer account numbers Note A user defined field can be part of the customer account mask only if the customer account number generation is not automatic Since a customer account number in Oracle FLEXCUBE can accommodate only up to 20 characters you have to ensure that the account mask you have defined does not
55. SOs INtFODUCHION 21 ceisesaks thats tees Adc cur A ena te laminae A artis 33 1 33 2 Processing Finance for Projecta roren tri rieren A GE AA R TA 33 1 33 3 Maintaining Project Financing Transaction ccccceccceeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeaees 33 4 33 3 1 Specifying the Project Details ccccccccesseceeeeneeeeeeteeeaeeeeteeeeaaeeeeeeenanees 33 5 33 3 2 Specifying the Main Details cccccccccccceceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeenaaees 33 7 33 3 3 Specifying Milestones Detalls cccccccccecseceeeeeneeeeeeseeeeeeeteeeeaaeeeteeeaeees 33 8 33 3 4 Specifying the Venture Details ccccccceseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeteneeeeeeteeaeeees 33 9 33 3 5 Specifying PPC Limits Detallls eeri iaoa E T OE 33 11 33 3 6 Specifying Non PPC Limits Detalls ccccccccsseeeeeenteeeeeeenieteeeeeeaees 33 13 33 4 Maintaining PPE ccc rrr AE E a A TE A A A EA 33 14 33 4 1 Specifying PPC Maintenance Details ccccccsseceeestiteeeeentetteeeeeaees 33 15 33 4 2 Specifying Joint Venture Detallls 0 ccccseccccccesseeeeeeenteeeeeeeneeteeeeenaees 33 16 33 4 3 Maintaining PPC Liquidation ccccccceccsseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeteeeeeaees 33 17 33 5 Viewing Dashboard Details 2 0 0 0 ecccceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaes 33 18 33 5 1 Viewing PPC Details Arrn a EEA EEA EE E AEE ANTY 33 18 33 5 2 Viewing Limit Details ecte ussi teii eniisona iaren iiai eee eeeneeeeeeeeeaaeeeseeeneeeeeeeenaes 3
56. Server IP The system defaults the IP address of the server where web service is installed l ORACLE 8 2 1 WebService Server Port The system displays the port of the server where web service is installed WebService Server URI The system defaults the URI of the server where web service is installed Mapping of Web Service WebService mapping is attached to the transaction screens for which web service call is required You can invoke this screen by typing CSCEXWS0O in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button WebService Description Reference Number 10f1 WebService Code Calling Sequence Number Calling Stage Status Details a PRE Unprocessed WebService Code Select the unique web service code from the adjoining option list Call Sequence Number The unique sequence number for the web service is displayed here Calling Stage Select the stage at which web service should be called from the drop down list Status The system defaults the status of the web service oe ORACLE 8 2 2 Web Service Details Web Service details is attached to the maintenance screens for which web service call is required You can invoke this screen by typing CSCEXWSM in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Webservice Details 1 Of 1 E We
57. This is the code for the current financial year as defined by you in the Period Code screen a ORACLE 5 1 5 6 Current Period Each financial year is divided into accounting periods called Period Codes defined in the Period Code Maintenance Screen for details refer period Code screen The current accounting period of the financial year is displayed in this field Specifying Referral Cut off Time Referral refers to the process of handling customer transactions that force the accounts involved in such transaction to exceed the overdraft limit Examples of typical transactions which force an account to move into overdraft are Payment and Collections Funds Transfers Standing Instructions or Clearing transactions If an account is marked for referral the details of transactions resulting in the account moving into Overdraft will be sent to the referral queue Hours amp Minutes In branch parameter you have to specify the referral cut off time for accepting rejecting transactions in the referral queue In case a transaction is rejected from the referral queue after the cut off time then system displays the override message as Rejected after cut off time Note Transactions are accepted into the Referral Queue even after cut off time if account goes into overdraft Auto Authorisation Oracle FLEXCUBE enables you to allow certain users of your choice depending on your requirements at
58. aa ORACLE 6 1 6 Account Branch Transfer Introduction 6 2 You may get request from the customers for change of account branch Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to transfer a customer account from one branch of the bank to another You can also transfer the all accounts that belong to an account class to a different branch at once This chapter explains the required maintenances and the methods to process account branch transfer Maintaining Branch Transfer Parameters OLE_LINK6OLE_LINK5OLE_LINK6OLE_LINKSIn order to facilitate this you need to maintain the branch transfer parameters using Branch Transfer Parameters Maintenance screen To invoke this screen type CSDACTRP in the field at the top right corner of the Application toolbar and click the adjoining arrow button Branch Transfer Parameter Maintenance Screen E New amp Enter Query Branch Code Process Mode Sequential Transaction Code No of Parallel Jobs Transfer Bridge GL Commitment Frequency Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status Specify the following details Transaction Code Specify a unique transaction code The system will use this transaction code to post the accounting entries while processing the account balance transfer from one branch to another Note Ensure that the options Account Activity Cheque Mandatory IC Transaction Count IC Turnover Inclu
59. account Cheque Numbers Unique For Branch For cheque numbers that are automatically generated you can choose to make cheque numbers unique across the branches of your bank If you indicate that serial numbers need not be unique you can have the same cheque number assigned to cheque leaves of different accounts within a branch In effect cheque numbers remain unique to an account Lodgment Numbers Unique for Branch You can indicate whether lodgment leaves must have unique numbers in a branch or must be unique for individual accounts For example in the Bank Wide Parameters you have specified that lodgment book numbers must be unique for the branch This means that lodgment numbers need to be unique across all accounts of that branch For instance if a book is maintained with the Start Number as 1 and containing 25 leaves you cannot start another book in respect of any other account with these numbers If you have specified that lodgment book numbers must be unique to accounts in the branch and a book is maintained with the Start Number as 1 and containing 25 leaves you cannot start another book in respect of the same account with these numbers However you can start a book with the same numbers in respect of another account in the branch Specifying TRS Details You can maintain the following details that will be used by the system to raise direct debit for Tax Relief at Source TRS rebate availed by customers on mortgag
60. account number e Currency Type 1 digit This will represent the currency type of the account currency As explained for account code you will select a 3 digit currency code during account generation The system will convert it to the currency type maintained for that currency The currency type will then form a part of the account mask e CIF Number You can also include the CIF number of the customer as part of the account mask The CIF number is automatically generated by the system when you capture customer details in the Customer Information Maintenance screen During customer account maintenance you can select the CIF number from the option list provided Sequence Number 1 digit The sequence number is automatically generated by the system for a combination of account code currency type customer This means that for this combination you can maintain nine accounts To maintain the 10 account for the same combination the system will use the Dummy Customer No Range maintained at the branch level Refer the section titled Creating Branches of this document for more details on dummy number range e Control Number 1 digit This is the 13th digit of the account number This number is also automatically generated by the system based on the Modulo 11 with Weights algorithm For the above combination the customer account mask would be pbbTZCCCCCCSd Where e bbb is the branch code
61. adjoining arrow button AML Product Categories Maintenance E New 5 Enter Query Product Category ProductType Cash Description Non Cash Limit Currency Exchange Rate Code az Exchange Rate Type Buy Rate v Debit Credit Indicator Debit Indicator Credit Indicator Both Aggregate Together Both Aggregate Separately Individual Daily Monthly Online Online Daily Limit Details Limit Code Limit Amount Limit Currency C E Input By Authorized By Modification Date Time Date Time Number Wi Authorized E Open Product Category You should identify each product category with an identification code by giving it a unique name Description With each product category you have to associate a brief description This description is meant for information purposes and will not be used for any processing Limit Currency You have to identify the currency in which limits have to be tracked for transactions associated with the product category A list of all the currencies maintained in Oracle FLEXCUBE is available in the option list positioned next to this field You can select the appropriate Product Type Transactions grouped under a product can either be cash based or non cash based Therefore you would have created products catering to cash based and non cash based transactions While creating a product category you have to
62. based on the Country Code Bank Code and Account Number combination The Bank Code Mask After indicating the IBAN mask you have to specify the mask for the Bank Code The Bank Code mask is a combination of alphabets and numerals Therefore you can specify A and N as the identifiers Subsequently while capturing the bank code in the IBAN screen each of these characters will be replaced with the respective alphabet or numeral For instance let us assume that you have maintained a 15 character mask for the Bank Code AIA A A A A A A A N N N N NJN You will have to capture the corresponding bank code in the same format C H A S E B A N K 0 0 0 1 0 1 Note The combined length of the Bank Code and Account Number should not exceed 30 char acters 5 1 11 6 Indicating Cheque Number Mask Cheque Number Mask The system displays the cheque number mask maintained at bank parameter level met ORACLE 5 1 11 7 5 1 12 The Cheque Number Mask defined at branch parameter level cannot be changed once maintained and authorized If the cheque book is issued to non base branch accounts the system populates or validates the cheque numbers based on the cheque mask of the account branch Indicating ELCM Integration Check this box to indicate that the branch details will be replicated to ELCM syste
63. beginning of the report Other content displayed in the report is as follows Header The header carries the Report Name Branch Branch Date User Id Module Run Date and Time Sraa ORACLE Body of the Report Field Name Field Description Account Number Indicates the account number Account Name This indicates the name of the account Currency Indicates the currency of the account Amount Indicates the amount Instrument Number Indicates the instrument number Description Indicates the description of the demand draft Cheque Number Indicates the Cheque Number Drawn On Indicates the date when the DD was drawn Input On Indicates the date when the data was provided Reference Number Indicates the reference number Maker ID Indicates the identification of the maker of the record Maker Date Stamp Indicates the date when the record was created Checker ID Indicates the identification of the checker who author ized the record Checker Date Stamp Indicates the date on which the record was authorized 35 23 PDC Input Report You can invoke PDC Input Report screen by typing CSRPPDC in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button oon ORACLE The screen is as shown below PDC input Report ReportFormat PDF Printer At Client Rep
64. branch details Whereabouts Unknown Gives the customer s details regarding the wherea bouts Deceased Indicates whether the customer is fit or deceased Short Name Customer s abbreviated name Liability This is the customer Liability ID number for which credit facility granted to the customer Language Language Category Category of the customer of the bank Professional Details Designation Indicates Designation Employer Indicates Employer Status Indicates Status Tenure Indicates Tenure Address Indicates Address 35 24 ORACLE Email Indicates Email Fax Indicates Fax Phone Indicates Phone Telex Indicates Telex Home Value Indicates Home Value Insurance Indicates Insurance Loans Indicates Loans Expenses Indicates Expenses Income Indicates Income Previous Designation Indicates Previous Designation Previous Employer Indicates Previous Employer Rent Indicates Rent Ret Age Indicates Ret Age Credit Cards Indicates Credit Cards IE Currency Indicates IE Currency Salary Indicates Salary Corporate Details National Id Indicates National Id Name Indicates Name Currency Of Amounts Indicates Currency Of Amounts Incorporation Country Indicates Incorporation Country Incorporation Date Indicates Incorporation Date Net worth Indicates Net worth Capi
65. cash flow report are discussed under the following heads Header The Header carries the title of the report information on the branch code the ID of the user who generated the report the module page number and the date and time at which it was generated Body of the Report The report is sorted on the currency of the cash flow Field Name Field Description Interval Indicates the interval of cash flow Amount In This is the amount debited into the particular account for the particular period Sanr ORACLE 35 4 2 Account This is the account number Account Class This indicates the account class Amount Out This is the amount credited from the account during the spec ified period Net Flow Indicates the net flow Currency Indicates the currency of the transaction Cash Flow Summary Report The Cash Flow summary report summarizes the details of cash flow for particular Accounts or Account Classes Header The Header carries the title of the report information on the branch code the ID of the user who generated the report and the date and time at which it was generated Body of the Report The report is sorted on the currency of the cash flow for different account classes and their accounts The following details are displayed Field Name Field Description Amount In This is the amount debited into the particular account for the specific period
66. code account class currency amp sequence number combination e C Customer number e b Branch e Account class e 2Z Currency e S Single digit sequence number e S Double digit sequence number e Unused customer account number is reused in the same day except in the following scenarios e Session termination for the current user ae ORACLE e Multiple windows opened for the same Function ID by the current user Pure Numeric Masks A numeric account mask which does not have a checksum algorithm associated with it is called a pure numeric mask Since it does not have a checksum algorithm associated with it you will have to specify the start and end account numbers and enable the auto generated option The start account number forms the basis on which customer accounts numbers are to be generated Similarly you will not be allowed to maintain account numbers beyond the end account number Let us assume that you are have maintained the following details in the Account Parameters screen at your bank Customer Account Mask nnnnn Start Account Number 1 End Account Number 50000 Cust Accunt Auto Generate Yes While generating a new account number the system will automatically generate 00001 corresponding to nnnnn The next account will be 00002 Note n is allowed in the account mask only if auto account number generation is selected at branch level Including Value of a UD
67. component in the sequence format is identified as one of the following e An Oracle FLEXCUBE Component If your sequence format uses an Oracle FLEXCUBE column directly you can specify it as an Oracle FLEXCUBE Component For instance you may want to include the product group associated with the product code involved in a contract as a component in sequence number generation To achieve this you will use the Oracle FLEXCUBE column PRODUCT_GROUP available in the table CSTM_PRODUCT as an Oracle FLEXCUBE Component e A User Component You may want the first two characters of your bank s name to be part of all the user reference numbers generated at your bank You can define it as a user component In addition if you want to use the manipulated value of an Oracle FLEXCUBE Column in the sequence format you can specify it as a User Component For eg you may want to include ONLY the first four characters of the product group in the sequence number In this case the component would be defined as a User Component e A Separator To separate the various components from one another you can use the component known as the separator Eg a back slash a hyphen etc e A Running Number Each contract is identified by a unique sequence number It is mandatory to maintain a running number as a component in the sequence format If not included you will not be allowed to save the details of the format A running number is internally generated b
68. do not specify the account to which year end balances of a particular GL should be posted it will be posted to the bank s year end profit and loss account You can select a GL code from the option list of all assets liabilities income and expense GLs maintained in the chart of accounts screen Transaction Code Indicate the transaction code that should be used to post the balances in the income and expense accounts to the year end GL account You can select a transaction code from the list of transaction codes maintained in the Transaction Code Maintenance screen Spread Capture the following details Spread Application Indicate the transaction legs for which the spread should be applicable Choose the appropriate option from the following available in the adjoining drop down list e Single Leg e Both Legs Spool File Purge Days Specify the duration for which spool files should be stored in the spool file directory Interpay Lead Days Specify the inter pay lead days required for fetching billing records for inter pay files for automatic billing of clients Auto Batch Each time you post journal and multi offset entries you need to open a batch You can specify that the batch numbers of the journal entry batches opened in your bank should be generated automatically by enabling the Auto Batch option Consequently the system automatically generates batch numbers while posting journal and multi offset entries 26
69. ds au a ei eh 25 1 25 2 Maintaining Feature ID eee ceeeeceeeee A TO AANA 25 1 25 2 1 Specifying UDF Vallos erriari ar a iea i e iii aa i ie ea 25 3 25 3 Viewing Feature ID SUMMAry eessssseseeessssrrrssrrrnsssrirrsssttnnnssttnnnnsatennnsstennnnstenn 25 3 26 gt Purging Data sii entasen aeaaaioii eratu a een cate cat 26 1 26 1 IMtrOMUCUION tsececeeshateneess tidedecee cated aoacte bt edbeae bedsavicdan tad piecadia tydtgenateahegedie Hd iadecenaaadt geets 26 1 26 2 Modol Purging seror a N old ioadanenacsdoegs cd Muka pnd ne meee 26 1 26 3 The system will automatically purge data according to the parameters that you define in the Purge Details Maintenance screen Maintaining Purge Details 2 00 00 ee eeeeeeeeenteeeeeeenaees 26 2 26 4 Entity Purging tccj cen iii entities neni deni a AE S AA 26 3 26 4 1 Configuring Purge Parameters cccccceccteeeeesteeeeeeeeeeeeeteneaeeteetneeaeeees 26 4 26 4 2 Viewing Purge Parameter Configuration Details ccccccccsseeteeeenteeeees 26 6 26 4 3 Processing Ad hoc PUIQG 1 cccccssssccccesseedeceesensnscectesadacececesnnideneeesanncecees 26 7 26 4 4 INQUITING PULGO LOJ irii a EE O E E 26 9 PA AEI 0 DORE 2A E E E E A E E es 27 1 201 PORUCI Oeria rnei R A al a ATAT AAEE A O TA eee 27 1 27 1 1 Gateway Messaging sreseireiiiesririreririrezieeeitiinririeieininiin tiert ie iti erreira 27 1 2112 Woo Brann a e e eee EA ees ea esses 27 1 2h Batch Processing orrara aaa AA aaa 27 1 27 1 4
70. during installation You only have to create the Regional Offices and the various branches During installation the system automatically populates this screen with the branch code and name of your Head Office that you have specified to the implementer The Parent branch and the Regional Office fields also default to this branch code To create an RO invoke a new screen Then enter the code and name of the RO against Branch Code and Name respectively You do not need to specify the Regional office because the HO Code is the default for the field All ROs report to the HO Then create all the branches If a branch reports to an RO to specify that RO is the branch s Regional Office select the code you want from the option list provided for this field But before designating you should authorize all the RO records you have created the system will not allow you to use any unauthorized record Diagrammatic Representation HO code and name specified durina installation of FlexCUBE at On irvokina pranoi Code _ Branch table e had HO Code and Name To create an RO Click on l Enter RO Code aq Branch Code Enter RO Name aq Name Reports to Parent Branch 23 HO Cock cefaulted Reaional Branch 2S HO Cock defaulted Authorize AO records To create a branch Enter branch Code aq Branch Code Enter its name aa Name Parent Branch iaz
71. e T indicates the account code e Z is the currency type e CCCCCC is the CIF number of the customer e S is the sequence number for a combination of account code currency type and customer e d is the control number generated by Modulo 11 with Weights algorithm The following example illustrates the manner in which the system calculates the 13t digit for a customer account number using the Modulo 11 with Weights algorithm Assume that the account number of a customer is 000 4 1 123456 1 As per this algorithm the value of each position 1 to 12 is multiplied with the weight for each position the weights are provided by your bank Further the sum of the product obtained is divided by 11 The remainder of the division will determine the value of the 13 digit The position wise weight and account number and the product of weight and number is as follows Position 1 2 3 4 15 6 7 8 9 e au ORACLE Weight W 214 8 5 10 9 I7 3 e 2 l3 5 Acct No N 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 1 1 Product W N o lo 0 5 20 27 28 15 36 8 3 5 Sum of the product 147 Divide the value 147 by 11 to obtain the remainder Remainder 147 11 4 As per this algorithm if the remainder is 10 then the control number will be zero If it is any value other than 10 the remainder itself will be taken as the
72. e The Position GLs that you specify here for the corresponding currency e Position GLs of your choice Tolerance Limit When you are maintaining an In Currency or the Euro in the Currency Definition screen you can define a Tolerance Limit for it The limit is expressed as a percentage The implication During the transition period settlement of components in In currencies can be made either in the same currency or in the Euro EUR depending on the settlement account s maintained Similarly components in Euro can either be settled in EUR or in an In currency In the settlement messages that are generated MT 100 MT202 the settlement amount would be reported in the Settlement Account Currency However you can opt to additionally furnish the value of the component in Euro Related Information ERI currency You have to manually specify the settlement amount value in the ERI currency in the Settlement Message Details screen When generating the message towards settlement MT100 MT202 the system ensures that the value you specify as the ERI Amount conforms to the Tolerance Limit defined for the ERI Currency in the Currency Definition screen That is the system computes the ERI equivalent of the settling amount using the pegged rates and compares the same against the ERI 10 4 ORACLE amount input by the user If the difference is within the tolerance limits defined for the ERI currency the user spec
73. ends tee sens sbb igetunbeabitoeetiabtecehs 30 1 30 2 Upload File Foma recen a a a eea a 30 1 Anti Money Laundering Reporting sssssssssssnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 31 1 31 1 Guarding Against Money Laundering ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeenateeeeneaaes 31 1 31 1 1 Creating Product Categories in Oracle FLEXCUBE cccsseeceeeeeees 31 1 31 2 Maintaining Limit Codes irae ae a E EE A E AE 31 3 31 3 Maintaining Anti Money Laundering Customer GroupsS cccececeeeetteeeeeeeenaes 31 4 31 4 Monitoring AML ACCOUNTING ccceeeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeseeenaeeeeeteenaeeeeeneeaas 31 7 Developer and Developer Project Maintenance ccccccseseeeseeeeeees 32 1 B2 T IMtrOdUCTION oera AE E AITE AA ATAA 32 1 32 2 Maintaining Developer Details eee ceceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeiaeeeeeeenaaes 32 1 32 2 1 Viewing Project Details eissirsirieeeieir eai ainia ii iai u aiaa i adiis 32 2 32 2 2 Viewing UDF Details asosii asirasi iira iiie EEEE EAA AE rii Ea 32 3 32 3 Viewing Developer Maintenance SUMMAary sssseseisssseerressrerrrsserrressrrrrsssrrrrnssnt 32 3 32 4 Maintaining Developer Project Details cc eeeeeeeeeeeecteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeaaes 32 4 32 4 1 Viewing UDF Details aotroni e EErEE AEE EOS E SEAE OEE 32 5 32 5 Viewing Developer Project Maintenance Summary ccceeeeeteeeeeeetteeeeeeeeneaees 32 6 Project FInaneing a ee eee 33 1
74. example for TCT code you can enter Transfer Charges Transaction SWIFT Code This is the SWIFT code to which this transaction code is linked It is used for posting transaction details on SWIFT format Select from the option list It will display a list of SWIFT formatted codes representing transaction types The following list is displayed AA TRANSACTION TYPE BOE Bill of Exchange BRF Brokerage fee CHG Charges and other Expenses CHK Cheques CLR Cash Letter Cheque Remittance COL Collections COM Commission DCR Documentary Credit for Principal Amount DIV Dividends Warrants EQA Equivalent Amount We ORACLE 18 2 1 1 ECK Euro checks FEX Foreign Exchange INT Interest LBX Lock Box LDP Loan Deposit MSC Miscellaneous RTI Returned Item SEC Securities STO Standing Order TCK Travelers Cheques TRF Transfer VDA Value Date Adjustment The codes COL Collections DCR Documentary Credit and SCC Securities are used when entering a principal amount MIS Head Each Transaction Code that is created can be linked to an MIS Head An MIS Head indicates the manner in which the type of entry should be considered for profitability reporting purposes Indicating Availability Information This states the different time intervals after which funds will be available for withdrawal in case of all transactions posted under thi
75. fields e Authorization Status e Developer Code e Record Status e Project Name After specifying the parameters for the query click Search button The system displays all the records matching the parameters specified You can view the following details e Authorization Status e Record Status e Developer Code e Project Name e Project Description e Address e Status ai ORACLE 33 1 33 2 33 Project Financing Introduction Project financing is the financing of long term infrastructure and industrial projects involving a number of equity investors and a group of banks Project financing is a credit facility sanctioned to the contractors who execute large infrastructure projects residential complexes commercial complexes etc These contractors are awarded the contracts projects based on a BID system Once the project is awarded to a contractor he approaches the bank seeking for finance The contractor can avail financing from the bank against PPC Project Progress Certificate Project Payment Certificate or Invoice or TD or a clean line PPCs are one type of backing against which OD is provided The contractor can be a single entity or a joint venture JV In case of a joint venture the share of the overdraft for each contractor will depend on their share in the joint venture Processing Finance for Project The process of project financing is as follows eye comso ca O a ORACLE C
76. fund branch Allow Corporate Access Select this option to specify that the fund subscription redemption operations in the fund branch can access the accounts of corporate branch Note You will not be allowed to change this field once the branch record has been authorized This field will be enabled only if the branch is a fund branch oF ORACLE 5 1 4 3 External Value Specify the name of the branch as maintained in an external system This value can be used to interface with the external system EOC Status Under EOC status one of the following alphabets will be displayed which stand for the following B Beginning of financial input indicates system transactions in progress Indicates that user transactions are in progress T End of user transaction input indicates system transactions in progress F End of financial input system transactions also completed E End of Day Branch awaiting date change The values are updated by EOC process Specifying Time Zone Offset For branches with different time zones you can define the offset time that is to be displayed in maker checker stamp and all the reports generated for the branch The offset time is specified in terms of hours and minutes and the time will be added subtracted from the Server Time maintained for the bank Hours Specify the number of hours to be offset from Server Time to arrive at the local branch time This is the num
77. instrument transaction would be accepted with transaction status as Tanked e The accounting entries would be posted with tanked status After the branch available status is changed to Yes then e The transaction status of the Instrument transaction will be changed to Active e The tanked accounting entries if any would be un tanked by the batch process for releasing the tanked accounting entries Processing Standing Instructions The standing instructions are processed with the tanked status as Yes if the branch is not available for transaction During the standing instruction query the instruction can be viewed as tanked if it is tanked and that the request processed when the branch available status is No or when branch date was ahead of host date When the instruction is received while the branch is unavailable then the process is as follows e The instruction is accepted with transaction status as Tanked e Accounting entries are posted with the status Tanked Once the branch status is Available then the following process is applicable e The transaction status of the instruction is changed to Un tanked e A batch process releases the tanked accounting entries e For all instructions whose booking date is the same as the Application date the Date Change BOD Batch of that date updates the status to Un tanked e The transaction date of the instruction remains the same after un tanking
78. it is the currency type that forms a part of the customer account number ISO Numeric Currency Code Specify the currency code specified by the International Standardization Organization Country After you have identified the currency you should indicate the country to which the currency belongs You can select a country code from the option list available Decimals You can indicate the number of decimal units up to which the currency can be denominated The number of decimals allowed for any amount in the currency can be 0 Currency with no decimals 2 Currency with two decimals 3 Currency with three decimals Interest Method You can indicate the interest rate to be used for transactions that involve this currency The interest options available are e Actual Actual e 30 US 360 e Actual 360 e 30 Euro 365 e 30 US 365 e Actual 365 e 30 Euro Actual e 30 US Actual e Actual Actual Select the interest method that should be used by default whenever the currency is used in transactions While processing a transaction that involves this currency the interest method defined for the currency is defaulted You have the option to change it for a specific transaction However if you do not specify an interest method for a transaction the method defined for the currency will be used For details refer to Annexure on Page 140 Spot Days The number of spot working days applicable for the currency is specifie
79. not maintain the age limit the system will automatically defaults it as 18 years during save Notification Days Specify the intimation days to send advice prior to the customer turns major based on DOB Cheque Stale Days Specify the cheque stale days Here you can identify the number of days for which stale validation is done 321 ORACLE Limit Expiry Advice Notification Days Specify the limit expiry advice notification days The system will send advice to the customer these many days before the limit expiry date The limit expiry advice generated by the system provides information on the limit details Multiple lines can be attached to a customer with different expiry dates Advice sent to the customer contains the details of the line which is about to expire 5 1 11 1 Specifying Back Valued Details For your branch you can specify the maximum period up to which back valued posting can be processed This restriction can be made applicable by specifying the following preferences Back Value Check Required It is used to indicate whether all back valued transactions should be validated against a specific period Back Value Days If you enable the Back Value Check Required option you must indicate the number of calendar days up to which back valued transactions can be allowed During transaction processing you will be allowed to post back valued transactions up to the specified date in the past no check will be done Further
80. of penalties on debit entries due to withdrawals from the account before the maturity date You must select the IC Penalty Inclusion check box to indicate this Inter Branch in Local Currency This indicates whether inter branch entries passed with this transaction code should be in Local currency If this option is checked the inter branch transactions would be passed in local currency This way the Treasury would be able to track its profit and the branch s profit by passing a single consolidated entry Position transfer from one branch to the Treasury branch at the treasury rate Note This option is applicable only if the local currency of the different branches is the same This option is applicable only for Fcy1 Fcy1 transactions For other transactions namely Fcy1 Fcy2 Lcy Fcy Fcy Lcy IB entries would be based on IB Parameters Maintenance For position transfer the Inter Branch in Local Currency check box in the Transac tion Code maintenance screen should be checked to avoid creating position due to IB posting Acumen Transaction Code You need to check this option in order to eliminate the deals transactions uploaded from the Acumen in the Hand off of transactions affecting FCY Position to Acumen from Oracle FLEXCUBE Note This is applicable where Oracle FLEXCUBE interfaces with Acumen Acumen is an Inte grated Turn key solution for Treasury Derivatives and Capital Markets Covering Front Ris
81. on history of rates for currency pairs You can invoke the screen by typing CYRTHIST in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 311 ORACLE CYRTHIST__CVS_MAIN Currency Rate History Report Report For All Currency Pairs Selected Currency Pair Selected Pair Currency 1 Currency 2 Date Range From Date To Date Report Format r Printer At Client Report Output Printer Header The Header carries the title of the report information on the branch code branch date the ID of the user who generated the report the date and time at which it was generated the module covered in the report reporting options currency pair from date and to date Body of the report The report is sorted by currency pairs The following details are displayed Field Name Field Description Currency This gives the currency pairs for which rate report has been gener Pair ated Quotation This indicates the quotation type either direct or indirect No of Units This indicates the number of units of one currency being quoted against the other Rate Type This is the rate type Date The effective date of the rates applied Mid Rate This is the mid rate used for conversion Buy Rate This is the buy rate used for conversion Sale Rate This is the sell rate used for conversion 35 8 Customer Account Opening Confirmation Report You c
82. on turnovers payment to be made through cheques etc Invoking Transaction Code Screen You can invoke Transaction Code Maintenance screen by typing STDTRNCD in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Transaction Code Maintenance E New amp Enter Query ransaction Details MIS Head Transaction Code External Code Description SwiftCode MSC Availability Information Immediate Anti Money Laundering Monitoring On Value Date Anti Money Laundering After Days with New Value Required Date After X days Product Category Statement Day Basis Current Working Day Intraday Release Salary Credit Days Overdraft Tracking Component type for Principal v transaction Preferences _ available Balance Check Required Jlinterests and Charges Penalty Inclusions Inter Branch in Local Currency Acumen Transaction Code _ Exempt Advance Interest Escrow Processing Available Balance Update Through PPC Cheque Mandatory interests and Charges Transaction Count Interests and Charges Turnover Inclusion Consider for Account Activity Viinterest and Charges Balance Inclusion Consider For Turnover Limit L Consider For Cover Account Fields ELCs Date Time Mod No Checker Date Time Record Status Authorization Status In this screen you maintain the following for a transaction e A code representing the tran
83. revaluation profit ioss GL and the account branch The account branch in this case is the Revaluation Into branch maintained as part of branch parameters maintenance Position Asset GL Specify the GL to which the notional asset needs to be transferred Position Liability GL Specify the GL to which the notional liability needs to be transferred Transaction Code Specify the transaction code used to pass the accounting for position transfer While saving the system will validate the difference between negotiated rate input by the user and the base rate maintained against the tolerance limit at the product level If the difference is not within the tolerance limit then the system will display an error message Specifying Suspense Batch Entry Details Specify the following details ou ORACLE Suspense Entry Required Check this box to indicate that automatic suspense entries can be posted for a branch If a mismatch occurs between real entries or contingent entries during the batch then the system will post the balancing entries and will continue the EOD without interruption if you check the Suspense Entry Required option and specify the Suspense Batch Entry details You can correct those entries manually at later stages If you leave this box unchecked and if a mismatch occurs in Real or contingent entries then the EOD is stopped and the error is thrown You have to correct the entries Suspense Transaction Code Spe
84. saved without selecting the limit line for customers checked for mandatory limit tracking then the system displays the error message as Limit tracking is mandatory for this customer lt Customer CIF gt Note By default the customer type is selected as Individual However you can modify it At the customer maintenance level system defaults Track Limits option based on the option set here 2 1 4 5 Specifying Cheque Discounting Details Cheque Return Count for Drawer Blacklisting The system displays the number of cheque returns for a drawer During the cheque return processing the system check the number of cheque returns against this maintenance and marks the drawer as Blacklisted drawer 2 1 4 6 Specifying Passbook Details Minimum Number of Digits for Passbook Specify the minimum number of digits for creating passbook number The system defaults the minimum value 10 However you can modify it a0 ORACLE Specifying UDF Details You can associate values to all the User Defined fields created and attached to the Bank Parameters Screen You can view the list of User Defined fields associated by clicking the Fields button The screen appears as shown below User Defined Fields Field Name Value Description You can enter the value for the UDFs listed here in the Value column For more details on how to create user D
85. screen You cannot input any values You also have the option of specifying whether you want to view authorized rates or the unauthorized rates for any currency pair You can invoke this screen by typing CYSRATES in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button The screen appears as shown below Ct Advanced Search 4 Reset Authorization Status Record Status Currency 1 Fa Currency 2 Record Status Branch Code Currency 1 Currency 2 Records perpage 15 v LFirst Previous 4 of 4 Next Last Authorizai Record St If the branches pick up the exchange rates maintained by the HO then each time you invoke the currency view screen from a branch it is advisable to update this screen with the latest rate input from the HO To do this click on Refresh Refresh updates the screen with the last exchange rates input Specifying Limits for Cross Currency Transactions Typically the exchange rates applicable for cross currency funds transfer or teller transactions is defaulted by the system depending upon the preference indicated in the product preferences for the product involving the transaction ii ORACLE In your bank for high value cross currency transactions you may want the user to manually enter the exchange rate involved rather than let the system automatically pick up a default rate during transaction i
86. that belong to the selected account class from the current branch to the target branch Current Branch Name The system displays the name of the current branch Target Branch Code Specify the target branch code The option list displays all valid branch codes maintained in the system Choose the appropriate one oe ORACLE 6 5 On processing the transfer the system will move the accounts that belong to the selected account class from the current branch to the target branch selected here Target Branch Name Based on the branch code selected the system displays the name of the target branch Transfer Date Specify the effective date of the account branch transfer Click the date button to choose a date from the calendar The transfer date must be a date in the future You cannot process the transfer on the current date or a past date Account Class Specify the account class that you need to transfer The option list displays all valid account classes maintained in the system Choose the appropriate one Account Class Description Based on the account class selected the system displays the account description Once you have captured the details save the record The system will process the account transfer on the transfer date Processing Account Branch Transfer During Beginning of Day Operations the system will check the accounts whose transfer date is the current system date These accounts are processed by the a
87. that can be uploaded into Oracle FLEXCUBE For all countries where EUR is not the local currency the respective holidays can be uploaded into the currency holidays tables For European countries where EUR is the currency you can upload the TARGET holidays Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to upload these currency holidays through the BIC BICPLUS Upload screen You can invoke this screen by typing etd ORACLE ISDBICPU in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button BIC Upload E New E3 Enter Query Source Code File Name File Path Intraday Sequence Number Submit Parameters Submit Batch Here you need to choose the source code as CCH from the drop down list For further details about this screen refer the section titled Uploading the BIC BICPLUS files into Oracle FLEXCUBE in the Settlements User Manual The holiday file gets uploaded with two records e HF Record wherein EUR is not the local currency e HS Record wherein EUR is the local currency For more details on the file formats of these records refer the chapter titled Annexure B File Formats ets ORACLE 22 1 22 Maintaining Clearing Holidays Introduction 22 1 1 You need to maintain a yearly list of holidays of your Clearing House This is defined in the Clearing House Holiday Calendar scr
88. the applicable status types as Account or Contract The status codes that have been maintained of type Account are available for association in the Account maintenance and those maintained with type Contract can be associated with contracts If status processing basis is at Group CIF level you can only maintain status codes of type Both that is applicable for both accounts and contracts In such a case you must associate the statuses at both the Account maintenance as well as for contracts Note Itis mandatory to maintain the status code NORM Normal with the sequence number as 0 for all the status types The sequence number must not be repeated for a status type The sequence number associated with the status will be used for determining the hierarchy of statuses i e higher the number worst the status and this will be unique for the status codes Maintaining Status Codes for Contracts The following parameters need to be maintained for defining a status code Status Code This is the code which identifies the status to which the contract belongs For example assign a code using a maximum of 3 characters alphanumeric For example if your contract has past its due obligation status you can input code PD1 PD representing post due obligation The number 1 stands for stage 1 of the post due obligation status Status Description This is the description of the status
89. the next working date For any schedule contract maturing at a future date say 5 years hence you can input a future date only if the calendar for that year has been maintained It is not necessary to maintain the list of all annual holidays for future you can merely define all regular weekly holidays This screen is maintained for each branch of your bank from the respective branches thus making it possible to have a different set of holidays for different branches of the bank Invoking Local Holiday Screen Invoke the Local Holiday Calendar screen by typing STDLOCHL in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 20 1 ORACLE 20 2 1 The screen is as shown below Local Holiday Calendar Maintenance Xx E New Enter Query S M E With _ E Sa sS M E w th F Sa s M T With F Sa January February March April May June July August September October November December Branch Year Local Holidays 1 0f1 Branch Code Year Month Holiday List Fields a Maker Date Time Mod No Checker Record Status Exit Date Time Authorization Status In this screen you can specify the weekly and also the annual holidays for your branch for any year between 1 AD and 4000 AD Steps to Define Yearly Holidays To define holidays for a year for instance for 2000 you have to do the following Building the calendar for the year
90. then the web service will be called and the response from the web service will be appended in the request before sending it to the back end Sa ORACLE 8 2 3 If in the request option to call the web service is post then the request will sent to back end first and the response from the back end will be sent to the web service The response from the web Service Call will be appended in the request and sent to the backend again WebService Maintenance Web Service Maintenance is attached to the maintenance screens for which web service call is required You can invoke this screen by typing CSDEXWSD in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button WebService Details E New amp Enter Query WebService Code Calling Sequence Number Calling Stage Status Key Id Request Response WebService Code The system displays the unique code of the web service Call Sequence Number The system displays the unique sequence number of the web service Calling Stage Select the stage in which the web service should be called Status The system defaults the status of the web service Key ID The system defaults the ID for which the web service is called Request The system displays the request of the web service Response The system displays the response of the web service ORACLE 9 1 9 Accounts for Inter Branch Transactions Defining Acco
91. this the financial year stands closed and no adjustments can be posted to it Closure of a period financial cycle can be invoked through the General Ledger Core Services module The branches of the bank should close this period financial cycle is ORACLE 17 1 17 2 17 Status Code Maintenance Introduction Loans and bills which are past their due maturity date of installment re payment but remain unpaid are defaulted contracts In the Oracle FLEXCUBE system these defaulted contracts can be assigned to different statuses based on the number of days for which the contract is outstanding Each status can be assigned a code For instance you can define a status code PDO to represent past due obligation and specify a period of 15 days after which an outstanding contract should be marked as PDO If they are due for more than 60 days you could assign a doubtful status sub standard if due for 6 months and so on Contracts for which no installments are due or which are regularly paid on their due dates are assigned the status Active by the system According to the number of days of default defined for each status a loan would be moved from Active to PDO status then to doubtful and finally to sub standard status Similarly you can define status codes for current and savings accounts also Current and Savings accounts that have not generated any interest over a specific period or have rema
92. to Define Clearing House Holidays 0 ccccccecceceesttteeeeeenteeeeeeeeaes 22 1 22 1 2 Defining Clearing House HOlIAAYS eccececctecteeeceetnteeeeeeetnteeeeetetneeeeettas 22 2 22 1 3 Designating Unexpected Holidays for Clearing HOUSC cceeeecee 22 2 23 Document Maintenance ccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennenennnes 23 1 2321 MORUO aie cin cera edit eae ata ais an IRAT AAS eh td eee ae 23 1 23 2 Maintaining Document Tyo carierre isenana Eni EEREN TEA AARE ERL RER 23 1 23 3 Viewing Document Type DetailS seeeeeeeesineesssrnneerennnesrrnnneestennnesnnnnneeetennnaetennee 23 1 23 4 Maintaining Document Checklist Details ce ececceeeeeneeeeeeeeenteeeeeeentaeeeeeeeaaes 23 3 23 5 Viewing Document Type Details ec eeeeeeeeeeenee eee eeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeaaes 23 4 24 Configuring Overrides ccccccesseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeennneeeees 24 1 241 IDOGION 440 5 bsi teats TAT T NA T eel eae neta ees 24 1 241 7 Types OF OVEMMIOGCS rererere EATA A 24 1 24 2 Specifying Override Type seers parni ria A EEA a iii 24 2 24 2 1 Maintaining Override Conversion ssssseesiissesenenseerrrnreerrrnneeerrnnneeeene 24 3 24 2 2 Maintaining Error GOJOS sssi isisss iriiritia ererreieitna kira jan kiika t eriadan din 24 3 25 Maintaining Features sssssssssssnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 25 1 29 1 Modu TOM anana eed eit
93. to the account number mask the 6 to 12t digits will be the last six digits of the CIF number which is 123456 The account number of the first savings account in USD opened for Ms Jennifer is 000411234561 we will consider only 12 digits for this example since the 13th digit is auto generated by the system based on Modulo 11 with Weights algorithm The components of the account number 000 4 1 123456 1 are as follows e 000 is the branch code e 4 is the account code e 1 is the currency type e 123456 is the CIF number for Ms Jennifer e 1 is the sequence number for the combination of account code currency type and customer i e the number 4 1 123456 will be common for the first 9 accounts maintained for the same combination Now Jennifer decides to open another account for the same combination In this case the sequence number gets incremented to 2 and the account will be assigned the number 000 4 1 123456 2 This will go on till the 9th account for the same combination The 9 account number would be 000 4 1 123456 9 If the customer decides to maintain the 10 account for the same combination the sequence number will restart since it has reached the maximum allowed level This would result in duplication of account numbers To eliminate this the system will now use the dummy CIF range to number the accounts Therefore the 10 account number will be 000 4 1 199000 1 This sequence will co
94. using mod97 Checksum algo rithm System automatically appends DD always at the end of the Mask Algorithm Contents of the mask Check sum digit Check digit character Remarks Modulo 11 Alphanu meric User to input d Check digit should be specified manually in the mask Modulo 11 Numeric Auto append System appends the check digit automati cally how ever the mask char acters should be n for example nnnnD Modulo 97 Alphanu meric Auto append DD If the values for the mask are alphanu meric then check digit will not be generated Modulo 97 Numeric Auto append DD wing format nnnnnDD Numeric Account Masks with Modulo 11 with Weights as Checksum Algorithm The account mask with Modulo 11 with Weights algorithm can have a maximum of 13 digits It comprises of the following elements 2 16 ORACLE e Branch Code 3 digits Indicates the branch at which the customer account is maintained e Account Code 1 digit This will indicate the account code of the account class to which the customer account belongs During account number generation in the Customer Account Maintenance screen you need to select the account class from the option list provided The system will then convert it to the account code maintained for that account class The account code thus becomes a part of the customer
95. will not allow the user to close the batch without balancing the mismatches e If the override is configured to be a warning either Override or Ignore the user can save the batch with the mismatches No balancing entries are automatically generated by the system for the mismatch Uploaded journal entries In the case of uploaded journal entries a journal batch that has mismatched entries is not rejected but an override is raised by the accounting process Depending upon how the override is configured for your bank the accounting process takes either of the following paths e Ifthe override is configured to be an error then the batch is rejected and must be uploaded again with the corrected entries e If the override is configured to be a warning the accounting process automatically generates the balancing entries for the currency or value date mismatches for the batch and posts them to the requisite control accounts specified in the Bank Parameters oe ORACLE 2 1 3 In each case the transaction reference for the balancing entries is the same as that of the original accounting entry in which the mismatch occurred and the other details of the balancing entries are by default the corresponding values in the original entries The mismatch balancing entries are generated in the following order or preference e Currency mismatch balancing entries e Value Date mismatch balancing entries In the case of misma
96. your installation to automatically authorize transactions To indicate applicability of automatic authorization for users of the branch you must enable the Auto Authorization option in the Branch Parameters screen When you do you can then allow automatic authorization rights to the appropriate users at the branch For more details about automatic authorization refer the Security Management System and Procedures user manuals Deferred Statement Status This is a display field This field indicates whether or not the Branch is ready for Deferred Statement Generation Y indicates the Branch is ready for deferred statement generation For further details on Referrals refer to the Processing Referrals in Oracle FLEXCUBE chapter of the Core Entities manual Install Select the appropriate value from the drop down list to indicate whether Oracle FLEXCUBE installation is complete or incomplete Proceed Without Maintaining Floating Rate Check this option to indicate that floating rates should be propagated across all branches Sector code Specify the Sector Code of your branch as specified in the Clearing Bank Code Maintenance screen on ORACLE 5 1 5 7 5 1 5 8 Routing No On the basis of the Routing Number Mask defined for your bank and your specifications in this screen for clearing and sector Oracle FLEXCUBE automatically generates the Routing Number for clearing transactions involving your branch in the Routing Numbe
97. 05 and 0 0006 i e as spread points and specify here the points multiplier as 0 0001 The effective spread buy and sell rates are then computed as follows Effective buy spread Buy spread x Points multiplier 5 x 0 0001 0 0005 Buy rate Mid rate Buy spread 1 6045 0 0005 1 6040 a ORACLE 14 1 14 Maintaining Exchange Rates Introduction In the Currency Rates screen you can maintain exchange rates for a currency pair the rates at which you buy and sell one currency for another A bank determines its buy and sell rate for a currency pair by applying a spread i e its profit margin to the mid rate of the currency pair Mid rate is the basic rate at which a currency pair is exchanged The spread applied for a currency pair varies with the transaction type while the mid rate usually remains constant Consequently different rates are applicable to different transaction types For instance dollars in currency are purchased at a certain rate while USD traveler s checks are bought at a different rate In Oracle FLEXCUBE you can define a rate type which you would like to associate with a transaction type e g CASH TRAVCHKS etc in the Rates screen In the Currency Rates Maintenance screen you define the mid rate buy and sell spread applicable to each rate type the buy and sell exchange rates are computed by the system Buy rates and sell rates can either be maintained by individual bran
98. 13 days 30US 360 Method 10 000x10 100x114 360 In this method the number of days is calculated as follows Dec 30 days include from date exclude to date Jan 30 days In 30 US Method all months have 30 days only for February are the actual number of days calculated Feb 29 days In 30 US Method actual days are accounted for the leap year March 24 days include from date exclude to date Total 113 days Specifying Currency Cut Off Parameters You can choose to restrict the time within which or before which funds transfer transactions involving a specific customer product and a currency must be received for processing For a specific customer product and a currency you can specify a certain number of days before which a transaction involving the combination must be received as well as a cut off time before which transactions must be received These parameters are known as currency cut off parameters and you maintain these parameters in the Value Dated Spread maintenance screen Invoke this screen by typing FTDVDSPR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 10 12 ORACLE 10 3 The screen is as shown below Value Dated Spread Maintenance E New E3 Enter Query Customer No Currency Code Customer Name Currency Description Product Code Product Description Spread Details Cut Off Details Debit Value Date Spread Da
99. 23 3 You can maintain the various document types in the Document Type Maintenance screen To invoke this screen type CSDDOCTY in the field at the top right corner of the Application toolbar and click the adjoining arrow button Document Maintenance New amp Enter Query Document Category Document Description Document Type 1 Of 1 E DocumentType Document Type Description Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status Specify the following details Document Category Specify the document category The adjoining option list displays all the document categories that are maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one Document Type Specify the type of document Document Description Specify a brief description for the document Viewing Document Type Details You can view the document type details in the Document Type Summary screen To invoke this screen type CSSDOCTY in the field at the top right corner of the Application toolbar and click the adjoining arrow button 23 1 ORACLE The screen is as shown below Document Maintenance od Advanced Search 5 Reset Authorization Status Document Category nel Record Status Records per page 15 v 10f1 Authorization Status Record Status Document Category ENE NENE aa You can query on records based on any one or all
100. 3 19 33 5 3 Viewing Commitment Detalls ccccccccceseeeceeenteeeeeeeenteeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaes 33 20 33 5 4 Viewing Loan Detallls 0 cccceecccceeseeeeeeenneeeeeeeeneeeeteeeaaaeeeeeeeaeeeeesenaaes 33 21 33 6 Querying Dashboard Details 0 ccccccccccceeseeceeeecscneeeeeesenneeeeeeessneeeeeessneeeeeeeees 33 22 33 7 Querying Accounting Entries 22 0 aniei aaen Enae anaren EEA REA Ea ESE iE 33 22 Error and Error Codes for Project Financing sssssssssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnns 34 1 34 1 Error and Error Codes onesna ir iai ai aAA S A E 34 1 olol aee E E T E E E E 35 1 oT IMtrOGUCHON ie ren na E T E 35 1 35 2 List of Deleted Transactions aeea aki arar E EAE aE AEEA EAEEREN EREET TRATARE 35 1 35 2 1 Contents Of Re OE r a a a a a a r a a anien 35 2 35 3 Accounting Joumal sns crecniseeariii ariii iN iE AAAA E A edie 35 4 35 3 1 Contents Of R port z ireen iea ea a ena eaaa aa aata 35 5 35 4 Cash Flow Report ositeicistieeeieqedieee ete ceeedi een iae raned daa ata a eaa EaD eaaa aa aaa 35 6 35 4 1 Contents Of REPO ii oases esireast asa ae akee tnie aeii 35 7 35 4 2 Cash Flow Summary REPOS eccccceetteeeeteeeneeeeeteneeeteeteeaaeeteeeeeaeeees 35 8 35 5 Future Dated Account Balance Repott ccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 35 9 35 5 1 Contents of the Report 0 cccccccceeeceeenseceeceeeeeeeeeteeseceeenieaeeeseeeeeeteteteees 35 9 35 6 Current Rates Report ccccccccccccceeeeee
101. 3 parts in an entity purging Purge Parameter Definition The purge parameter definition is achieved through ODT The ODT generates the purge source files which is then deployed in Oracle FLEXCUBE The ODT is used for the following e Maintaining the list of entities that need to be purged e Maintaining the purge behaviour e Maintaining the mode of purge e Maintaining he purge frequency e Maintaining the archive table suffix if the purge behaviour is to archive the data e Maintaining the filter criteria to determine what data to purge 20 8 ORACLE 26 4 1 You can capture the above parameters to define the entity and purge preferences Purge Parameter Configuration Once the ODT generated scripts are deployed in Oracle FLEXCUBE they can be re configured in the purge parameter configuration Purge Execution You can execute the purge in two modes e Batch Mode In the batch mode you have to maintain the purge entity batch CSBPURGE The AEOD batch process starts the purge process in which all the entities that are scheduled for purge on that day gets purged e Ad hoc Mode This mode supports purging of a single entity at any time You can define entities for purging in any module However pre defined entities are available for the following modules e Accounting e Bills and Collections e Letters of Credit e Funds Transfer e SWITCH Configuring Purge Parameters You can configure the parameter
102. 65 In this method the number of days is calculated as follows Dec 31 days include from date exclude to date Jan 31 days Feb 29 days leap year March 24 days include from date exclude to date Total 31 31 29 24 115 Actual 360 Method 10 000x10 100x1 15 360 In this method the number of days is calculated as follows Dec 31 days include from date exclude to date Jan 31 days Feb 29 days leap year March 24 days include from date exclude to date Total 31 31 29 24 115 30 Euro Actual Method 10 000x10 100 x 30 365 84 366 In this method the number of days is calculated as follows 19 10 ORACLE Dec 30 days include from date exclude to date Jan 30 days In 30 Euro Method all months have 30 days February included Feb 30 days In 30 Euro Method February always has 30 days leap year or not March 24 days include from date exclude to date Total 113 days Note When the interest period crosses from a non leap year to a leap year or otherwise the basis of actual days has to be treated separately in each year 30 Euro 365 Method 10 000x10 100x114 365 In this method the number of days is calculated as follows Dec 30 days include from date exclude to date Jan 30 days In 30 Euro Method all months have 30 days February included Feb 30 days In 30 Euro Method February always has 30 days leap year or not March 24 days include from date exclude to date
103. Amount This is the opening balance of account in FCY LCY Amount This is the opening balance of account in LCY Transaction Date This is the transaction date Transaction Description This is a brief description of the transaction Transaction Reference Num ber This is the reference number of the transaction posted to account Value Date This is the value date of transaction FCY Amount This is the amount of transaction in Foreign Cur rency Rate This is the exchange rate for FCY and LCY LCY Amount This is the amount of transaction in Local Currency Current Balance This is the current balance in the account 35 15 Customer Details Report This report gives details of the customer and you can generate this report using the Customer Details screen 35 22 ORACLE You can invoke this screen by typing STRCIF in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Customer Details From Record Customer Number To Record Customer Number ReportFormat PDF Report Output Print 35 15 1 Contents of Report Printer At Client Printer The parameters specified while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the report Other content displayed in the report is as follows Header The Header carries the branch information on the branch date the user ID the module name
104. Application Aasto Batch User Batch Resticton Spoof Files Purge Days re n SSO Enabied inter Pay Lead Days Cheque Numbering Details Checksum Algorithm Scneme Cheques Number Unique for ranch Cheque Number Mask e Locgement Numbers Unique For Branch TRS Details Suspense Account Sorn Code Payment Ana Collection z Product Category Account Number Trade License Detats Expire Acvice Generaton Days Mandatory Limit Tracking For Customer Type Cheque Discounting Details Corporate Cheque Return Count for Bank Drawer Blaciisting Inchicual z 2assbook Details Minimum Number of Digits for Passbook JRetationship Manager RM set up Preferences AccountMask Field Properties Date Time Date Time Record Status Authorization Status 24 ORACLE 2 1 3 1 Defining Format Masks A format mask is a structure that you can you can define for various elements that need to be entered in Oracle FLEXCUBE You can define format masks for the following elements e General Ledgers e Customer Identification File codes e Customer account numbers Once defined you can modify the structure of a format mask only if no Customer or General Ledger Account has been opened using the mask Customer Account mask is defined from the Account Mask Button For more details on defining customer account mask refer the section titled Specifying Account Generation Parameters at Bank Level CIF Mask You can maintain a mask for generation o
105. Branch Transfer Details 0 0cccccccccceeeetntteeeeetntneeeeeeeas 6 4 6 4 Transferring Account ClaSS ccc ccciceeeeeeeeeeeenne eee eeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaaes 6 5 6 5 Processing Account Branch Transfer cccesseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenuaeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaes 6 6 System Dates Maintenance cccceeecccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeeeees 7 1 TLE Introduction criscia sea de cies EAA cle ESA A A 7 1 7 1 1 Maintaining Dates Change eeesssneeerrnnnnnnrrnnnenrrnnnrnnrnnnnrennnnnnnrnnnnenenana 7 2 Web Service Maintenance sceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeseeeeeceeeeeeeees 8 1 8 4 IMMPOGUGHIONS sna e EEE AE 8 1 8 2 Maintaining Web Service asssssessssrssesesrnnnesrrnnnasinnnnessnnnnnnttannnasttanaaatannnaanannnaaaaaa 8 1 8 2 1 Mapping of Web Service cccccceccecceececeeeeeeeteceeeneaaaeeeeeseeeeeesteeesesteaaeeas 8 2 8 22 Web Service Details s ccccsseccccccsstincectecstsnsuncesdsncenetsesdadanseessaneeetenensnedeneeaes 8 3 8 2 3 WebService Maintenance seeeeserrrenerrrrrrrerrrrnrrrrrnrnnrrrirnnrrrrnnneeerrannrennne 8 4 Accounts for Inter Branch Transactions ssssssssussssnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 9 1 9 14 Defining Accounts for Inter Branch Transactions cccceeceeeeeeeeeeteeeneeeeeeeeaeeees 9 1 9 14 1 Syston Features aop rirli eiia iN Er AEAEE RAEE EAE EEE E a 9 2 9 1 2 Specifying Customer ACCOUN S eesssennneeerinrer
106. C3 posted on 25th Jan 2004 with TXN2 the Statement Date would be derived as 25 Jan 2004 if the Branch Statement Status is set to Y specifying that the Branch is ready for periodic statements processing The Statement Date would be stored as part of the archived data also The Statement Date would be recomputed during the reversal entry in the same logic 18 2 1 5 Monitoring Anti Money Laundering Anti Money Laundering Required Check this box to indicate that AML monitoring is required for all accounting entries linked to the particular transaction code Leave it unchecked to indicate otherwise er ORACLE 18 2 2 Product Category If you indicate that AML tracking is required for all transactions linked to the particular transaction code you have to identify the product category for which AML tracking is necessary Maintaining Country Name Details You can define country name through the Country Code Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing STDCNMNT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Country Code Maintenance Eb new EX Enter Query Country Code Country Name Alternate Country Code ISO Country Code Limit Currency Overall Limit Blacklisted IBAN Mandatory for Payment Messages EU Member i Clearing Code in BIC Generate 205 Default Clearing Network International Dialing Code Fiel
107. Enabled check box This enables restricted login from external systems into Oracle FLEXCUBE General Ledger Purge Days You can specify here the maximum number of working days the average GL balance computation for which is to be retained in the System Specifying Cheque Numbering Details Scheme In Oracle FLEXCUBE cheque numbers can be generated automatically or can be manually entered If you indicate manually you can draw up numbering conventions and assign numbers to the cheques that are issued Cheque Number Mask Specify the mask of a cheque number to be used by the bank You can define numeric cheque mask as a series of N While defining an alpha numeric cheque mask the alphanumeric character should always precede the numeric characters For example AANNNN A being alpha numeric character and N being numeric character Numeric characters should always follow the alpha numeric characters If cheque numbering scheme is Automatic and checksum algorithm is selected the Cheque mask can be defined as only numeric The cheque mask can contain only N or can start with a T followed by N If the cheque mask contains a T in the first position it indicates that the cheque is of type EURO or COMMERCIAL If the mask contains only N then the cheque is only numeric and cannot be EURO COMMERCIAL An appropriate error message is displayed if cheque numbering scheme is Automatic and cheque number mask defined contains anyt
108. F as Part of Customer Account Number If your bank has not opted for automatic generation of account numbers you can specify a structure for customer account numbers The structure can be a combination of CIF number account class value of a user defined field currency branch code alphabets numeric and a check digit which is automatically generated by the system For example an account mask is CCCCCCCLLbbbUUU ad This implies that a customer account number will contain CIF Id represented by C Account Class represented by L Branch Code represented by b Values of a user defined field represented by U Any user input alphabet represented by a enter n if you want to include a numeric Currency Code represented by A check digit which is automatically generated by the system represented by d 23 ORACLE Note The number of C s in the account mask should match with the CIF mask that you have specified For instance if the CIF mask is aaaannn 7characters the account mask should consist 7 C s to include the CIF Id in the customer account number The value of a user defined field can be used to include an additional parameter for example the code of the country to which the customer belongs in the customer account number The steps involved for including the value of a user defined field in a customer account number are as follows 1 Include U in the customer account mask to indicate t
109. F numbers for customers of your bank The HO creates the branches at the bank level All subsequent modifications on the table are done from the respective branches System Features Oracle FLEXCUBE supports a three level reporting structure HO Head Office RO Regional Office BR Branch Reports directly to HO HO lt a to RO1 RO2 RO3 A Reports to BR1 BR2 BR3 BR4 BR5 BR6 BR7 At the top stands the Head Office followed by the Regional Offices At the lowest level are the branches There can be any number of branches but the number of regional offices is restricted to six The system validates to check that the number of parent branches is not more than six If the number of parent branches is more than six system will give an error and restrict the number to six The branches report to the RO and the ROs in turn report to the HO Within this three level structure you can also have a branch reporting independently to the Head office as branch BR7 in the diagram It is also possible to have a two level reporting structure with only the HO and the branches where each individual branch reports directly to the HO al ORACLE 5 1 3 Creating Reporting Structure The order in which you create the HO the ROs and the branches should follow the hierarchy Hence the first branch to be created should be the HO followed by the ROs and then the branches The Head Office of your bank is created
110. Gateway messaging layer e Amendment of PC transaction e Reject Recall of PC Transaction e Approval of Incoming collection e Reversal of PC transaction e Re dispatch of Outgoing collection e PC periodic instruction setup transaction Processing Retail Teller Transactions The retail teller transactions are processed with the tanked status as Yes if the branch is not available for transaction During the RT transaction query the transaction can be viewed as tanked if the RT transaction is tanked and that the request was processed when the branch available status is No or when branch date was ahead of host date The process when the RT transaction is received when the branch is unavailable or when branch date is ahead of host date is as follows e The RT transaction would be accepted with transaction status as Tanked e The accounting entries would be posted with tanked status e Message and advices of an RT transaction are suppressed After the branch available status is changed to Yes then e The transaction status of the RT transaction will be changed to Active e The tanked accounting entries if any would be un tanked by the batch process for releasing the tanked accounting entries e The messages and the advices associated with the RT transaction that were suppressed are also generated e The transaction date of the RT transaction will remain unchanged during the process of un tanking Processing Clearing Transac
111. MOVE in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Accounts Movement Report From Date Value Dated To Date Booking Dated Single Account Account Selection Account No ka Single Account Currency Code All Accounts ReportFormat PDF v PrinterAt Client v Report Output Print Printer From Date Specify the From Date from the option list To Date Specify the To Date from the option list Account Number Specify the account number from the option list Value Dated Select if the report is value dated Booking Dated Select if the report is booking dated Currency Specify the currency from the option list Account Selection Specify the type of account selection 35 14 1 Contents of Report Header The Header carries the title of the Report information on the branch code the branch date the user ID the module name the date and time at which the report was generated and the page number of the report aral ORACLE Body of the report The details of the uncollected funds that would be displayed in the report are as follows Field Name Field Description Account Number This is the account number Account Description This is the brief description for the account Account Currency This is the currency of the account Opening Balance This is the opening balance of the account FCY
112. Mod No Checker Record Status Date Time Authorization Status You can specify the following details here Branch Code This is the code you assign to the office or branch The code acts as an identifier in the system for the office branch Input a code using a maximum of 3 characters alphanumeric Branch Name This is the name of the office or branch the code of which is input Enter the name using a max Of 35 characters alphanumeric Branch Available The system displays the Branch Available status If the status is Yes it indicates that the branch can accept transactions for the day and if the status is No then it indicates that the transactions will be accepted but it will be in effect only from the next business day Accordingly accounting entries will be passed checking the following for tanking branch transactions e The Branch Available Status e The Branch date and host date i e entries will be tanked if branch date is ahead of host date When the Branch Available status is NO or if branch date is ahead of host date then the transactions will be tanked These transactions will be untanked by the BOD program which runs post date change i e POSTDTCH Note If you want to check whether the transaction is tanked or not you should login to host and refer to the corresponding query function a ORACLE 5 1 4 1 For more information on Querying the Transactions refer Retail Teller Cl
113. ORACLE Core Services User Guide Oracle FLEXCUBE Universal Banking Release 12 0 2 0 0 Part No E49740 01 January 2014 Core Services User Guide January 2014 Oracle Financial Services Software Limited Oracle Park Off Western Express Highway Goregaon East Mumbai Maharashtra 400 063 India Worldwide Inquiries Phone 91 22 6718 3000 Fax 91 22 6718 3001 www oracle com financialservices Copyright 2007 2014 Oracle and or its affiliates All rights reserved Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners U S GOVERNMENT END USERS Oracle programs including any operating system integrated software any programs installed on the hardware and or documentation delivered to U S Government end users are commercial computer software pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency specific supplemental regulations As such use duplication disclosure modification and adaptation of the programs including any operating system integrated software any programs installed on the hardware and or documentation shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs No other rights are granted to the U S Government This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangero
114. ORACLE Placing User Restrictions on Data Entry Batches You can restrict the usage of batches to specific user by placing bank wide User level batch restrictions If you enable this option as a Bank Parameter you need to allocate the batch number range for each user through the Batch Restriction Maintenance screen The restriction on the usage of batch numbers is made applicable on data entry and PC transactions The user will be allowed to enter only those batches reserved for the user profile As a result each time a user specifies a batch number it will be validated against the Allocated Batch Number Range This feature is applicable only when batch generation is manual Therefore if you enable this option you must ensure that the Auto Generate option has not been enabled In a scenario where the User Restriction for Batch Number field is enabled and Auto Batch option has also been enabled the system displays an error message as Not a Valid Batch Number For the User In case you choose to auto generate batch numbers the System will not perform the batch restriction validation You can invoke the Batch Restrictions Maintenance screen by typing STDBRRES in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Batch Restriction Maintenance E New amp Enter Query User ID User Name Branch Code Branch Name Module Code Module Descriptio
115. PC Details You can view the PPC details by clicking on the PPC Details tab in the Dashboard Details screen S218 ORACLE The screen is as shown below Dashboard Detail New E3 Enter Query Project ID Customer ID Account No Project Name Customer Name Account CCY Project Amount Available Balance Current Balance Project Utilization Currency Limit Details Commitment Details Loan Details 1 Of 1 r Collateral Type Sequence Collateral Description Amount Currency Out Standing Status 3 Open 10f1 Party ID Share Currency Limit Available gt You can view the following details e Collateral Details Collateral Type Sequence Collateral Description Amount Outstanding Status e Venture Details Party ID Share Limit CCY Limit Available 33 5 2 Viewing Limit Details You can view the limit details by clicking on the Limit Details tab in the Dashboard Details screen 33 19 ORACLE The screen is as shown below Dashboard Detail E New amp Enter Query Project ID Project Name Project Amount Project Utilization Customer ID Customer Name Available Balance Currency PPC Details MEREN Commitment Details Loan Details 10f1 Credit Line Line Serial Account No Account CCY Current Balance Credit Line
116. Preferences E Online General Ledger Update E Auto Generate CIF Numbers E Re Generate unused CIF ID E Re Generate unused CASA no E Copy Exchange Rates to Branches E Position Accounting Required Propagate Customer Address to Nodes E Propagate CIF to other Nodes F Propagate Bank Instruction Codes Details to Nodes E Pair wise Positioning Required E Branch wise Limits El Limits History Required E Daily MIS Refinancing E Propagate Floating Rates to Branches E Allow Inventory Tracking Customer Id Mask Level X Mudarabah Fund Share Holder Balance Type Staff Account Restriction Required Auto Account Closure Node wise CIF mask Maintenance Interface Details Specify the following details 2a ORACLE Journal Account Specify Journal Account of the Interface details Width Specify width of the interface Inter Branch Scheme Indicate the following details Inter Branch Account Schedule You can indicate the route through which accounting entries for inter branch transactions should be settled You can select one of the following routes from the option list that is available e Choose Through HO to indicate that inter branch transactions should be settled through the Head Office e Ifyou specify Through RO the accounting entries would be routed through the regional office If two branches involved in a transaction do not report to a co
117. Processing Different Categories during EOD o ccsecccccetetteeeeeetnteeee tetas 27 2 28 Tanking of Maintenance RecordS ccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennees 28 1 28 1 Modulio n riei r a EIR le suites ddan Genes UL aaa eee eee 28 1 28 2 Tanking New and Modified Maintenance RecordS eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeaas 28 1 28 2 1 Tanking New RECOIOS oicrisiirer isi errea OEE REA EIA AEE 28 2 28 2 2 Tanking Modified ROCOIS cccceseeeeeenneeeeeteneeeeeeeteeeeeeeeetenaaeeteetenaaeeees 28 2 28 2 3 gt GIOSING RECOM 0c zs cevgsiaducudgesstatngtesiadinccdeessuddidepiesaadeedeeavladadeesa danse 28 2 28 2 4 Re opening a Record 0 00 eeceeceeeeeeeeente eee teeeeeeeeeteceaeeeeeteeeaeeeeeseeaaeeeeeteeaaeeees 28 2 28 2 5 Authorizing a Retla oaee Ar e a E a VEEE RY 28 2 28 2 6 DeletinG a RECO ori errer erener r E EEEL AE EAA A EE EEE TERORA 28 2 28 2 7 Viewing Summary of RecordS eessssssrirrreserrrnnrrrrrnrererrnnnrrnannneeerrnnrnnna 28 2 28 2 8 Modifying Tanking Preferences eessseessrrrnnesernnnnrrrnnnnrrernnnnrrrnnnneennns 28 2 29 External Deal Maintenance ccccceceeceeceecceceeececeecceccecceceeceeceeeeeeees 29 1 30 31 32 33 34 35 29 1 L126 UCC 9 ete are Re tne a er er a pr oe en ee a 29 1 Annexure B File Formats eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeesseeeneneeeeeees 30 1 SOT OTUS TON essea A E dgend leads igctat feta ddend
118. Project Value Branch Code Currency Number Of PPCs Default PPC Clearance Days Start Date End Date Sponsor Retention Margin Remarks Ratio Change Allowed F JV Limit Tracking Required Main Milestones MAAA PPC Limits Non PPC Limits Default 101 E Effective Date Bank Margin F Auto Line Creation for PPC F Limit Track Required through Commitment Liability No I 5 Margir MELCI Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status Effective Date Specify the effective date of the joint venture For each effective date the system maintains the ratio among the joint venture partners The sum of ratios for each effective date must be equal to 100 Party ID The system displays the joint venture details of the project Party Name The system will display the party name Liability ID Specify the liability ID 33 10 ORACLE 33 3 5 Ratio Specify the percentage share of the joint venture party The sum of all the ratios must be equal to 100 Default Interest Rate Specify the default interest rate that is used for the external component in the commitment product The system will default this value to PPC Margin Specify the margin applicable on the interest rate Specifying PPC Limits Details You can create the clean limit ToD manually using the line ID for the amount You should then link this limit t
119. Run Date and Time Body of the Report Field Name Field Description Date of Issue Indicates the date of issue Issuing Channel Indicates the Issuing Channel Account Number Indicates the account number Account Currency Indicates the account currency Account Name Indicates the account name Serial Number Indicates the serial number Maker ID Indicates the maker ID Checker ID Indicates the checker ID 35 22 Demand Draft Issued Report You can invoke Demand Draft Issued Report screen by typing CSRPDDRP in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button cs ORACLE The screen is as shown below Demand Draft issued Report All Branches Single Branch Branch ReportFormat PDF Printer At Client Report Output Print Printer Branch Code You can generate this report for all the branches or a single branch alone You can indicate the branch for which the report is being generated using the following options e All If you choose this the system will generate the report for all the branches e Single If you choose this you need to specify the branch code for which the report should be generated The option list displays all valid branch codes maintained in the system Choose the appropriate one 35 22 1 Contents of the Report The parameters specified while generating the report are printed at the
120. S Code Indicates the MIS code Currency Indicates the currency of the account Holding Amount Indicates the holding amount LCY Opening Balance Indicates the opening balance in local currency ACY Opening Balance Indicates the opening balance of the account cur rency ACY Available Balance Indicates the available balance of the account cur rency ACY Current Balance Indicates the current balance of the account cur rency Temp OD Since Indicates the date when the temp OD was started Overdraft Since Indicates the date when the overdraft was started Temp OD Debits Today Indicates the day s temp OD debits Temp OD Credits Today Indicates the day s temp OD credits 35 25 Daily Sales Report 35 44 ORACLE You can invoke the screen by typing the code CORDSLRFP in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button Daily Sales Report Branch Code Booking Date From Date To Date Report Format Printer At Client Report Output Printer You can specify the following parameters here Branch Code Specify the branch code from the adjoining option list From Date Specify a valid date from when you wish to generate the report from the adjoining calendar To Date Specify a valid date till when you wish to generate the report from the adjoining calendar 35 25 1 Contents of th
121. TD redemption by Transfer to GL the RT Transaction done for moving the available funds will get tanked e For TD redemption By Bankers Cheque the Instrument Transaction done for Issuing the BC will get tanked After the branch available status is changed to Yes then e The transaction status of the TD Redemption Transaction will be changed to Active The tanked accounting entries if any would be un tanked by the batch process Processing Account Closure The Close out Withdrawal Transaction is not allowed if the branch is not available for transaction or when branch date is ahead of host date Processing transactions The transaction process includes e Payments and Collections e Retail Loan e Fund Transfer e Retail Teller e Instruments e Standing Instructions e Clearing di ORACLE e Utility Payments Processing Funds Transfer The fund transfer requests are processed with tanked status if the branch is not available for the transactions assuming that the FT Product cut off time is maintained such that the cut off time is past for the FT transaction when the Branch available status is changed to No The process when the FT transaction is received when the branch is unavailable is as follows e The FT transaction would be accepted with tanked status as Yes e There would be no change in the debit amp credit value date derivation which currently takes in to consideration the value date spreads and cut off time ma
122. Tag Debit Credit Transaction Account Currency Foreign Currency Amount Local Currency Amount ORACLE 10 1 10 2 10 Currency Maintenance Introduction In the Currency Definition screen you define the attributes of the currencies in which your bank can deal For each currency you can define attributes like the SWIFT code for the currency the country to which the currency belongs the interest method the spot days the settlement days etc Currencies can be maintained only at the Head Office The list of currencies will be made available to all the branches of your bank Invoke this screen by typing CYDCDEFN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Currency Definition FX New E3 Enter Query EE Currency Code Alternate Currency o Code Currency Name Currency ses ISO Numeric Currency Code Country Decimals Interest Method Spot Days Foreign Exchange Netting Days Settlement Days Cutoff Time Rounding Rule Unit a 30 Euro 360 v Generate 103 CLS Currency Truncate ai Position General laz Position Equivalent az General Ledger Tolerance Limit Index Base Currency Amount Format Mask 2 E Index Currency E Euro Conversion 99 999 999 999 99 99 99 99 999 Euro Type Minute New Cover format Required Validate Tag 50F Euro Currency
123. The purge batch process is split into specified numbers and executed in separate threads Description The system displays description on the entity ID Next Purge Date The system displays the next purge date Last Purge Date The system displays the last purge date Query The system displays the query for the entity The system displays the following details e Filter Name Name of the purge filter criteria e Column Data Type Data type of the filter e LHS LHS of the filter expression e Operator The operator for filter e RHS RHS or the value for the expression based on which data is purged However you can modify this 208 ORACLE 26 4 4 Note Only Execution Filter conditions are displayed in the Filter Condition Multi Entry Block Business Filter conditions will not be displayed Inquiring Purge Log You can inquire the purge history through the Purge Log Inquiry screen To invoke this screen type AEDPGLOG in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Purge Log Inquiry amp Execute Query Entity Id From Date To Date 1 Of 1 F Entiyld RuniD Date EndTime Status Error Number ofRecords Query Entity Id Select the entity Id from the adjoining option list From Date Specify the date from when the log should be enquired To Date Specify the date till when the log should be enquired
124. USTOMER MAINTENANCE Creation of customers for project andJV PROJECT MAINTENANCE Project Details JV Details including Parties Customer Milestone Details Sponser Consultant Details Authorized Create Project Line T OD Line V Create Project Account Loan Maintenance PPCReceived PPCMaintenance Refersthe rates defined PPC n Authorized Project PPC Line n Party 1 PPC Line n For each PPC create a Project Line The bank creates the customer in the system Project header details Sponsor Pay master details Project milestone details 33 2 Pendingfor Authorization Refersthe rates defined Party 2 PPC Line n For each Party Customer create PPC Line ReferstheJV details share ratios Pendingfor Authorization Party n PPC Line n A customer or a joint venture approaches the bank for project financing If it is a joint venture the bank creates the joint venture customer and enters the party customer details linked to the joint venture in the joint venture button screen The bank then creates the project account for the created customer joint venture customer The bank captures the following details in the Project Maintenance screen ORACLE 10 11 12 13 Joint Venture Parties Details In case of Joint Venture Limit Tracking PPC Limits Details Non PPC Limits Details Link the Non PPC lines defined in project to the project account using
125. VARCHAR2 Y Code indicating type of holi day see below 16 Special holi 320 VARCHAR2 N Restrictions day info applicable if a holiday is not applicable coun try wide or is not a full day 30 2 ORACLE 31 1 31 1 1 31 Anti Money Laundering Reporting Guarding Against Money Laundering In Oracle FLEXCUBE you can guard against Money Laundering by using the anti money laundering option wherein you will be required to maintain certain basic information as a safeguard against Money Laundering activities that customers may indulge in The information that you need to maintain includes the maintenance of e Product Categories e Limit Codes e Customer Groups Creating Product Categories in Oracle FLEXCUBE You have to create product categories in Oracle FLEXCUBE for the purpose of grouping common transactions A product is a specific service that you offer your customers Each transaction that you process in Oracle FLEXCUBE should be linked to a product By maintaining amount limits at the product level each time you link a transaction with a product the system verifies the amount limit maintained for the product If the transaction amount exceeds the amount maintained at the product level the system intimates you with an override a ORACLE You can invoke the AML Product Categories Maintenance screen by typing CSDAMLPC in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the
126. abled for replace amounts in overrides with wild char ACSTHAND Account Statement Handoff during EOD Batch APY Movement of Annual Percentage Yield Batch to history CCYPOS CCY position entries updation during Batch EOD CUSTMIS building of Customer MIS details Trans Online action Composite Fund DDRECLOG During Demand Draft creation update Online of record log and field log DEFERLIQ IC Deferred Liquidation Batch DORMUPD Dormancy update during EOD Batch DRINTDUE Dr Interest Due Batch FCTDSTATS Financial cycle wise account statistics Batch update GLCUSTSTATS Period Financial cycle wise customer Batch GLs statistics update GLFCTDSTATS Financial cycle wise GL statistics update Batch GLPTDSTATS Period wise GL statistics Batch ICINTSTMT IC Interest Statement generation Batch ICRATECHG Rate change Advice Batch IRASTMT IRA Statement generation during EOD Batch LDSTMT Loan Statements generation during Batch EOD LINKSTMTAC Update of Previous Statement Date and Batch No during statement generation PRODTXNREST Product and Transaction code restric Batch tions applicability PTDSTATS Period wise account statistics update Batch RAC Account entry serial number derivation Online Batch logic when multiple FCUBS instances exists REGCC Regulatory CC update for customer Batch account during EOD TRACKACCRINT Tracking of Accrued interest Batch USREGCHGS US Regulatory changes Batch 25 2 ORACLE 25 2 1
127. actions involving an In currency would typically be routed through the Euro during this phase At the end of the transition period in mid 2002 however the national currencies of the participating countries would cease to exist as valid legal tenders The Euro would be the only legal tender in In countries In Oracle FLEXCUBE you can handle the Euro and the attendant implications for your bank by capturing additional currency and settlements related information This chapter details how this information is to be captured and its implications 19 13 ORACLE 10 4 10 4 1 Maintaining Euro Related Information In Oracle FLEXCUBE the details that you need to maintain in order to handle the EMU include e Maintaining Euro as a valid currency e Indicating if a currency is In Out Euro or Euro Closed e Maintaining Currency Redenomination details e Acommon conversion GL and a transaction code to identify the redenomination entry e Maintaining a Tolerance Limit for a currency to check against ERI information e Capturing additional settlement details Euro related information for the MT 100 and MT 202 SWIFT messages You can maintain currency related information in the Currency and the Currency Pair Definition screens Settlement details can be captured in the Settlement Instruction Details screen Maintaining Currency Details Your specifications for a currency in the Curre
128. ails of line utilization at the branch level in the Limits Query screen For a total utilization of a global customer maintained in HO you would have to generate a report of the limit utilization for each instance Pairwise Positioning Required You have to select this option to indicate whether pair wise positioning entries need to be stored handed off or not If selected the system will store position creating pair entries separately for handoff to other external systems When processing accounting entries the system will check whether you have opted for pair wise positioning If you opt for this option the system will check for the following conditions in all the accounting entries that are posted e The set of entries posted are balanced i e total LCY debit is equal to total LCY credit e Atleast one pair of accounting entry is in FCY e Both the currencies are not the same If the above conditions hold true the system will store the entries along with the following information e Dr Account indicates the debit leg s account GL e Cr Account indicates credit leg s account GL e Event Code is the event of the transaction e Dr CCyY Bought Currency e Dr Amount Bought Amount e Cr CCY Sold Currency e Cr Amount Sold Amount e Dr Booking Date Cr Booking Date e Dr Value Date Cr Value Date e Dr Transaction Code Cr Transaction Code e Exchange Rate e Hand Off Flag Note While passing pair wise position entries the
129. al and Foreign Currency The accounting entries that belong to contingent asset or contingent liability GL categories will be posted to a Contingent Suspense GL To indicate the contingent suspense GL for a branch click option list and select a GL code from the option list Specifying Euro Redenomination GL To facilitate the currency conversion process you have to maintain a common Conversion GL and a Transaction Code The conversion GL that you specify in this screen will be identified as the common suspense GL for all balance conversions while re denominating the currency of an account either for specific customers or for generic conversions In addition to the conversion GL you have to indicate a Transaction Code which identifies conversion related entries Indicating Payment Messages Generate 103 The Generate MT 103 option allows you to generate outgoing MT 103 messages in the MT 103 format This check box can be enabled only if you have enabled the generation of MT 103 messages as Payment Messages Note The system will generate MT 103 messages as payment messages for transactions in the branch and generate them in the MT 103 format only if you have enabled this option in the following cases For the counterparty of the transaction in the BIC Code Maintenance By choosing the Generate 103 option for currency in the Currency Definition For the product used by the transaction in t
130. ame Value Description You can enter the value for the UDFs listed here in the Value column For more details on how to create user Defined fields refer chapter Creating custom fields in Oracle FLEXCUBE in the User Defined Fields User Manual under Modularity 5 2 Maintaining Tax Cycle You can maintain tax cycle at the bank level through the Tax Cycle Maintenance screen Invoke this screen by typing STDTXCYL in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 720 ORACLE The screen is as shown below Tax Cycle Maintenance E New E3 Enter Query Tax Cycle Description Start Date End Date Input By Authorized By Modification Date Time Date Time Number WB Authorized E Open Tax Cycle You need to define the tax cycle which will be uniquely identified in the system Start and End dates for tax cycle You need to indicate the start and end date of the tax cycle you are defining using the adjoining calendar 5 2 1 Updating Tax Cycle The Current Tax Cycle would be updated as and when the tax cycle changes This would be done during authorization of date change function on the first day of the new Tax Cycle 5 2 2 Maintaining Tax To maintain Tax parameters at the branch level click the Tax button in the Branch Parameters Details screen 5 27 ORACLE The scree
131. ample the value date of a funds transfer transaction incoming payment involving USD is 3 June 2001 The number of cut off days specified for the currency is 2 This means that the payment must be received on or before 1St June 2001 If the payment is received on 15t June it must be received before the cut off time specified for USD If the USD cut off time is 1200 hrs then if the payment is received on 15t June 2001 it must be received before 1200 hrs The cut off time in hours and minutes that you maintain to be applicable for payment transactions involving a currency are applicable to the head office branch of your bank If the branches are in time zones other than the head office branch time zone you must maintain the offset time applicable for each branch in the Branch Parameters screen Note Even when cut off days and cut off time for a currency have both been specified the cut off checks are performed for a funds transfer transaction only if specified as applicable for the product involved in the transaction Position or Position Equivalent GL for a currency If you have opted for position accounting in your bank you should indicate the Position GL and the Position Equivalent GL when maintaining a foreign currency in the currency screen the Currency Definition screen When maintaining the GLs in your bank you can opt to link the different foreign currencies associated with the GL to either of the following
132. an external system using External Deal maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing STDEXLIN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button External Deal Linkage Detail FX New E3 Enter Query FLEXCUBE Reference Account Number External Deal Reference Deal Currency Account Currency Deal Amount Equivalent Amount Exchange Rate Remarks Deal Booking Date Deal Expiry Date Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status You can specify the following details in this screen FLEXCUBE Reference Number This reference number is automatically generated by the system Account Number Select the account number associated with the external deal from the option list which displays all valid account numbers in the system External Deal Reference Number Specify a unique identification number for the external deal Deal Currency Specify the currency in which the external deal was carried out or select the deal currency from the option list provided Account Currency The account currency gets defaulted once you select the account number Deal Amount Specify the amount associated with the external deal in terms of deal currency Equivalent Amount The deal amount in terms of the account currency gets displayed here 29 1 ORACLE Equivalent Amount Deal Amount Exchange Rate Exchange Rate Specify the exch
133. an generate a report for the customer confirming that his her account with the bank has been successfully opened This report contains the following details e Customer number amig ORACLE 35 8 1 e Client account number e Matter e Account details You can generate the Customer Account Opening Confirmation report for one customer or all the customers at once as of a specific date To generate the report invoke Customer Account Opening Confirmation screen You can invoke this screen by typing the code CSRPACCO in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button The screen is as shown below Customer Account Opening Confirmation Customer Type All Customers Single Customer Number Date Report Format Printer At Client Report Output Printer Customer Type You can generate customer account opening confirmation report for one or all the customers Indicate your choice here If you select Single Customer you have to specify the customer number in the space provided Customer Number If you wish to generate a report specific to one customer specify the customer number The option list displays all valid customer numbers maintained in the system Select the appropriate one Date Specify the date as of which you want to generate the report Once you have set the preferences click OK button The system displays the print opt
134. an generate this report for all the branches or a single branch alone You can indicate the branch for which the report is being generated using the following options e All If you choose this the system will generate the report for all the branches e Single If you choose this you need to specify the branch code for which the report should be generated The option list displays all valid branch codes maintained in the system Choose the appropriate one Customer Type Select the type of customer from the following options provided e Bank e Corporate e Individual e All 35 24 1 Contents of the Report The parameters specified while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the report Other content displayed in the report is as follows Header The header carries the Report Name Branch Branch Date User Id Module Run Date and Time Ioga ORACLE Body of the Report Field Name Field Description Customer Account Number Indicates the customer account number Customer Name This indicates the name of the customer Customer Type Indicates the type of customer Account Description Displays the description for the account Branch Indicates the branch of the account Customer Number Indicates the customer number Account Class Indicates the account class of the customer Customer Category Indicates the category to which customer belong to MI
135. an specify the CIF identification details Consultant Name Specify the name of the consultant The system will display the consultant name if you had specified the CIF ID in the Consultant ID field Consultant Address Specify the address of the consultant The system will display the consultant address if you had specified the CIF ID in the Consultant ID field If the sponsor or consultant is not a customer of the bank then the system will display only the name and address of the sponsor or the consultant Specifying Milestones Details You can specify the records of the various milestones in the project and percentage of completion with respect to the project Project Details and Maintenance E New amp Enter Query Project Details Customer Number Branch Code Project ID Currency Project Name Number Of PPCs Project Account Branch Default PPC Clearance Days Project Account Start Date Liability No End Date Project Value Sponsor Retention Margin Remarks Bank Margin 7 Ratio Change Allowed Auto Line Creation for PPC Ti J JV Limit Tracking Required F Limit Track Required through Commitment main MA Venture Details PPC Limits Non PPC Limits Milestones 1 Of 1 T Milestone No Description Percentage Completion Start Date End Date A Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status 338 ORACLE
136. anches the exchange rates maintained at the Head Office will be made applicable to all branches of the bank Leave it unchecked to indicate that exchange rates should be maintained at each branch Position Accounting Required You can retrieve the position of a foreign currency any time by opting for position accounting in your bank When you opt for position accounting you maintain a Position GL and a Position Equivalent GL for every foreign currency maintained in your bank The Position GL reflects the current position of the currency If you opt for position accounting while defining Bank Wide Parameters you have to maintain Position GLs and Position Equivalent GLs for every foreign currency that your bank deals in When maintaining GLs for your bank you can opt to link the different currencies associated with the GL to either of the following e The Position GLs that you have specified for the currency Your specifications in the Currency Definition screen will default here e Position GLs of your choice Daily MIS Refinancing As part of setting up the bank level preferences you can indicate whether MIS refinancing processing is required on a daily basis for the particular branch of your bank eat ORACLE If you indicate that MIS refinancing should be done on a daily basis refinance processing will be done on a daily basis for the following modules e Loans and Deposits e Money Market Note You can indicate the r
137. ange rate to convert the deal currency in terms of the account currency Remarks Specify any remarks associated with the external deal if required Deal Booking Date Specify the booking date of the external deal or select the deal booking date by clicking the Calendar icon Deal Expiry Date Specify the expiry date of the external deal or select the deal expiry date by clicking the Calendar icon After specifying the above details you can save the record An amount block equivalent to the deal amount is automatically created once these details are authorized Note You can not modify a record in this screen after it has been authorized For more details related to amount block maintenance refer the chapter Maintaining Amount Blocks in Current and Savings Account User Manual aoe ORACLE 30 Annexure B File Formats 30 1 Introduction As mentioned earlier SWIFT provides a country wise holiday list that can be uploaded into Oracle FLEXCUE using the CCH source code This file consists of the HF and HS records HF and HS are the tag identifiers through which the currency code can be obtained 30 2 Upload File Formats HF Non European countries As mentioned before the HF record comprises the holiday details for countries where EUR is not the local currency The currency code is obtained from the country code present in this record The holiday record is then uploaded i
138. ansfer Loans and Deposit contracts have tenor 0 zero Therefore you need to maintain Customer Spreads for zero tenor also The tenor is specified in days Specifying Spread Details When processing an FX deal involving a customer for whom you have maintained spread details the system picks up the customer spread corresponding to the tenor of the deal and builds it into the exchange rate If spread details are unavailable for a specific tenor the system picks up the spread defined for the nearest lower tenor For example assume for a customer and currency pair you maintain spread details for the following tenors 3 5 and 10 days When processing a deal with a tenor of 4 days involving the customer and the currency pair the system picks up the spread details defined for a tenor of three days This is because spread details for a 4 day tenor is unavailable for the customer and currency pair 13 1 ORACLE 15 1 1 15 1 2 Note You can also maintain customer spreads for the wildcard entry ALL If spread details for a specific counterparty for the currency pair are unavailable the System looks for the customer spread maintained for the wildcard ALL entry If even that is not available then the customer spread defaults to zero Computing Buy and Sell Spreads Using percentage system suppose the bank wants to make a profit of 5 over and above the mid rate quoted Supp
139. are two sets of accounts that you can maintain in the Bank Wide Parameters screen one for mismatches arising out of entries to real accounts and another for mismatches arising out of entries to contingent accounts The relevant Control accounts must therefore be of Real or Contingent nature as defined in the GL Chart of Accounts Such balancing entries will be automatically generated if a mismatch of currency or value date entries or both is involved in any module of Oracle FLEXCUBE except Journal Entry ee ORACLE In your Chart of Accounts you must ensure that the following conditions are not indicated for the control accounts that you have specified for the currency mismatch and value date mismatch entries e Position accounting Even if position accounting is set to Yes for the control account the system will not pass any position accounting entries since position accounting is done only for the main set of entries and not for the auto balancing entries e Account revaluation Account revaluation must be set for the control accounts since the effect of revaluing these balances would be offset the effect of revaluing the original GLs the GLs into which the main entries were posted e Direct posting If you post a manual entry to one of the Control Accounts and the Position Entry Flag for the Control Account is set to Yes then the system will do position accounting for that entry Hence for the GLs set up as Control Acc
140. at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 3516 ORACLE 35 11 1 The screen is as shown below Core Exception From Date To Date Report For All Modules Selected Modules Report 1 Of 1 E Selected List o Report Format PDF Printer At Client Report Output Print Printer From Date Specify the start date of the report date range The system will include the details of the record from this date To Date Specify the end date of the report date range The system will include the details of the record until this date Report For Specify whether you want to generate the report for all the modules or selected modules alone If you select Selected Modules you need to specify the modules below Selected List If you need to generate the report for selected modules you need to indicate the modules here Use the add button to add more modules Contents of Report The parameters specified while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the report Other content displayed in the report is as follows Header The Header carries the title of the report information on the branch code the branch date the ID of the user who generated the report the date and time at which it was generated and the modules covered in the report Body You can find the following details in the body of the report Field Name Field Description M
141. ate Reversed Flag L Ml Input By Authorized By Modification Date Time Date Time Number E Authorized H Open In this screen for the current branch you can maintain a range of dates every date within which will be designated as holidays for the branch You can also provide a reason for the designation Every unexpected holiday you designate must be authorized for it to be effective Reversing Designated Holiday In the Unexpected Holiday Maintenance screen you can also reverse a designated holiday before the actual date Specify the holiday date in the Holiday Date field and check the Reverse box field alongside it When you designate unexpected holidays any bank or customer value dates for any transactions that coincided with the holiday are rolled forward Any accounting entries passed are reversed and fresh entries are passed to reflect the new value date Note For the release of uncollected funds the original transaction date is considered for avail ability calculations Propagating Local Holidays Oracle FLEXCUBE facilitates propagation of holiday details maintained in the head branch to all other active branches This propagation is based on the value maintained for the CSTB parameter PROPOGATION_OF_LOH a ORACLE The system defaults the value as N for PROPOGATION_OF_LOH indicating that no propagation is allowed for local holidays however you can set
142. ate type that is to be used for individual LD and MM transactions while processing the contract Propagate Floating Rates to Branches You have to indicate whether the floating rates maintained at the head office of your bank should be propagated across all the branches of your bank Check the box positioned next to this field to indicate that floating rates need to be propagated across branches Consequently each time you maintain a floating rate for a particular rate code and currency combination at your bank a corresponding floating rate record will be created and sent to all the branches of your bank Limits History Required You can indicate whether date wise limits history needs to be maintained for the Bank If you choose to enable this option the limits history is maintained at the following levels e Liability level history for storing liability records e Limit level history for storing Lines records e Line level history for storing Line Utilization records Conditions for collating Limits History data e There is no retrospective effect on limits history Back valued contracts and account transactions do not result in any adjustment to the previous records in the history Such transactions are inserted with the current EOD date Similarly any future dated contracts and account transactions are also inserted with the current EOD dates In cases where the main line is changed to a sub line the utilization is transfe
143. bService Code Calling Sequence Number Calling Stage Status Details PRE Unprocessed WebService Code Select the unique web service code from the adjoining option list Call Sequence Number The system displays the unique sequence number for the web service Calling Stage Select the stage in which the web service should be called from the drop down list Status Select the status of the web service from the drop down list Note When any operation is done in the screen and call to back end is made the request built during this process will have the information of web services to be called The web service call will be made based on the status of each web service which will be updated in the backend The details of an external web service is taken from the maintenance screen based on the web service code mentioned in the call form Each web service should be deployed in the URL mentioned in the maintenance before processing the request A flag will be set to find whether the request contains the web service information and the same will be used for parsing the request in the application server Call to the web service is based on the request format that particular web service accepts The request to the web service should be in that format and it can be written in the handler class provided Sending request to back end involves two cases If in the request option to call the web service is pre
144. background Annual Holidays These are the holidays you have defined for the year calendar on display You will observe that all holidays are marked in red while working days in black All unauthorised holiday dates appear against a blue background To mark a date as a holiday double click on it In case you wish to undo a date marked off as a holiday double click on it once again It changes back to a working day With each modification you make the Modification Number in the made by column below moves up serially Designating Unexpected Holidays for Branch The holiday calendar for your branch is maintained in the Branch Holiday Calendar screen In addition to the holiday calendar you may need to designate certain days as holidays unexpectedly without forewarning Alternatively you may also need to roll back a previously defined holiday date or set of dates You can do this using the Unexpected Branch Holiday Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing CGDUNHOL in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 20 3 ORACLE 20 2 4 1 20 2 4 2 The screen is as shown below Unexpected Branch Holiday Maintenance EX New E3 Enter Query Branch Code Branch Name Holiday Working Type Holiday Working Holiday Date From Holiday Date To Holiday Reason Type Exceptions _ Holiday Working D
145. ber Entry Number Specify the entry number If you have not specified the entry number then the system will display an override message Amount The system displays the amount for liquidation However you can amend this field Branch Code Specify the branch code Currency The system displays the currency details 33 17 ORACLE 33 5 Viewing Dashboard Details Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to view the details of the PPC available in the project such as joint venture ratios balance in the project account the project lines and their limits for each project line etc You can view these details using Dashboard Details screen To invoke this screen type STDPJDSH in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button The screen is as shown below Dashboard Detail E New 3 Enter Query Project ID Customer ID Account No Project Name Customer Name Account CCY Project Amount Available Balance Current Balance Project Utilization Currency Limit Details Commitment Details Loan Details 1 Of1 Collateral Type Sequence Collateral Description Amount Currency Out Standing B Share Currency Available You can view the following details e Project ID e Project Name e Customer ID e Customer Name e Available Balance e Account Number e Account Currency e Project Limit e Project Utilization e Current Balance 33 5 1 Viewing P
146. ber of hours by which the branch leads or lags behind the Server Time Minutes Indicate the additional minutes by which the branch leads or lags behind the Server Time Note The reference of time is always the System Time Server Time Ahead The system calculates the local time of the Branch by adding subtracting the Server Time and the Time Zone Offset time When you maintain the offset time for the time zone you need to specify whether the system should add or subtract the offset time from the Time Zone Offset Checking the Ahead box indicates that the offset time is added to the Server Time Consequently if the box is unchecked the offset time is subtracted from the Server Time Additionally the system validates the cutoff time depending on the time you specify here The validation is based on following 3 parameters e Cutoff Time maintained for the currency in Currency Definition Screen e Cutoff Offset Time maintained for the Branch in Branch Parameters Screen e Time Zone Offset maintained for Branch in Branch Parameters Screen sp ORACLE 5 1 4 4 5 1 4 5 5 1 5 Indicating Cutoff Offset Time When defining a currency you can indicate a cut off time for the currency If your bank operates in branches located in different time zones the cut off time maintained for the bank will not be applicable across branches Therefore you can set up an offset time for your branch based on the cut off time set for the
147. cccsseeeceeenteeeeteeeneeeeteeenaeteeeeennaes 10 14 10 4 2 Maintaining Conversion GLS 0 cceeceseeeeeenee eee eeeenneteeseeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeenaees 10 16 10 4 3 Implications of Currency REd NOMINATION ccccceeteeteettteeteteennetees 10 16 10 4 4 Specifying Preferred ERI Currency for Counterparty 0 ccceceeeeees 10 18 10 4 5 Specifying Settlement Message Details 00 0 2 ceccccccceeteeeteeenteeeeteeeeaeees 10 19 10 4 6 Settlements of Foreign Exchange Deals eccceccecceesseeeteeneeeteteeenneees 10 19 10 4 7 Reports and Advices 00 1 ccccccccccceccecececenennecaeceeteseeeetestenseeneaaneaeteseeeeeess 10 19 10 4 8 Maintaining LimitS TYP cccccccccccesseeeeeeenteeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaes 10 20 10 4 9 Maintaining Transaction LIMItS cc ccs eee eente eee eteenneeeteeenaeeeeeeeaaes 10 21 10 5 Maintaining Sequence Generation Format 0 cccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetieeeeeeentaeeeeees 10 23 Maintaining Currency Denomination cccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeee 11 1 TLT Introduction piece cee eee iabeed dateiite cdeeeei anda eid nebdien natant 11 1 11 2 Maintaining Currency Denomination Details 0 0 0 0 ec cceecceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeteeeereeee 11 1 Expressing Amounts in WordS cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneenenees 12 1 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 42 1 INCHODUCTION ES sais Sites ie eka Sie ead le heen dt cian os hl viola leech ema
148. ccount branch transfer batch ACDTFRBT which is triggered as part of BoD operations The system verifies the balances of the accounts to be processed There can be two cases as follows Negative balance If the account balance is negative then the system will debit the transfer GL and credit the account to make the balance zero Positive balance If the account balance is positive then the system will debit the account and credit the transfer GL to make the balance zero Further the system updates the remaining necessary account information The new branch code is updated in messages statements and all branch related information specific to the account Note The system will not process the account transfer in the following circumstances The target branch is not allowed for the account class The account has uncollected unauthorized or tanked balance The account status is Frozen Deceased No Debit or No Credit The account is a Nostro type account Once the details are updated the system transfers the balance back to the account from the transfer GL oo ORACLE Auto deposits linked to the account is handled as follows Auto deposit maturing on the transfer date The system does not transfer the auto deposits that mature on the date of transfer Auto deposit maturing in the future The system transfers the auto deposits that mature on a future date In case
149. ceeee 13 1 ACRURNAL ossia 35 4 CYDCDEFN 0 eeseeeteeeees 10 1 ACRMREVL 35 33 CYDCUSPR oooi 15 1 ACRPCASH 35 6 CYDRATEE oiiaii 14 1 ACRPEVBL ossia 35 9 CYRTCURR eects 35 10 ACRPMOVE 35 21 CYRTHIST cccccecccseeesseeesee 35 11 ACRREVAL 35 19 CYSRATES oooi 14 4 c F CFDCUMRG f 15 3 FTDVDSPR oooi 10 12 CORDSLRP oooi 35 45 i CSDACRHM ososi 5 30 Piena E a IADIBMNT e sseecsseeseeeeoeees 9 5 sr eS a ISDINSTN cccccecseecsseeeeeeee 10 18 CSDAMLPC oooi 31 2 L CADEVA eee a LMDTYPES ssessssseeseee 10 20 CSDDEVDT oniiir 32 1 CSDDEVPR oain 32 4 S CSDOVDMT ossis 24 4 STDAMTRN fn 12 1 CSDPLMNT oooi 10 21 STDBANKP niiin 2 1 CSDPXMNT onosi 14 5 STDBRANC secesseseseeesseeeses 5 3 CSDRAMDN ccccceeeceee 3 1 STDBRRES niiin 2 7 CSDSEQGN osisssa 10 24 STDDATES oiiaii 7 1 CSRPACCC oooi 35 14 STDDEALR coceecseccssseseseteeseee 4 1 CSRPACCO oooi 35 13 STDLOCHL ossis 20 1 CSRPACTJ oori 35 15 STDNETQY escscescceeesceeeses 9 6 CSRPBLCB cccccescsceeees 35 34 STDS T SCD cc cieeceececiscee 17 1 CSRPBLUP oii 35 36 STDTRCOD ossai 18 1 CSRPCHB oi 35 37 STDTRNGD scccsceaseicces 31 7 CSRPDDRP oin 35 38 STDTXCYL oiii 5 26 CSRPEXOP oooi 35 16 STRCIF sicceaciaceecesccen 35 23 CSRPPDC oin 35 40 STRCUSAC onssas 35 28 CSRTEMOD nosis 35 42 STRDOCL oiii 35 31 CSSACRHM ososi 5 31 Apa ORACLE
150. ceeeeceeceaeceeceeeeeeeeeseseceaeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 35 10 35 6 1 Contents Of REPOS 2 cccccccccecceeceeeeecenenecaecaeceseeeeeestessecseaaeaanesteeseens 35 11 35 7 Rate History REDOrt osssrecsineidrn iiinis AE A E A EA EAA 35 11 35 8 Customer Account Opening Confirmation Report ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee 35 12 35 8 1 Contents of the Report 1 ccccccccccceeseceecenceneceeeeeeeeeeeeseetecseeaaeaaeeneeeeeens 35 13 35 9 Account Closing Confirmations sssri teanna nenia EE A EAE RERNE 35 14 35 9 1 Contents Of RODOME cccccccccecceececeetececenenaecaecesteeteestestenseesneaaneneeeseees 35 14 35 10 Activity Journal Report sc00 200 natin anil ahd nd eae eden 35 15 35 10 1 Contents Of Repol 0 2 ccccccccceceeccnennecaeeaececeeeeeesseseesnsnanecaneneeeeeeettnteees 35 15 35 11 Core Exception Report cccccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeceneaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesececenciaeeeeeeeeeteeeetes 35 16 35 11 17 Gontents of R P M aire sits ces ee as ate ae 35 17 35 12 Uncollected Funds Report ccccccecceeeeeeeeceeeccneaeceeeeeeeeeseesececncaesaeeeeeeeeeeesetees 35 18 35 12 1 Contents Of REDOME ereen iae ea ae e ea a eE iT 35 19 35 13 Account Revaluation REport cccceceeeeeeeccceccneceeeeeeeeeeeeeesececeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenea 35 19 35 13 1 Contents OF aS 210 REEE PE E ee 35 20 35 14 Accounts Movement Report cccceeeeceeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
151. ch Reset Record Status Authorization Status Developer Code a Records per page 15 10f1 Authorization Status Record Status Developer Code Website Address Developer Name County Email ld mam A In this screen you can query based on any combination of the following fields e Authorization Status e Developer Code e Record Status After specifying the parameters for the query click Search button The system displays all the records matching the parameters specified You can view the following details e Authorization Status a ORACLE 32 4 e Record Status e Developer Code e Website e Address e Developer Name e Country e Email ID e Zip Maintaining Developer Project Details You can maintain the details of real estate development projects in the Developer Project Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing CSDDEVPR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Developer Project Maintenance New E3 Enter Query Project Name Project Description Address Unit Details 1 Of 1 Unit Id Unit Holder Name Developer Code Fields ELGE Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status Here you can specify the following details Project Name Specify the name of the project Project Description Specify a bri
152. ches or can be input by the HO and propagated to all the branches If in the Bank wide parameters Preferences screen you have specified your preference as copy exchange rates to branches then the currency rates maintained at the bank level by your Head Office will be propagated to the branches In the Bank wide Preferences screen if you have not specified copy exchange rate to branches then the Currency Exchange Rates Input screen is maintained at the branch level by the different branches Modifications of Rates at branch level are allowed even though Copy Exchange Rates to Branches is enabled at bank level You can invoke this screen by typing CYDRATEE in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 14 1 ORACLE The screen appears as shown below Currency Exchange Rates Input E New E3 Enter Query Currency 1 Currency 2 Currency Rate 101 Rate Type Buy Spread Sell Spread Buy Rate Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status In this screen you maintain the following parameters for each rate type of a currency pair e Mid rate e Buy spread and Sale spread e Buy rate and Sale rate Specify the currency pair for which you want to compute the exchange rates The pair should be selected keeping in mind the quotation method for exchange rates as followed b
153. cify the status code for which you wish to maintain role to head mapping or select the status code from the option list provided Accounting Role Select the accounting role to be used for role to head mapping from the option list provided Accounting Head Select the GL accounting head to be used for role to head mapping from the option list provided aap ORACLE 5 3 1 You can add more rows to accounting role and heads by clicking the plus icon provided You can also delete a row from this table by selecting the required row and clicking the minus icon Note The accounting roles and heads maintained here will override the default role head map ping maintained for the product Viewing Accounting Role to Head Mapping Details You can view the details related to accounting roles and heads for a branch in Branch Level Role to Head Mapping Summary screen You can invoke this screen by typing CSSACRHM in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Branch ievel Role To Head Mapping Summary 3 Search Advanced Search Reset 4 Clear All Case Sensitive Authorization Status Record Status Branch Product Code Status Records per page 15 Authorization Status Record Status Product Code The following details get displayed in this screen e Authorization status e Record status e Branch code e Product code e Status
154. cify the transaction code against which the suspense entries are posted or reversed Suspense Batch Number Specify the batch number against which the suspense entries are posted or reversed Reverse Suspense Entry Days Specify the days till which the system can sustain the mismatch entries once the batch is run for the same You can specify a value within a range of 1 to 9999 If the Reverse Suspense Entry Days is greater than the EOD suspense entry date and if reversal action is not performed for the suspense entry then the EOD is stopped and system displays an error message Maximum Real Suspense Amount Specify the maximum amount that the system can consider to post suspense entry for an EOD for real entry Maximum Cont Suspense Amount Specify the maximum amount that the system can consider to post suspense entry for an EOD for contingent entry Maintaining Duplication Check Details You can maintain the number of days for which the duplication check should be done for a transaction in Duplication Check Details tab A transaction is compared with all previous transactions entered during the number of days maintained here for any possible duplication The duplicate check is done starting from booking date till the booking date minus the number of days for duplicate check This duplication check is carried out based on the combination of the preferences maintained at the FT SI product respectively ol ORACLE
155. cify the type of limit Limit Description The system displays the limit description Customer No Specify the customer number Liability No Specify the liability number 33 13 ORACLE 33 3 6 2 33 4 Line Code Specify the line code Line Serial The system displays the serial number for the limit created Currency The system displays the line currency details Rate Specify the rate Margin Specify the margin JV Line This box will be checked by default Maintaining Party Line Details Customer No Specify the customer number Liability No Specify the liability number Line Code Specify the line code Line Serial The system displays the serial number for the limit created Currency The system displays the line currency details Maintaining PPC Oracle FLEXCUBE allows the executor to maintain the PPC during the course of the project i e during the course of the project once the executor completes the milestone should inform the sponsor The sponsor in turn will inspect and confirms the completion of the milestone The executor is then allowed to raise the PPC with start date and the expiry date The system calculates the expiry date based on the default PPC clearance days However the sponsor can change the expiry date The system will accept the PPC in any currency If there is a cross currency then the system uses a standard mid rate for converting from limit currency to projec
156. cker Record Status Date Time Authorization Status To enable tanking of maintenance records for a function Id you need to select the function Id in this screen and then select the Tanking Required checkbox For more details on this screen refer Security Management System user manual Note Tanking of records has been enabled only for the following function Ids STDCIF STDCUSAC 28 1 ORACLE 28 2 1 Tanking New Records During the creation of a new record if Tanking Required option is enabled the system tanks the details of the newly created record till the record gets authorized Any query on this data retrieves this stored information All modifications to unauthorized records get tanked and the modified data gets written to actual tables only after authorization In this case the record remains in Authorized status in the actual table and the unauthorized modifications will be kept pending for un tanking The most recent modifications will be shown in both summary and detailed screens with the You can close a record only if it is in Authorized state without any unauthorized modifications pending for un tanking Closure is possible only for records that are in Open status When you close a record the system tanks this and the record gets actually closed only after the You can re open a record only if it has been closed and the closure is authorized Re opening of a reco
157. control number Therefore the 13 digit 4 The customer account number will now read as 000 4 1 123456 1 4 Numeric Account Masks with User Defined Algorithms as Checksum Algorithm If the check digit component within a Customer Account Number is to be generated using a method of your choice you must identify the following e The User Defined Algorithm for the Customer Account Number this identifies the name of the user defined algorithm for check digit generation of account numbers e The User Defined Algorithm for Consumer Number this stores the name of the user defined algorithm for validating consumer numbers While capturing Customer Account numbers the System checks for your specification for the checksum algorithm If you have selected User Defined the check digit is generated using the specified user defined algorithm e Unused sequence numbers of CASA cannot be tracked for re use if the sequence number is generated by user defined algorithm Since these parameters are maintained for your bank they are defaulted to the branches of your bank You will not be allowed to change these for a specific branch of your bank Note Unused sequence numbers of CASA can be tracked for re use only if the customer ac count mask contains numeric mask e Ifthe account mask contains any of the following characters the lost account number is re used only if the same customer opens another account with the same branch
158. count Class Specific Records Account Account Class 10f1 E Report Format Printer At Client Report Output Printer 36 ORACLE 35 4 1 Specify the following details Report Name Specify the name of the report The option list provided displays all valid reports maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one Report Type Indicate whether the report should be a detailed report or a summary report Notice Contracts Check this box to indicate that notice contracts should be covered in the report Call Contracts Check this box to indicate that call contracts should be covered in the report Select Account Class Account Indicate whether the reports should be generated based on account class or account All Specific Records Indicate whether the reports should be generated for all records in an account class account or for specific records Account Class If you have indicated Account Class as the basis for report generation specify the account classes that should be considered Click add icon to add rows You can select a valid account class from the adjoining option list Account If you have indicated Account as the basis for report generation specify the accounts that should be considered Click add icon to add rows You can select a valid account from the adjoining option list Click OK to generate the report Contents of Report The contents of the
159. creen Specifying User Defined Fields You can associate values to all the User Defined fields created and attached to the Currency Definition Screen You can view the list of User Defined fields associated by clicking the Fields button The screen appears as shown below User Defined Fields Field Name Value Description You can enter the value for the UDFs listed here in the Value column For more details on how to create user Defined fields refer chapter Creating custom fields in Oracle FLEXCUBE in the User Defined Fields User Manual under Modularity Annexure The treatment for interest calculation varies with each of the interest calculation methods Each method is dealt with individually below 10 9 ORACLE Actual Actual Method 10 000x10 100 x 31 365 84 366 In this method the number of days is calculated as follows Dec 31 days include from date exclude to date Jan 31 days Feb 29 days leap year March 24 days include from date exclude to date Total 31 31 29 24 84 115 Note When the interest period crosses from a non leap year to a leap year or otherwise the basis of actual days has to be treated separately in each year Therefore the denominator for the 31 days in December is 365 as it is anon leap year and the denominator for the 84 days in 2000 is 366 as it is a leap year Actual 365 Method 10 000x10 100x115 3
160. creen will be made applicable to all branches of your bank For instance the account number structure that you define in this screen will be a common format for customer accounts in all branches of your bank Invoke the Bank Parameters screen by typing STDBNKPM in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Bank Parameters Maintenance Enter Query Bank Code Bank Name Head Office Branch Branch Code Branch Description AEri General Preferences FATCA Bank Default Currency Codes Local Currency Currency Description Discount Currency Currency Description Head Office Currency Currency Description Reporting Currency Currency Description Control Accounts For Real Entries Control Accounts For Contigent Entries Currency Mismatch Control Currency Mismatch Control Account Account Value Date Mismatch Control Value Date Mismatch Control Account Account Clearing Bank Code Auto Generate Currency Routing Mask Mismatch Entries Auto Generate Value Date Mismatch Entries Preferences AccountMask Field Properties Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status You can maintain the following details in this screen Bank Code In Oracle FLEXCUBE a bank is identified by a unique four character code You can follow your own convention in devising this code In all inter bank transactions this code identifies
161. cs 12 1 Defining Currency Pairs cccctiesesensetecnceredesast ead ccbeochec dc eceedd aecratetenientnceenct 13 1 TSA roduc jo eeicctets les aeceetitah E E chide E bth oetents ARE 13 1 132 System Features cicis ekinticeviceite iiss ani adic ee 13 1 13 3 Maintaining Parameters for Currency Pair 0 cccccceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeetieeeeeeenteeeereeea 13 2 13 3 1 Specifying Points MUItIDIICS ccc ee ceecentte eee ceenteeeeeceeaeeeeseenaaeeeeeeeaaaes 13 3 Maintaining Exchange Rates cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 1 TEA UntrOduCtlons 2stst 2c0 eee oh etc hie a ete a ean eat iia iets 14 1 14 1 1 Authorizing Exchange Rates 0 ceccceccceeeceeeeeteeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeeeteeeaeeeeeteneanees 14 4 14 1 2 Revising Exchange Rates ccccecceecceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaeeeeseneaeeeeeneeaeeees 14 4 14 1 3 Viewing Exchange Rats cccccccceeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeenanees 14 4 14 1 4 Specifying Limits for Cross Currency Transactions ccccccceseeeeneeees 14 4 Maintaining Currency Spread for Customer ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 15 1 15 1 Maintaining Customer Spread Details 0 cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeteneeeeeeetneeeeeee 15 1 15 1 1 Computing Buy and Sell Spreads ceccccccceeeeeceenneeeeeeetnnneeeeeetneeeeenens 15 2 15 1 2 Maintaining Currency Margins for CUStOMES ccccceceetttteeeeetnnneeeeeees 15 2 Period Code Maintenance ssssssseseeese
162. ction Amount limit beyond which the system will not default the Auto Exchange Rate All valid currencies defined in the Currency Pair Maintenance will appear for selection The Currency2 should be part of a Currency Pair Maintenance in which the Currency1 defined here is the first currency Currency 2 can be specified as ALL Specifying Limit Details Rate Code You need to specify the Rate Type code for the Exchange Rate Limit Limit Currency You need to specify the currency in which the Limit Amount should be expressed All valid currencies defined in the system will be applicable for selection There will be a validation for the limit currency as either Currency1 or Currency2 Limit Amount You need to specify the maximum amount up to which the system should default the Exchange Rate or perform the Rate Variance validation Validating Exchange Rate Limits The Funds Transfer Contract Input will default the Rate only if the Transaction Amount is less than the Maximum Amount defined for the Rate Code maintained at the product level for FT If the amount is more than the specified amount then the system will not default the Rate Instead it will force the user to enter the Rate Once the user enters the Rate the system will not add the Customer Spread etc as this will be final Exchange Rate for the contract The Rate Variance validation will also be done only if the amount is less than the maximum amount defined for the Rate Cod
163. cument Mandatory Indicates whether the document is needed for checklist 230 ORACLE 23 5 Viewing Document Type Details You can view the document type details in the Document Checklist Summary screen To invoke this screen type CSSDOCHK in the field at the top right corner of the Application toolbar and click the adjoining arrow button C advanced Search Reset Authorization Status Record Status Process Code Stage Records per page 15 v Authorization Status Record Status Process Code You can query on records based on any one or all of the following criteria Authorization Status Record Status Process Code Stage Click Search button The system identifies all records satisfying the specified criteria and displays the following details for each one of them Authorization Status Record Status Process Code l Stage as ORACLE 24 1 24 Configuring Overrides Introduction 24 1 1 The system displays messages in respect of errors that occur when you execute operations during a work session in any module These error messages are also displayed in respect of automatic or batch processes such as end of day processes Depending upon your requirements at your installation you might require some of the errors to be ignored and others to result in an override being sought from the user for the operation to proceed For still others
164. currency and the limits currency are same the comparison will be done directly If different currencies are involved the system will first convert the transaction amount into the cutoff amount currency using the STANDARD mid rate and then perform the validations To perform the check the System will look for the limits maintained in the following order 3 The System looks for the limits maintained for a specific module and specific product combination 4 If the first option is not available it checks the limits maintained for a specific module ZALP all products combination 5 It checks the maintenance for AL all modules ZALP all products combination If the third option is also not available the system displays an error message When a transaction exceeds the amount limit the system displays an override message while saving the transaction Maintaining Sequence Generation Format Every contract in Oracle FLEXCUBE is identified by a unique Contract Reference Number that is generated internally by the system You are not allowed to modify this number In addition a contract is also identified by a unique User Reference Number By default the Contract Reference Number will be taken as the User Reference Number But you have the option to change the User Ref Number Oracle FLEXCUBE also provides you the facility to generate the user reference number ina specific format ree ORACLE To maintain a specific format you
165. d Source Code Specify the source code based on which you need to maintain the product transactional limits The adjoining option list displays all valid source codes The transaction limit amount maintained for the selected source code is used to validate transaction limit while authorizing the contract If the source code is available in Oracle FLEXCUBE then the system enables all the fields available under Product Transaction Limit Details multi grid If the source code external then the system enables only Transaction Limit available under Product Transaction Limit Details multi grid Note You cannot select a source code more than once Transaction Limit Currency The transaction limit currency is the currency in which you would like to maintain the amount limit Customer Type Select the type of customer for whom you are maintaining the transaction limits from the adjoining drop down list The following are the options available e Corporate e Individual e Bank e All Specfying Product Transaction Limit Details Specify the following transaction limit details Transaction Limit Specify a transaction limit Each time you process a transaction the system checks the transaction amount involved in the contract against the limit specified here If the contract currency is different from the transaction limit currency then the system converts the contract amount using the standard mid rate to
166. d here Payment advises for FX and MM contracts will be generated on a date which is calculated as the number of spot working days before the Maturity Date of the contract For example the tenor of an MM contract is as follows Value Date 01 01 99 Maturity Date 31 01 99 10 2 ORACLE Contract Currency USD Contract Amount 5000 For USD the number of Spot Days is specified as Spot Days 3 For this contract the payment advices will be sent on 28 01 96 Foreign Exchange Netting Days Oracle FLEXCUBE provides a facility wherein all transactions relating to a customer meant to be settled on a particular day and are made before a specific cut off day are collated netted and a single payment message is sent instead of individual messages for each payment This cut off day can be parameterized and is called Netting Days The number of FX netting days applicable for the specified currency is maintained here Note The system will validate that the FX Netting days are lesser than or equal to the spot days Settlement Days In this screen you can specify the Settlement Days for a currency Settlement messages for the components of a contract in the LC BC LD MM FX and FT modules will be generated according to the settlement days specified for the currency of the settlement account The following example illustrates this For example when maintaining the details of USD in the Currency screen you speci
167. dable value of the respective PPC You should allocate the limit to an individual customer limit lines based on the share each has in the joint venture if UV Limit Tracking Required is checked On authorizing the PPC the system will automatically create line commitment contracts during the EOD The rates used in the commitment are taken from project maintenance For each PPC authorized and if Limits tracking through Commitment is checked then the system will create the following line commitment contracts Project line commitment contract regardless of whether there is a joint venture or not Customer line commitment contract for each customer only in case of joint venture The bank will view the details of a project and the status of its collaterals from a Dashboard screen You should manually mark the PPC as CLOSED if the payment against it has been received You should manually close the project account if the system receives the payment towards all the PPC s and all the PPC s are marked as CLOSED When multiple lines are available and system has to utilize the lines the priority will be determined based on the lowest interest rate spread defined in the linkages screen Using the PPC liquidation screen you can choose the payment of the loan or credit to the project account This transaction will be logged under the PPC a8 ORACLE 33 3 14 PPC liquidation will be allowed even without the Ent
168. de to be manually released intra day that is within the day select the Intraday Release option The Intraday Funds Batch when manually executed during the day picks up those transactions that are due for release on or before the system date which have been posted with the transaction code with the Intraday Release option enabled for release of uncollected funds The Intraday Release option cannot be enabled if the Availability specified for the transaction code is Immediate You can use the ACUNCOLB Intraday Funds Release batch process to perform the intra day release of uncollected funds in respect of transactions posted using a transaction code for which the Intraday Release option has been enabled For details about invoking the batch process refer the Current and Savings Account user manual Tracking Overdraft Component type for transaction Select the component type for transaction from the drop down list The options available are e Principal Select Principal if a transaction type is not an interest or charge e Interest Select Interest if a transaction code is used for debiting interest for an overdraft account e Charge Select Charge if a transaction code is used for debiting charge for an overdraft account The component type for the transaction code is mandatory for maintaining transaction code and cannot be modified after the first authorization Specifying Preferences This fi
169. dividual Transaction Input By Authorized By Modification Date Time Date Time Number Wi Authorized W Open Limit Code You can maintain limit codes for the various types of limit types like online tracking limits individual tracking limits daily turnover limits and monthly turnover limits You have to specify a unique name to identify each Limit Code that you would like to define Subsequently you can assign a brief description with each limit code that you define Limit Type Since you can maintain separate limit codes for each limit type you have to associate a limit code with each limit type The options available are e Online Limit tracks the limits of all online transaction that exceed limits e Individual Transaction during the batch processed executed at EOD the limit maintained for this type is used to tack all individual transactions that exceed the limit e Online Daily Turnover all transactions processed during the day are considered for an online tracking and an online reporting is done when the specified limit exceeds e Monthly Turnover all transactions processed during the month that have exceeded the specified limit will be reported e Daily Turnover during the batch processes executed at EOD all transactions for the business day that have exceed the limit will be reported You can select the appropriate type from the list 31 3 Maintaining Anti Money Laundering Customer Groups
170. do not choose the Text Before option If you would like to prefix an amount with its currency choose the Text Before option For example if you would like to describe USD 1000 as Dollars One Thousand choose the Text Before option 122 ORACLE 13 1 13 2 13 Defining Currency Pairs Introduction In the foreign exchange markets the exchange rates for some currency pairs such as the USD GBP or USD JPY are easily obtainable since these are frequently traded The exchange rates of other currencies such as the ZAR INR South African Rand Indian Rupee which is not traded very often is determined through a third currency This third currency is usually the US dollar since the US dollar is quoted in all trading centres In the Currency pair definition screen you define the static attributes of currency pairs for which a regular market quote is readily available For other pairs which do not have a regular market quote you need to specify the third currency through which the system should compute the exchange rate The currency pair screen is maintained at the bank level by your Head Office branch using the Currency Pair Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing CYDCCYPR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button amp Currency Pair Maintenance E New amp Enter Query Currency Pair Currency 1 Currency Desc
171. ds Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status Here you can capture the following details Country Code You can capture a unique three character code to identify the country For example you can maintain USA as the country code for United States of America Alternate country code You can also associate an alternate country code This is for information purposes only and will not be printed on any customer correspondence For example you can have US as the alternate code for USA Country Name After you define an alphanumeric code to identify the country for which you would like to assign a name you have to specify the name of the Country Overall Limit This is the maximum credit exposure that a bank is willing to take for a country That is the sum of all utilization s under this country liability cannot exceed the amount specified here Blacklisted Further in the Country Name Maintenance screen you can black list a country for further usage You are not allowed to deal in countries that are blacklisted 18 ORACLE You can only deal with countries that are not blacklisted IBAN Mandatory for Payment Messages If this is checked it indicates that for every payment message an IBAN is mandatory This is automatically checked if you have checked the EU Member box If this option is unchecked for a country the system will not process the outgoing payments wherein the orderin
172. e ID of the user who generated the report the date and time at which it was generated the modules covered in the report and customer number of the account holder for whom the report is being generated Body You can find the following details in the body of the report Field Name Field Description Client Number The account number of the client Ir ORACLE 35 10 Activity Journal Report 35 10 1 This report gives details about activity journal in Core Activity Journal screen To invoke this screen type CSRPACTJ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Core Activity Journal From Date To Date Report For Type All Modules Selected Modules 10F1 E Module al Report Format PDF v Printer At Client Report Output Print Printer From Date Specify the start date of the report date range The system will include the details of the record from this date To Date Specify the end date of the report date range The system will include the details of the record until this date Report For Specify whether you want to generate the report for all the modules or selected modules alone If you select Selected Modules you need to specify the modules below Module If you need to generate the report for selected modules you need to indicate the modules here Use the add button to add more modules Contents
173. e Parameters screen Assume that the mask is bbbnnnnnn where bbb represents a 3 digit branch code and nnnnnn is a 6 digit number e The start customer no assume that this number is 100 While generating CIF numbers the system will automatically assign the number 000000100 to the first customer of your branch assuming that the branch code is 000 This conforms to the CIF mask maintained for the bank The next customer will be 000000101 and so on If the option Auto Generate CIF Numbers is checked in the Bank Parameter Preferences screen and the start CIF is zero or null the new customer number will be generated for the branch as per the current running sequence number of the Head Office End Customer No Just as you specify a Start Customer Number you have to indicate the End Customer Number also You will not be allowed to maintain customers beyond this range Let us assume that the End Customer No is 99999 As per the mask and the end number the last customer CIF number that is generated at your branch will be 000099999 Start Dummy Customer Number amp End Dummy Customer Number You should also maintain a dummy customer number range in this screen When maintaining a dummy range you should ensure that dummy CIFs and the actual range do not overlap with one another The dummy CIF range will be used for account number generation As explained earlier the account number can be
174. e Report The parameters specified while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the report Other content displayed in the report is as follows Header The following details are displayed in the header section Field Name Field Description Branch Indicates Branch Code and Branch Name Branch Date Indicates Current Date of the Branch User ID Indicates User ID Date amp Time Indicates the Date and Time when the report was generated Module Indicates module for which report is generated 38 49 ORACLE Body of the Report The following details are displayed as body of the generated report Field Name Field Description Module Indicates the module code Outstanding Amount Indicates the outstanding amount Product Code Indicates the product code Customer ID Indicates the customer ID Customer Name Indicates the name of the customer Product Description Indicates the product description Account Number Indicates Customer Account number Booking Date Indicates the date of booking Branch Name Indicates Branch Name RM Code Indicates the relationship manager code DS Code Indicates the DS code 35 46 ORACLE 36 Function ID Glossary A CSSDEVDT niiin 32 3 ACDIBMNT ceccseesseeeeeeeeee 9 1 CSSDEVPR seseseeeeeeee 32 6 ACRDLTXN oiin 35 1 CYDCCYPR eessteese
175. e Tolerance Limit for DEM is 0 05 you can specify an ERI Amount between DEM 9995 and DEM 10005 DEM 10000 0 05 100 DEM 5 If you enter an ERI value exceeding DEM 10005 or less than DEM 9950 the system recalculates the ERI Amount at the time of generating the settlement messages The recalculation will be on the basis of the pegged rates between the Settlement Currency and the ERI currency Note The system validates the ERI amount only when generating the settlement messages It does not validate the ERI amount at the time of input in the Settlement Message Details screen Index Base Ccy Specify the currency that should be used to handle index based securities traded by the banks wherein the deals are done in index currency and their settlement is done through the local currency Generate 103 You can enable the MT 103 format option only if you would like to generate outgoing MT 103 messages in the MT 103 format If you are enabling this option for a specific currency ensure to also enable this option e For your bank branch in the Branch Parameters Maintenance e For the customer of the contract in the BIC Code Maintenance e For the product used by the contract in the Product Preferences 10 8 ORACLE 10 2 1 Consequently while processing transactions in the specified currency for such a customer branch and product for which the MT 103 option is enabled the system generates outgoing payment messages in the
176. e accounts When a payment is due on a loan a direct debit is generated Loan DD Generation Days before the payment date As a result in Oracle FLEXCUBE the following entries will be passed Dr Clearing suspense Cr Dummy Settlement Account During liquidation which is performed on the schedule date the entries passed are as follows Dr Dummy Settlement Account Cr Loan Asset GL Interest Income GL Refer the Maintaining the attributes specific to PC products chapter of the PC manual along with the Branch Parameters section of the Core Services Manual for details on processing DDs originating from a Loan Processing Amount Block Oracle FLEXCUBE passes the accounting entries for releasing an amount block through the Transaction Code for Amount Block Release field The system will check whether any amount block of type CASA for a branch is in open status If an account is in open status the system will group the amount blocks into primary account and primary account branch Then the system will remove the amount block from the cover account and debit the blocked amount of the cover account to the primary account Transaction Code for Amount Block Release Specify the transaction code for the release of amount block The adjoining option list displays all valid transaction codes maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Indicating Financial Cycle Current Cycle
177. e defaulted in the AML Customer Group field since the system recognizes each customer code as a customer group You can either choose to categorize the customer under the same group or choose another customer group You can capture a brief description that should be associated with every AML group Next Review Date While maintaining customer group and product category records you can specify the next date on which you would like to review the limits maintained for the various limit types Tracking You have to specify whether the AML tracking is required for a customer or for all customers within a group The system performs a group level tracking if you select Customer group Conversely if you select Customer the AML reporting online tracking and data collection is done only at the customer level Note If you fail to indicate your preference specifically the system will perform a customer group level tracking by default ots ORACLE 31 3 0 1 Risk Profile You can identify the risk profile of the customer group by selecting any one of the following options e High indicating that the limits for the customer group need to be tracked regardless of the amount involved since the customer group is meant for high risk customers e Low indicating that the customer group is meant for low risk customers therefore amount limits need not be tracked if the amount involved falls within the limit amount You can select th
178. e encountered are also displayed You can invoke this screen by typing CSDOVDMT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Overrides Maintenance E New amp Enter Query Language Language Description Error details Error Code Message Type Ignore Confirm Function Parameters _ ___ _ Batch Type Ignore v Fields Conversion Input By Authorized By Modification Date Time Date Time Number Wi Authorized E Open In the Type field you can specify for each error message the appropriate sensitivity level Ignore Override Error Online Authorization or Dual Authorization For error messages in respect of automatic or batch functions you can specify the appropriate level in the Batch Type field Ignore Override or Error For certain overrides to which you have assigned the level Override Online Authorization or Dual Authorization you can indicate whether the authorizer must also confirm the override by checking the Confirm box Note You can make changes to configurable overrides in the Error Codes Maintenance screen only after consulting the support team at your installation ate ORACLE 24 2 1 Maintaining Override Conversion Click Conversion button on the Overrides Maintenance screen to maintain the conversion error codes for the override err
179. e loans The direct debit is raised during the End of Day EOD process after the LD batch processes Sort Code Specify the destination bank code for which the bank raises direct debits for TRS claims Account Number The destination account for which the bank raises direct debits for TRS claims ea ORACLE Payment amp Collection Product Category Specify the Payments and Collections PC product category that would be used by the bank to raise direct debits for TRS claims Suspense Account Specify the account that would be debited with the TRS amount to credit customer account For more details about processing for TRS refer the Loans module user manual and the Payments and Collections user manual 2 1 4 3 Viewing Trade License Details Expiry Advice Generation Days If the trade license is set to expire on a particular date the number displayed here denotes the number of days before that date when an advice is generated and sent to the customer informing about the impending expiration 2 1 4 4 Specifying Mandatory Limit Tracking For Customer Type You can maintain limit tracking as a mandatory option based on the customer type Corporate Check this box if it is mandatory to link customer of Corporate type to credit line Bank Check this box if it is mandatory to link customer of Bank type to credit line Individual Check this box if it is mandatory to link customer of Individual type to credit line If a contract is
180. e maintained at the product level for FT If the amount is more than the specified amount the system will not perform the Rate Variance validation Instead there will be an override to specify that the transaction amount is greater than the maximum amount for Rate Variance check For details about how limits are applied when a transaction is entered refer the chapter Processing a Funds Transfer in the Funds Transfer user manual 16 ORACLE 15 1 15 1 0 1 15 Maintaining Currency Spread for Customer Maintaining Customer Spread Details For a customer and currency pair you can maintain tenor wise spread details in the Customer Spread Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing CYDCUSPR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Customer Currency Spread Maintenance EiNew E3 Enter Query Branch Customer A Spread Definition Percentage Currency 1 az Currency 2 Customer Spread Details E Tenor Buy Spread Sale Spread a Input By Authorized By Modification Wi Authorized Date Time Date Time Nambe W Open In this screen for a customer and currency pair you can maintain buy and sell spreads for different tenors You need to maintain customer spreads in each branch Transactions initiated in a branch will pick up the spread s maintained for that branch Note Funds Tr
181. e of an account mask is a combination of alphabets and numbers where you can build the mask with components such as the Branch Code the Account Class the Currency Code a check digit etc e Numeric is anumeric type of account mask where the checksum algorithm associated with the account mask is either Modulo 11 Modulo 11 with weights or Modulo 97 e Pure Numeric is a numeric type of account mask which does not have a checksum algorithm associated with it If you are maintaining a pure numeric mask you have to identify the start and end account number which is to be associated with it Alphanumeric customer account masks The alphanumeric customer account mask can have a maximum of twenty alphanumeric characters It can comprise of one or more of the following elements in combination e Account Class Use ACLASS to indicate that the account class to which the account belongs should be part of the mask e CIF Number You can incorporate the nine character CIF code assigned to the customer into the mask To do so indicate CIF Number in the mask e Currency To add the currency of the customer account use CCY e To indicate an alphabet or number Each element used to define the mask would represent a single character To represent an alphabet of the English language indicate a To represent a number indicate n e Punctuation Marks When defining the customer account mask you have the opti
182. e required specification Linking Product Category with Customer Group You have the option of selecting and linking as many limit codes as required for each limit type from the product categories maintained in the system After you select the product category that is to be linked to the customer group you have to identify the limit code associated with the limit type and in turn link it with the customer group Given below is a sample of the Customer Group maintenance record The Main details of the record are as follows Customer Group AMLCUS01 Description AMLCUSTOMER GROUP 1 Next Review Date 10 FEB 2003 Risk Profile High The Product Category linkage details are as follows Product Describtio Online Individual Daily Monthly Online Catedo A P Limit Limit Limit Limit Daily gory Code Code Code Code Turnover PDT01 Product 1 LIM31 LIMO1 LIM11 LIM21 LIM41 PDT02 Product 2 LIM36 LIMO6 LIM16 LIM26 LIM46 Note Consequently while processing transactions for all customers linked to the Customer Group AMLCUS01 the system does an online verification of transaction limits based on the amount limits maintained for the limit code LIM31 linked to the product category PDT01 and LIM36 linked to the product category PDT02 respectively Itis mandatory for you to maintain a generic Customer Group called ALL for the cus tomers of your bank When produc
183. earing and Utility Payment Chapters under Oracle FLEXCUBE host module Maintaining General Details for Branch You can maintain the branch details regarding the local currency the parent branch regional office of the branch address details including telex BIC etc Local Currency Specify the currency of operation for your branch and the default currency for all transactions of your branch The income and expense balances of your branch will also be maintained in this currency Parent Branch Parent Branch is to define an alternate reporting line other than the three level HO RO Branch structure The Parent for all the branches you create is the HO code default To specify the Parent other than the HO select from the options displayed The name of the parent branch is displayed alongside Regional Office This is the branch code of the Head Office or Regional Office to which the branch whose code is input eg Branch Code reports For a Head Office or a Regional office this code should be the Head Office branch code which is also the default for this field For the branches specify that branch as the RO to which the branch reports Select from the list of options displayed Country Code Specify the code of the country in which the branch operates Select from the options provided in the pick list Customer Identity Specify the customer s identity During maintenance of payments amp collections periodic instruction
184. eceetteeeeeeenteeeeteeeaaeeeeteneaeeees 2 20 2 1 8 Maintaining FATCA Preference cccccecccieteeecetetnneeeeeeetnneeeeeeetnaeeeeenenaa 2 28 Ramadan Maintenance 2 c 2 22 e tncecuteteticsti bl tcncle ct teiesetente 3 1 3 14 Introduction nessa teenie AAN EE AEA E AANT U AA 3 1 3 2 Maintaining Ramadan Day esssseeeeseesirseeeerrrestirrrrttttrrrssttntntssttnrststtnnnasttennssttee n 3 1 Dealer Maintenance icc scacteds cent caveatdee deat ct beta oooh teenie ceaeetaerenenendbeee2 4 1 4 1 Deining Dear eea eE E hace habit eet Aabeivedl dal este EAA 4 1 Branch Parameters icc 2 c2ccscecnseteee tte eee ee 5 1 51 Creating Branches niensis d ardiren E ra E A Hadden bh a Tea EEA EN 5 1 LLL Systm Fonos share ea eaka ehai elags deste dating eevee 5 1 5 1 2 Creating Reporting Structure eesseeesrrresrerrrnrrrrrrennrrrrnrreeerrenrernnnnreeirennee 5 2 5 1 3 Basic Parameters for BraniCh cccccccccccececeentieeeeeennneeeeeeenneeeeeeeneeteenenaaes 5 2 5 1 4 Maintaining General Details for BranCh u cccscceccecteeeeeetteeeeeeeeneeeeeeennaes 5 4 5 1 5 Maintaining Financial Details for Branch cccccccsccceceeettteeeeeeentteeeeeeenaaes 5 7 5 1 6 Maintaining Duplication Check Details 0 0 cccccccceteeeeeetetteeeettnneeeenetae 5 12 5 1 7 Maintaining SWIFT Address for Branch ccccccccsceeeeeeeetnteeeeeeetnnteeeenenaae 5 13 9 1 8 Defining ACCOUNE MaSK rererere E EEEa 5 14 5 1 9 Maintaining Customer Number Range sssseeeeesss
185. ecimals specified and the rounding rule and rounding unit For Rounding Rule Up the amount available for transaction would be USD 100 35 For rounding rule Down the transaction amount would have been rounded down to 100 30 If the rounding rule was specified as truncate then the amount would have rounded off to 100 32 simply knock off all decimal points beyond the stated decimals places to be rounded off Thus whenever you specify a truncate option you need not state the Rounding unit Specifying Amount Format Mask Specify the format in which amounts in this currency are to be displayed for contracts in this currency Two options are available 999 999 999 9 999 999 99 The system defaults to the 999 999 999 format Euro Type When maintaining a currency in the Currency Definition screen you have to specify the type of the currency with relation to transition phase of the European Economic and Monetary Union EMU You can do this in the Euro Type field Your specifications in this field enable you to handle the first phase of the EMU which commenced on 01 January 1999 For more details on the manner in which Oracle FLEXCUBE handles the Euro refer the chapter Handling the Euro By choosing the appropriate option you can indicate if the currency is e The Euro e An In currency e An Out currency 10 7 ORACLE 10 2 3 10 2 4 e Euro Closed Na
186. edit posted under this code would reinstate the status of an account from dormant to active and accounting activity shall be considered Cheque Mandatory If for a transaction code you check Cheque Mandatory then for all transactions posted under this code transaction will take place through cheque For example Incoming Clearing transfer Cheque Mandatory should be checked only for SB cheque withdrawals and Cash Account Cheque withdrawals Available Balance Check Required Select this option if you want the system to check for the availability of funds before posting a debit entry to a customer account The system will check for the available balance in all customer accounts associated with the Transaction Code for which the option is enabled If the available balance check fails i e if the system detects insufficient funds in the customer account it will display a warning message Note However the system will check for the available balance only if you have selected the Available Balance Check required option for both the transaction code associated with the accounting entry and the Customer Account Class to which the customer s account that is being debited belongs The check will not be performed if the option is not selected in both places VS ORACLE Interest and Charges Penalty Inclusion In the transaction code that you use for debit entries to time deposit accounts you must indicate the computation
187. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeees 19 1 TO Ta INTROGUCHON ccstacse eceates detect asides etic area a A ae aile 19 1 Maintaining Branch Holidays ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 20 1 2021 rode O eeoa A a hid ecka cad NE bd gegeng atin chad lanegeete 20 1 20 2 Invoking Local Holiday Screen 0 eeecceceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeenenaes 20 1 20 2 1 Steps to Define Yearly Holidays ccccccescteeecetntneeeeeeentteeeeeeentaeeeeeeeaaes 20 2 20 2 2 De PfINING HOlAAYS cccccceecetceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeteeeaaeeeeseneaaeeeetenaaeenees 20 3 20 23 Annual Holidays ienris a a eii AEEA SE E ARER EEA 20 3 20 2 4 Designating Unexpected Holidays for Branch cscccccscseeeeeeeetteteeeeenaes 20 3 Maintaining Currency Holidays cceeeeeeeee eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeene 21 1 Qe aaa a a e g PEEP E PEE EAE E TE E E E ET 21 1 21 2 Invoking Currency Holiday Screen sssssesessssesrrrsseerrssseirrssstttrrsttttnnssstternsstennnne 21 1 21 2 1 Steps to Define Currency HOlidayS cccccccccceceeeeettteeeeettnnneeeeeeenaeeeenenaa 21 2 21 2 2 Defining Currency Holidays sssrressssrinnnsnnnnnsnnrrnnnenennnnnnnrnrnnreernnnnnnnnna 21 2 21 Uploading Holiday File iea eA NAA EEA E EARRA 21 2 Maintaining Clearing Holidays sssssnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 22 1 221 IPO CUCTION a eaea nate gan seat best a aa aii shee bated a 22 1 22 1 1 Steps
188. eeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenennneneees 16 1 1621 UntrodUGtlOn saivcties etter tee nts a a al haiti lent atte 16 1 16 2 Invoking Period Code Maintenance Screen eeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaas 16 1 16 3 System FUNCHONS ceili ted ven E AAA A AN aie 16 3 Status Code Maintenance cccccccccessssseeeeeeeseseneeeeeeeeessneeeeeeesesessneeeees 17 1 TL IMtrOduCHON 25346038 atet inti Aaadia ated chain idee tL alae Be oes 17 1 17 2 Invoking Status Maintenance Screen cece eeeeeeeeeeeetneeeeeetiteeeeeetiaeeeerenee 17 1 17 2 1 Maintaining Status Codes for Contracts 0000 ccccccectceeeeeeeeeeneeeeetenneetees 17 2 17 2 2 Maintaining Status Codes for OD ACCOUNL cccccceesseeeeteentteteeteeeeeeees 17 3 17 3 Maintaining Dormancy Parameter Details ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaees 17 3 17 4 Maintaining CR DR Statistics Details 2 0 0 eeceeee eee eeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeetneeeeeee 17 5 Transaction Code Maintenance cccceeeeeeesesseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeenes 18 1 TST ORUC Oen ites ss cnet AET ERATE AR teat nied tee 18 1 18 2 Invoking Transaction Code Screen ceccecececeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeieeeeeeeneeeerenea 18 1 18 2 1 Maintaining Transaction Details 0 cccccccecccteceeeeeeeeeeneeeeteeeeeeeeteeaetees 18 2 18 2 2 Maintaining Country Name Details ccccccccceeeectteteeeeeeetnneeeeeetnneeeeenens 18 8 Account Revaluation Maintenance ccccccccccceeee
189. eeensnseernnnneeernnreesrnnnne 5 15 5 1 10 Maintaining Global Interdict Functions ssseeeeeseeeieeneneeeenneeernenneeeeennne 5 17 5 1 11 Maintaining ProferontOS isssssesisrrinieiiiiida ienien iiarioonns dakais daien iit ariaa in 5 18 5 1 12 Maintaining LCY Message Preference for Branch u cscsecceeesetteeeeeeenee 5 25 9 1 13 Specifying UDF Detal S reirse rea e eraa a da a i 5 26 52 Maintaining T C ydo AT he O ad oa 5 26 9 2 1 Updating Tax Cy Cle rener AE E E AA 5 27 522 Maintaining fax secs acted een ieee A AT E aF 5 27 5 2 3 Maintaining Clearing Currencies 0 ceccceccceceeeeeeeennneeeeeetnnneeeeeetnaeeeeenenae 5 29 5 2 4 Account Statement Handof c cccccceceeeeeeeeneneee eee tnneeeeeeeeneeeeeetaaeeeeeneae 5 29 5 2 5 Account Statement Generation eesrreersirrrrrrerrennerrinenreerrnnnrrrannneeernnane 5 29 5 3 Maintaining Role to Head Mapping at Branch Level cc cceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeneaes 5 30 10 11 12 5 3 1 Viewing Accounting Role to Head Mapping Details ceee 5 31 Account Branch Transfer sseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeseessseeceeeneeees 6 1 GT MNtrOGUCHION caniae E A E edigenasaucaceeus EA eeanadanena ys 6 1 6 2 Maintaining Branch Transfer Parameters ccccccceeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeteeeneeeeeeeenaeeees 6 1 6 3 Transferring Customer Account Branch cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeneeeeeeteeaees 6 2 6 3 1 Viewing Account
190. eees 35 21 35 14 1 Contents of Report 202 22 1ccccccccceeeeccnenneceeecececeeeeteeteseeeaaenanesteeseeseteteees 35 21 35 15 Customer Details Report cccccccceceeeeeeeeceeeccaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeecncnaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 35 22 35 15 11 Cont nts of Repor eors bike ri naa aa aoada iin daia eaa Tei 35 23 35 16 Customer Accounts Report ccccccceceeeeeeeeeecenaeeeeeeeeeeeeeesececencaceseeeeeeeeeeetens 35 27 35 16 1 Contents Of R p S e o aa a ea E 35 28 35 17 Document Check List Report cccececeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecceaeaaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 35 30 35 17 1 Contents Of the REPO e a aa EA Oa aA ON 35 32 35 18 Memo Revaluation ReEport ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececaaeeeeeeeeeereeeeeenenas 35 33 35 18 1 Contents of Report 2 1 cccccccccceeeeeeeeneecaeceeeeeeeeeteesescenieaasaeseetesenerteeteees 35 33 35 19 Black Listed During Contract Booking Report sessesssssssiresesrrssserrrrsserrrrssrrenssss 35 34 35 19 1 Contents of the REPOST cccceceeeneeeneceeeeeeeeeeeeseetecneeesaeeeseeseeeeeettees 35 35 35 20 Black List Report During File Upload Report cccceeeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 35 36 35 20 1 Contents of the REPOST cccceceeeeeecneceeeeeeeeeeeeteseeensennecaneeeeeeeeeetettees 35 36 35 21 Cheque Book Issued Report c ccecceceeceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceaeaaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenes 35 37 35 21 1 Contents of the REPOST
191. een This set of holidays is maintained at the bank level by the Head Office You can invoke this screen by typing STDCLHOL in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Clearing House Holiday Maintenance E New Enter Query January February March August September October November December Clearing House Holiday Details Input By Authorized By Modification Wi Authorized Date Time Date Time Number Open In this screen you maintain a list of holidays of the Clearing House with which your bank is associated with Steps to Define Clearing House Holidays To define Clearing House holidays for a year for instance for 2000 you have to do the following Building the calendar for the year ee ORACLE Step 1 Click new icon Step 2 Enter the year 2000 or move to the year 2000 using the arrows Step 3 To build the calendar for the year 2000 click the Refresh button This button is called the refresh build up button because it builds the calendar for you Please note Your clearing house can be identified with the name SYS given to it by the Oracle FLEXCUBE system This is displayed in the field Clearing House Saturdays and Sundays are marked as weekly holidays for the Clearing House This is the default setting of the system For identification the work
192. een To invoke this screen type STDPJMNT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button zA ORACLE The screen is as shown below Project Details and Maintenance E New amp Enter Query Project Details Customer Number Project ID Project Name Project Account Branch Project Account Liability No Project Value Remarks 7 Ratio Change Allowed F JV Limit Tracking Required MA Milestones Venture Details PPC Limits Non PPC Limits Sponsor 1 0f1 a Sponsor ID Sponsor Name Sponsor Maker Checker Date Time Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status 33 3 1 Specifying the Project Details Customer Number Specify the customer number Project ID Specify the project identification number Project Name Specify the name of the project Project Account Branch Specify the project account branch details Project Account Specify the project account details Liability ID Specify the liability ID Project Value Specify the value of the project 33 5 Branch Code Currency Number Of PPCs Default PPC Clearance Days Start Date End Date Sponsor Retention Margin Bank Margin Consultant 1 Of 1 o Consultant ID J Auto Line Creation for PPC J Limit Track Required through Commitment Consultant Name ORACLE Consulta Remarks Specify remarks if any Ratio
193. ef description about the project Address Specify the address of the project location Status Specify the status of the project 32 4 ORACLE 32 4 1 Developer Code Specify the unique code of the developer The adjoining option list displays all valid codes maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Unit Details Specify the following details Unit ID Specify the unit ID of the developer project Unit Holder Name Specify the name of the unit holder of the developer project Viewing UDF Details You can view the UDF details by clicking Fields button in the Developer Project Maintenance screen User Defined Fields Field Name Value Description Here you can specify values for the UDF e278 ORACLE 32 5 Viewing Developer Project Maintenance Summary You can view the summary of developer project maintenance in the Developer Project Maintenance Summary screen You can invoke this screen by typing CSSDEVPR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button C advanced Search Reset Authorization Status Record Status Developer Code Project Name Records per page 15 v 10f1 Authorization Status Record Status Developer Code ProjectName Project Description Address In this screen you can query based on any combination of the following
194. efined fields refer chapter Creating custom fields in Oracle FLEXCUBE in the User Defined Fields User Manual under Modularity Specifying Account Generation Parameters at Bank Level Account numbers in your bank are generated in the format of the account mask that you specify through the Account Parameters sub screen of the Bank wide Parameters screen Click Account Mask button in the Bank wide Parameters screen Account Parameters screen is displayed The screen appears as shown below Account Mask Parameters Customer Account Mask Checksum Algorithm User Defined Algorithm Customer Account az Consumer Number az Start Account Number End Account Number Customer Account Auto Generate l Loan Account Auto Generate Auto Account Creation Start Account Number End Account Number at ORACLE Note Since account level parameters are defined at the bank level by default these parameters will be defaulted to all the branches of your bank However individual branches of your bank will be allowed to change these specifications 2 1 6 1 Specifying Customer Account Mask Account numbers can either be generated automatically or you can choose to allocate them manually In Oracle FLEXCUBE you have the option of maintaining three types of account masks They are as follows e Alphanumeric this typ
195. eld indicates your preferences regarding transactions booked against this transaction code The preferences marked relate to the following Interest and Charges Transaction Count Every debit or credit entry is passed under a transaction code If for a transaction code you have checked I amp C transaction count then all entries made under that code would be picked up by the system as chargeable transaction counts which would be used by the I amp C system to compute charges Therefore you should take care not to check for all bank induced transactions like service charges interest payment calculation brokerage and charges etc For example your bank has a policy of limiting savings withdrawals without additional charges to only 8 in a month Beyond which all withdrawals would be charged For the ninth and onward withdrawals in the month from any account the system will maintain a count for computing charges However care should be taken to exclude all bank induced transactions from the count Interest and Charges Turnover inclusion Every debit or credit entry is passed under a transaction code If for a transaction code you have checked I amp C turnover inclusion then the debit turnover credit turnover balance under that code would be picked up by the system as chargeable depending upon the option specified in the I amp C module Therefore you should take care not to check for all bank induced transactions like service charg
196. en Type Specify the limit type for which you want to maintain values Description Specify the description for the limit type you are maintaining 19720 ORACLE 10 4 9 Values The values for the limit type that you are maintaining can be listed here To add a value to the list of values click on the Add icon and type the value To remove a value from the list of values check the box against that value and click on the Delete icon Value Specify the list of supported values For example MAIL COURIER BRANCH and so on Code Specify the codes for the list of value For example CO ML and so on Maintaining Transaction Limits This section explains in detail about maintaining transaction limits level of authorisations required for the transaction amounts and minimum user authorisation limit required for a transaction Oracle FLEXCUBE offers you a facility whereby each time a particular transaction processed in the system exceeds a certain limit an override will be generated by the system You can maintain transactional limits for a module and product combination through the Product Transactional Limits Maintenance screen Invoke this screen by typing CSDPLMNT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button The screen appears as shown below gt Product Transaction Limits Maintenance E New E3 Enter Query Module Identification Sou
197. en from where you invoked the authorization function Click Exit button to exit and return to the Application Browser ice ORACLE 8 1 8 Web Service Maintenance Introduction 8 2 Oracle FLEXCUBE supports a generic functionality to call external web services The operations done on the screens have the information of web services The request processed during the operations is analyzed and the web service is enabled This chapter takes you through the WebService Maintenance WebService Mapping and other details regarding WebService Maintaining Web Service You can maintain Web service through WebService Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing CSDEXTWS in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Webservice Maintainance E New E3 Enter Query WebService Code WebService Server IP WebService Description WebService Server Port WebService User WebService Server URI WebService Password EMSs Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status Specify the following here WebService Code The unique code for the web service s defaulted here WebService Description The description of the web service is displayed here WebService User The system displays the user of the web service WebService Password The system displays the password with which the web service is invoked WebService
198. enter the details of the journal entry in the Journal Entry screen According to the requirements of your bank indicate your option Error Override or Ignore for the error code DEBATBAL 1 Depending on your selection in the Overrides Maintenance screen for the error code DEBATBAL 1 system will either display an error message or an override message or will just ignore your selection for the option Balancing In the Overrides Maintenance screen if you have indicated the Type as Error and if you don t opt for Balancing system will display an error message as The batch is not balanced and Balancing is automatically checked In other words it is mandatory to opt for balancing This is to ensure that all batches that are opened to post entries are balanced If you have indicated the Type as Override and you haven t checked the option Balancing system will display an override message as The batch is not balanced Do you want to proceed Yes No an ORACLE You can proceed to enter the details of the journal transaction if you select Yes If you have opted for Ignore in the Error Codes Maintenance screen irrespective of whether you opt for balancing of batches or not system will allow you enter the details of the journal transaction in the Journal Entry screen system will not display an error message or an override Aea ORACLE 25 1
199. ept transactions for the day and if the status is No then it indicates that the transactions will be accepted but it will be in effect only from the next business day Accordingly accounting entries will be passed checking the following for tanking branch transactions e The Branch Available Status e The Branch date and host date i e entries will be tanked if branch date is ahead of host date When the Branch Available status is NO or if branch date is ahead of host date then the transactions will be tanked These transactions will be untanked by the BOD program which runs post date change i e POSTDTCH ar ORACLE The branch available status can be changed from Yes to No in two ways e Auto Atthe start of EOTI if the branch available status is not No At the start of ICEOD if the branch available status is not No Atthe start of EOFI if the branch available status is not No Drop of End of Transaction Input System Date Change e Manual Manual Scheduling and Execution as EOD batch IC EOD Process The account resolution during IC EOD process excludes accounts that are with account creation status as Tanked Drop End of Transaction Input EOTI If the branch is not available during the Drop End Of Transaction Input system automatically resets the Branch available status to Yes Also all the tanked transactions and accounting entries are released All t
200. er for Account Activity Acumen Transaction Code Exempt Advance Interest Interest and Charges m Balance Inclusion Escrow Processing Consider For Turnover C Available Balance Update Limit Through PPC Consider For Cover Account Fields Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status If you indicate that AML tracking is required for transactions linked to the transaction code you have to identify the product category with which the transaction code is to be linked Consequently the system does a check for every accounting entry passed during online processing The system checks the transaction amount of the entry with the transaction online limit maintained for the specific customer group of the customer to whose account the entry has been posted and the product category for the transaction code of the entry If the system finds that the limit amount has been exceed an override message informing you of the same will be displayed During the End of Day EOD processing the system identifies all accounting entries posted during the day which have been marked for AML monitoring and verifies the individual amount limit for the customer group and product category combination and stores this data in the system You will be able to view this data when you generate an AML report using Business Objects abt ORACLE As part of the EOD processes the system also updates the daily t
201. ers screen You have to maintain a common Conversion GL and a Transaction Code that identifies redenomination entries The screen is as shown below Branch Parameters Maintenance New Branch Code Branch Name o Branch Available Status EBB Finci Details Duplication Check Details Parent Branch Description Time Zone Offset Regional office Description Hours Country Code Description Minutes Customer Identity Description a Ahead Local Currency Description Time Level GL Class o Fund Branch o Allow Corporate Access EOC Status External Value ATM Details Cutoff Offset Time Local Payments ATM Branch Hours Clearing Branch Institution Id Minutes Inter Branch Transaction Code z Customer Transfer Address BIC Branch Address Line 1 Telex Branch Address Line 2 Host Name Branch Address Line 3 SWIFT Address CIF Range Global Interdict Functions Branch Currency Maker Date Time Mod No Checker Record Status Date Time Authorization Status 10 4 2 1 Indicating Euro Redenomination General Ledger Conversion GL The conversion GL that you specify will be identified as the common Suspense GL for all balance conversions while re denominating the currency of an account either for specific customers or for generic conversions Transaction Code In addition to the conversion GL you have to indicate a Transaction Code which identifies conversion related entries 10 4 3 Implications of Currency Redenom
202. es interest payment calculation brokerage and charges etc 14 ORACLE Interest and Charges Balance Inclusion Check this box to indicate that the transactions posted under this code should be considered for the purpose of computation of Remuneration Interest By default this option is checked Uncheck this box for such loan transactions or any other transactions for which you wish to exclude computation of remuneration interest Note Once the transaction code is authorized you cannot change your preference Consider for Turnover Limit Check this box to indicate that all transactions posted under this code should be considered as part of the turnover limit processing Consider for Cover Account Check this box to consider easy saver processing using cover accounts for transaction Only if you check this box the system will consider the transactions with transaction code for processing The above field is applicable only for clearing and teller modules Oracle FLEXCUBE repays loan from multiple accounts In Oracle FLEXCUBE the loan account is the primary account and all the other accounts linked to it are cover accounts While paying the settlement if the primary account has insufficient amount the system will check the cover accounts for the remaining amount according to the preference Consider for Account activity If you check the field Consider for A C activity for a transaction code then any debit or cr
203. essage stating so and ask the user for an override For any schedule or contract maturing at a future date say 5 years hence you can input the future date only if the calendar for that year has been maintained The currency holiday screen is maintained at the Bank Level by the Head Office Invoking Currency Holiday Screen You can invoke this screen by typing STDCCHOL in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Currency Holiday Calendar Maintenance ENew E3 Enter Query January October Currency Code Currency Holidays Currency February August November Year Holiday List March September December Input By Date Time Authorized By Date Time Modification Number Wi Authorized W Open ORACLE 21 2 1 21 2 2 21 3 In this screen you can maintain a list of holidays for each of the currencies maintained in the currency screen for any year between 1 AD and 4000 AD Steps to Define Currency Holidays To define currency holidays for a year for instance for 2000 you have to do the following Building the calendar for the year Step 1 Select new from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon A blank screen appears and the cursor moves to the field Year Step 2 Enter the year 2000 or move t
204. etails which are available in between dates From Date Specify the From date 37g ORACLE 35 12 1 To Date Specify the To date Contents of Report Header The Header carries the title of the Report information on the branch code the branch date the user ID the module name the date and time at which the report was generated and the page number of the report Body of the report The details of the uncollected funds that would be displayed in the report are as follows Field Name Field Description Account This is the account for which transaction details is being reported Available Date This indicates the available date Transaction Ref This is the reference number of the transaction for which erence account has uncollected balance Amount This is the uncollected amount in the account Total Amount This is the total uncollected amount in the account 35 13 Account Revaluation Report This report gives details of the memo revaluation funds You can invoke this screen by typing ACRREVAL in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Account Revaluation Report Memo Normal ReportFormat PDF PrinterAt Client v Report Output Print v Printer Memo or Normal Specify the type of account revaluation report Soia ORACLE 35 13 1 Contents of Report Header The Header carries the title of the Repo
205. etion should be 100 PPC end date is different from ST PROJ 031 PPC End Date is different PPC start date PPC clearance from Project Start Date days Configurable override PPC Clearance days 34 2 ORACLE 35 Reports 35 1 Introduction You can generate the following reports e List of deleted transactions e Accounting journal e Cash flow report e Balances of future dated transactions e Current Rates Report e Account Opening Confirmation e Account Closing Confirmation e Activity Journal Report e Core Exception Report 35 2 List of Deleted Transactions This report lists out the deleted transaction details pertaining to each product under each module pertaining to every user You can invoke this screen by typing ACRDLTXN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Deleted Transactions Listing o Modute transactions Single All All This Branch a Posted to Other Branch This Branch acted as Bridge Products Print Copies Single All m Single All Batch From To EE Report Format PDF Printer At Client Report Output Print Printer a pow fen Specify the following details Module Indicate whether the reports should be generated for a single module or for all modules If you choose Single you need to specify the module for which the report needs to be generated The option list prov
206. ever you can opt to additionally furnish the value of the component in Euro Related Information ERI currency You can maintain this ERI currency for a counterparty and currency combination in the Settlement Instructions Maintenance screen In the SWIFT messages that are generated towards settlement of a component involving the counterparty and the currency the component value will be expressed in this ERI currency by default Invoke this screen by typing ISDINSTN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button The screen is as shown below Settlement instructions Maintenance E New amp Enter Query Counterparty Module Counterparty Name Product Code Counterparty CIF Sequence Number Currency Relations Branch Receive Cover Required Branch Branch Cover By Currency Currency Charges Details Ourselves Account Account Beneficiary Description Description Shared Payment By Payment By J Pay Parties Receiver Parties Cover Parties Clear Details Cover Details Other Details intermediary Reimbursement Institution Intermediary Country Country intermediary Rtgs Payment RTGS Network Maker Date Time Mod No Checker Record Status Date Time Authorization Status 10 18 ORACLE 10 4 5 10 4 6 10 4 7 Specifying Settlement Message Details SWIFT messages MT 100 MT202 generated towards settlement can furnish the value of the
207. exceed this number Numeric Account Masks with Modulo 11 and Modulo 97 as Checksum Algorithms A numeric type of mask can have a maximum of twenty numeric characters inclusive of the checksum algorithm If you associate Modulo 11 as the checksum algorithm a single character D will be appended to the numeric mask Let us assume that you have an account mask with five numeric values nnnnn and associated Modulo 11 as the checksum algorithm The system automatically appends D to the numeric mask The generated account numbers will have the following format nnnnnD If the Account mask is Alphanumeric and check sum digit is needed as per Modulo 11 then the check digit d has to be manually specified in the mask For example if you need an account mask as bbbCCCCCCSS then considering Modulo 11 check sum digit you need to input the mask as bbbCCCCCCSSd alo ORACLE Similarly if you associate Modulo 97 with an account mask of five numeric values the system appends a double digit value of DD to the mask The generated accounts will have the following format nnnnnDD Note As system automatically appends DD in case of Modulo 97 if you input the customer mask with DD system will display the error message as Cannot have D denoting Alphanumeric Characters if you input dd in the mask then system displays the error message as Cannot have d denoting Alphanumeric Characters in account mask while
208. exure B File Formats contains a list of file formats Chapter 31 Anti Money Laundering Reporting explains the process of guarding P against money laundering a facility provided by Oracle FLEXCUBE Developer and Developer Project Maintenance explains how you can Chapter 32 age maintain details of the real estate developer and developer projects Project Financing explains the process of maintaining the project Chapter 33 finance transaction in a bank using the Project Detail and Mainte nance screen Error and Error Codes for Project Financing lists all the error mes Chapter 34 sages that you can encounter while working with this module Chapter 35 Reports explains the procedure of generating Reports Chapter 36 Function ID Glossary has alphabetical listing of Function Screen ID s used in the module with page references for quick navigation Related Documents e The Procedures User Manual e The Settlements User Manual Glossary of Icons This User Manual may refer to all or some of the following icons Icons Function J Exit Add row Delete row ay Option List ta ORACLE 2 1 2 Bank Parameters Defining Bank Level Parameters 2 1 0 1 In the Bank Wide Parameters screen you maintain basic information about your bank such as its name head office account number structure local currency and so on The details that you maintain in this s
209. f identification numbers CIF Number for customers of your bank During customer information maintenance the system will automatically generate the CIF numbers based on the mask you define here and the customer number range maintained at the branch level A CIF mask consists of a maximum of 9 digits The CIF mask could have only numbers or could be alpha numeric or could also have the branch code as a part of it For instance you can maintain the CIF Mask as bbbnnnnnn where bbb represents a three digit branch code and nnnnnn represents a 6 digit number GL Mask You can indicate a mask for the general ledgers that are maintained for your bank The mask that you define here will be enforced whenever a General Ledger is created in the Chart of Accounts screen A GL mask can consist of a maximum of nine alphanumeric characters It can be built using a combination of numbers and letters to indicate for instance the category of the GL asset liability etc the GLs hierarchical position and so on Each element used to define the mask would represent a single character To represent an alphabet of the English language indicate a To represent a number indicate n The last character would be a D or d which indicates a check digit generated by the system Fora numeric check digit define it as d for an alphanumeric check digit define it as D You may use any of the following punctuation in the GL mask
210. fy the Settlement Days as 2 This implies that two working days prior to the settlement of a component through a USD account a settlement message will be automatically generated if specified when you run the Settlement Messages function at the end of day The settlement details of a contract are as follows Settlement Date 06 May 1999 Settlement Account Currency USD Component Principal Settlement Message Yes Component Currency GBP When you generate the Settlement Messages function at the end of day on 04 May 1999 a settlement message for the Principal component of the contract will be generated You can run Settlement Messages function as part of EOD operations from the Application Browser to automatically generate settlement messages for contracts marked out for automatic liquidation The settlement day specification for a currency will determine the contracts that are picked up for settlement message generation Cut off Time The Currency Cut off time refers to the time by which all transactions involving a currency should be generated For a currency you can indicate the cut off hour and minute This time should be expressed in the local time of the bank 10 3 ORACLE The maintenance of a cut off time for a currency has particular reference to outgoing funds transfers involving it Cut off days You can also specify the cut off days and time for payment transactions involving the currency For ex
211. g customer or the beneficiary customer belongs to that country EU Member This indicates whether the country is recognized by Swift as a part of the Intra European countries If you check this flag the instructed amount field should be mandatory in the generated 103 103 and 102 messages The instructed amount field is mandatory in the incoming messages Clearing Code in BIC Check this box to indicate that the National ID in the BIC plus file is the clearing code During upload of clearing codes from BIC plus file the records that belong to countries against which this box is checked will be selected Generate 205 Check this box to indicate that the cover message 205COV or 205 need to be generated for transactions involving this country If you do not select this option RTGS 202 or 202COV message will be generated For more details on 202COV and 205COV cover message formats refer settlements user manual Default Clearing Network Once the National ID from BIC plus directory is uploaded into clearing codes the network will be populated as the default clearing network for that country This is mandatory when clearing code in BIC is chosen as Y International Dialling Code Specify the international dialing code associated with the country ay ORACLE 19 1 19 Account Revaluation Maintenance Introduction Account revaluation is a process by which the LCY equivalent of balances in the FCY accounts is marked t
212. g drop down list Maintaining Clearing Currencies You can maintain a list of currencies in which clearing transactions can be processed under a branch In order to achieve this you need to invoke the Clearing Currency screen by clicking the Branch Currency button in the Branch Parameters Detail View screen Branch Parameters Clearing Currency Branch Description Clearing Currencies 10f1 E Currency Code Currency Description g Here you can capture the following details Branch Code The branch code gets defaulted from the Branch Parameters Detail View screen A brief description of the branch is displayed alongside Currency Code Specify the currency in which you wish to allow clearing transactions under this branch You can specify multiple currencies for a branch Click on the adjoining option list and select the appropriate code from the list of currencies maintained in the system Currency Description A description of the chosen currency code is displayed here Account Statement Handoff The account statement handoff will consider the movements on accounts based on the Statement Date and not the Transaction Date The Statement Status Change will itself run the Account Statement handoff for the previous working date before marking the Branch Statement Status as ready Account Statement Generation Accounting entries with Statement Date lying between From Date and To Date popu
213. generated based on the following account mask bbbTZCCCCCCSd Where e bbb is the branch code e T indicates the account code e Z is the currency type e CCCCCC is the CIF number of the customer e S is the sequence number for a combination of account code currency type and customer e d is the control number generated by Modulo 11 with Weights algorithm explained earlier To recall the sequence number that is automatically generated by the system is for an account code currency type customer combination The sequence number is a single digit number from 1 to 9 This means that for the same combination you will be allowed to maintain only nine accounts To eliminate this limitation and to allow maintenance of more than nine accounts for the same combination the dummy customer number range will be utilized This is explained with the help of an example For example Assume that you have maintained the following CIF range for your branch Start CIF No 100000 End CIF No 198999 Start Dummy No 199000 10 ORACLE 5 1 10 End Dummy No 199999 Ms Jennifer approaches your bank to open a savings account in your branch branch code is 000 Further the CIF and account number masks maintained for the branch are bbbnnnnnn and bbbTZCCCCCCSd respectively As per the CIF mask Ms Jennifer is assigned the CIF number 000123456 According
214. gger the status change event along with accounting entry posting However if the Status Processing is at CIF Group level individual module LC Cl MO CA IA and BC batches will be updating common storage with the derived status of each contract and CIF Group level status will be triggered by the common status change batch The common status change batch will call the individual module function for status change processing 2 ORACLE For details about loan status processing and provisioning consult the Loans user manual and the Core Entities user manual Provisioning Frequency Provision processing depends upon status processing for accounts and contracts The provisioning batch process executes after the status processing batch If status processing is indicated to be processed at group CIF level you can indicate the frequency at which the provisioning batch is to be executed for your branch The frequency options available are daily and monthly For details about loan status processing and provisioning consult the Loans user manual and the Core Entities user manual Withdrawable Uncollected Funds Basis You can define how the System enforces the allowable amount of uncollected funds on an account that can be withdrawn within a business day For each customer account you designate a limit on the amount of uncollected funds that can be withdrawn the Uncollected Funds Limit You can also indicate whether for a given busine
215. hat are maintained in the selected transaction branch You can choose the appropriate one No Debit Check this box to indicate that no debits should be posted to the selected customer account No Credit Check this box to indicate that no credits should be posted to the selected customer account Posting Allowed Check this box to indicate that the account class being created is to be used while creating IRA monetary accounts Monetary accounts used for IRA need to be distinguished from the other accounts in Oracle FLEXCUBE so that these accounts do not come up for posting in the other Oracle FLEXCUBE screens Remarks Specify the remarks if any 126 ORACLE 18 1 18 2 18 Transaction Code Maintenance Introduction In the Transaction Codes Maintenance screen you define transaction codes to representing various types of transactions for example transfer charges incoming mail transfer incoming telex transfer reserve incoming clearing transfer etc All similar transactions can be grouped under a common transaction code with a description This description will be printed on the account statements reports and advices generated For a transaction type you also maintain other related processing details which will be applicable to all transactions posted under a common code Details about availability of funds for liability checking SWIFT code for the transaction type preferences regarding charges to be levied
216. hat the customer account number should contain the value of a UDF Create a new user defined field Link it to the Function Id STDCIF Specify the value of the user defined field at the time of creating a customer Gr oh ONS Specify the UDF whose value has to be included in the customer account number to the Oracle FLEXCUBE implementer The implementer will indicate this at the back end Maintaining Ten Digit Masks with Running Sequence Numbers You can maintain a 10 digit mask of any combination wherein the last two digits will necessarily be a running sequence number This number will be automatically generated by the system For instance if you want to maintain a mask for the customer number and currency combination followed by the two digit running number you will have to maintain the mask as CCCCC SS Here CCCCC stands for the customer number stands for the currency of the account and SS stands for the running number The system will generate the last two digit number in a continuous sequence irrespective of the combination that you specify in the mask For example let us assume that you want the customer account number to be a combination of the customer number and the account currency followed by the serial number To achieve this you have to specify the mask as CCCCC SS Based on this mask for a customer with CIF ID 40207 with account in USD the account number will be 40207USD071 If the same customer has another account
217. he Product Preferences The system is also capable of processing incoming MT 103 messages in the MT 103 format During the upload process the system considers an MT 103 payment message to be of MT 103 Format based on the presence of the STP code in the 119 field Field 119 is present in the third block of the message i e 3 119 STP ORACLE 5 1 5 4 5 1 5 5 Branch Code for Clearing Indicate the code that identifies your branch in the Clearing Network The code you specify for your branch should be the same as that defined in the Clearing Bank Code Maintenance screen Clearing Through Branch If clearing transactions involving your branch are routed through another branch specify the Oracle FLEXCUBE branch code of that branch in this field On the basis of the Routing Number Mask defined for your bank and your specifications in this screen Oracle FLEXCUBE automatically generates the Routing Number for clearing transactions involving your branch in the Routing Number field Loan Direct Debit Generation Days Loan DD Generation days specifies the number of days before the schedule payment date when a Direct Debit Contract is generated for the schedule due This is applicable only for Loan Contracts in the local currency In order to facilitate the processing of loan repayments by customers who have their current or settlement accounts in some other bank of the clearing network you can initiate Direct Debits to thes
218. hing other than N or T in the first position If the cheque numbering scheme is Automatic and checksum algorithm is selected at bank parameter the cheque mask cannot be defined as alpha numeric The system validates if the cheque mask is alphanumeric and inventory is enabled at bank parameter The system displays an appropriate error message as Alpha numeric Cheque number is not supported as Inventory tracking is enabled Checksum Algorithm If you choose the automatic generation option you can indicate the algorithm based on which the cheque digit should be generated A cheque number consists of three components zs ORACLE 2 1 4 2 e A check digit e A cheque type e A running serial number 7 10001 Check hraa Senal digit Check Number Type You have the option to choose the algorithm to be used to arrive at the check digit Currently Oracle FLEXCUBE supports only the Modulo 7 algorithm Based on this algorithm the check type and serial number is divided by seven and the remainder is taken to be the check digit If the remainder is zero then the check digit is set to seven The cheque type indicates whether the cheque is a Euro or Commercial cheque The numeral 1 before a cheque serial indicates a Euro cheque and 2 indicates a Commercial cheque The cheque serial number is generated sequentially starting from 0001 This running serial number is assigned taking into account the last check number issued for the
219. his corresponds to LLLLL CCCCCCCnD All customer accounts entered in any branch of your bank would now comprise of these elements in the order defined in the mask A customer with CIF number 10005 has opened his first USD savings account with your bank and the Account class for savings accounts is INDSB His account number would read INDSB USD 10005 1 D Similarly the second GBP current account of a corporate customer with CIF Number 20005 would read CUCOR GBP 20005 2 D CUCOR being the account class representing current accounts of corporate customers anig ORACLE Characters Supported for Various Fields in Account Mask Field Mask character open Account class code L 6 Account code T 4 Currency code 3 Currency type Z 3 Customer number C 9 Branch code b 3 Serial Number S Numeric value user n to input Alphabet value user a to input UDF U s Note You must specify the mask character in the same case as mentioned above Field Case 1 Case 2 Case3 Case4 CIF number 015005624 015005624 015005624 015005624 Currency GBP GBP GBP YUV code Currency O O O YA1 type Account SAVINV CACIN 123456 SAVINV class Account SA12 SA12 8909 SA12 code Branch code 014 015 015 015 NA Chk sum Generated Mask maintained Booked against Algorithm Account Number LLLLLL CCCC Case 1 Modulo 11
220. his is the instrument number linked to the transaction Auth ID This is the authorization ID Total Debits Total amount debited under the respective user product and module Total Credits Total amount credited under the respective user product and module User ID This is the user ID of the user who entered the transac tion Grand Total Debits This is the grand total amount of all the debit transaction grouped by transaction code and user Grand Total Credits This is the grand total amount of all the credit transaction grouped by transaction code and user Saa ORACLE 35 3 Accounting Journal This report gives details of every journal entry transaction You can invoke this screen by typing ACRJRNAL in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Accounting Journal Module Transactions Single All All This Branch Posted to Other Branch This Branch acted as Bridge Products Print Copies Single m Position Entries All Report Date E gt Single All From To Report Format Printer At Client Report Output Printer Specify the following details Module Indicate whether the reports should be generated for a single module or for all modules If you choose Single you need to specify the module for which the report needs to be generated The option lis
221. horized By Modification Date Time Date Time Number Wi Authorized W Open Here you can specify the following details s ORACLE Year Specify the year for which you are capturing the first day of Ramadan Note that you cannot maintain multiple records for the same year First Day of Ramadan Specify the date on which Ramadan starts in the specified year Note that the date should be valid as per the Ramadan calendar Refer the chapters titled Defining the attributes specific to an Interest or Charge product and Daily Processing of Interest and Charges in the Interest and Charges User Manual for details on Zakat computation and application 2 ORACLE 4 1 4 Dealer Maintenance Defining Dealer At the time of entering the details of a foreign exchange money market or securities deal you will be required to enter details of the dealer who has struck the deal The dealers at your bank who are associated with the buying and selling of foreign exchange money or securities in the treasury should each be assigned an identification number ID number The dealer list is maintained for the bank through the Dealer Maintenance screen Invoke this screen by typing STDDEALR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Dealer Details E New amp Enter Query Dealer Id Dealer Name Input By Authorized By
222. ick OK to generate the report Contents of Report The contents of this report are discussed under the following heads Header The Header carries the title of the report information on the branch code branch date the ID of the user who generated the report the date and time at which it was generated the modules covered in the report the product codes covered in the report batch information transactions covered in the report and printing preference Body of the report The report is sorted by modules Under every module it lists out product wise transaction details The following transaction details are displayed Field Name Field Description Product This is the product code of the transaction User Id This is the user ID of the user who entered the transaction Reference No This is the transaction reference number Account Branch This is the account branch Account Number This is the account number Currency This is the currency of the transaction Dr Cr This is the nature of the transaction either debit or credit Transaction Code This is the transaction code while posting the journal entry Module This is the module code of the report Description This is the description of the transaction code Status Status of the transaction 35 5 ORACLE 35 4 Value Date This is the value date of the transaction Account Desc
223. idate FT transaction e Reversal of FT transaction Processing Payments and Collection The PC requests are processed with the tanked status as Yes if the branch is not available for transaction assuming that the PC Product cut off time is maintained such that the cut off time is past for the PC transaction when the Branch available status is changed to No If the PC request is received past the cut off time maintained at the product customer level the activation date would be moved to next working date with the other processing dates resolved based on the activation date keeping as same For Debit Liquidation DRLQ event and Credit Liquidation CRLQ event dates derived is application date then the accounting entries are posted with tanked status an ORACLE For a book transfer if the dispatch date derived is the application date then the offset transaction is generated and processed The offset transaction accounting entries as part of DRLQ event and CRLQ event are posted with tanked status if the accounting entry date derived is the application date After the branch status is available then the tanked accounting entries if any would be un tanked by the existing batch process for releasing the tanked accounting entries The following PC operation requests when the branch available status is No would be accepted and the processing would be deferred till the branch available status is yes The requests would be tanked at the FC UBS
224. ided displays all valid module codes maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one Transactions Indicate the type of transactions that should be covered in the report The following options are available e All e This branch gal ORACLE 35 2 1 e Posted to Other Branch e This branch acted as bridge Products Indicate whether the reports should be generated for a single product or for all products If you choose Single you need to specify the product code for which the report needs to be generated The option list provided displays all valid product codes maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one User Indicate whether the reports should be generated for a transactions entered by all users or a single user If you choose Single you need to specify the user ID based on which the report needs to be generated The option list provided displays all valid user IDs maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one From Specify the batch from which the transactions need to be considered for report generation To Specify the batch until which transactions need to be considered for report generation Print Copies Check this box to indicate that the report needs to be printed Click OK to generate the report Contents of Report The contents of this report are discussed under the following heads Header The Header carries the title of the report informa
225. if the option is checked but you have not maintained the Back Value Days maintained as NULL the system will interpret it to be Zero days allowed for back valued transactions The restriction for the maximum period up to which back valued posting can be allowed will be made on transactions processed in following modules e Payment and collections e Data Entry e Retail Teller e Utility Payments e Foreign Exchange e Money Market e Expense Processing e Fund Transfer e Loans and Deposits While saving transactions pertaining to any of these modules the System validates the Value Date of the contract to check whether it adheres to the restriction You will be intimated with an override if the Value Date is earlier than the specified period This restriction is made applicable on all uploads as well Refer the Contract Processing chapter of the individual modules for additional information 5 1 11 2 Indicating Profit and Loss Adjustment Track Previous Year Profit and Loss Adjustment You can collect data pertaining to the unrealized income booked for each contract during the year by triggering the Year end batch process But you will be allowed to trigger the batch process for splitting the unrealized profit and loss for the previous year and the current year only if you have specified this Track PY PnL Adjustment as a preferred option for your branch If you set this preference the data pertaining to the unreal
226. ified amount is used If the user specified ERI amount breaches the Tolerance Limit defined for the ERI currency the system calculates and reports the ERI Amount on the basis of the exchange rate defined for the settlement currency vis a vis the ERI currency For example in the SWIFT messages MT 100 and MT 202 that are generated towards settlement the value of the component can be reported both in Nostro account currency in Field 32A and in an ERI currency that you specify in Field 72 In Oracle FLEXCUBE this information is captured in the European Related Information ERI fields in the Settlement Message Details screen Assume the following scenario e The settlement account is an EUR account e You have to settle an amount of DEM 10000 e You have defined the ERI currency for DEM as DEM e The Tolerance Limit for DEM as 0 05 e The exchange rate 1 Euro 1 30 DEM The settlement amount in Euro would therefore be 7692 36 rounded to nearest higher cent This amount will be reported in Field 32A of the settlement messages Now if you want to furnish the settlement amount in the ERI currency in this case DEM you have to manually enter the DEM value in the ERI Amount field You may enter DEM 10000 EUR 7692 36 actually converts into DEM 10000 068 The value that you have entered is well within the Tolerance Limit of 0 05 defined for DEM Therefore this value will be reported in Field 72 of the settlement messages Since th
227. in GBP the next account number would be 40207GBP02 That is there will not be any holes in the system generated running number You may wish the system to automatically create current accounts for customers at the time of loan initiation These system created current accounts are for use as settlement accounts Here you need to specify the range of numbers available for such auto created accounts by If you wish to retain the facility of auto creation of current accounts at loan initiation you will 2 1 6 2 Specifying Auto Account Creation Parameters mentioning a start and an end number have to ensure that the account number mask does not have any user input character 2 1 7 Defining Bank wide Preferences In the Bank Wide Preferences screen you can specify the following e The route of inter branch accounting through HO through RO or directly between branches e Exchange rate preferences to be maintained for the bank as a whole or at each branch 220 ORACLE e Preference relating to update of GL balances on line or at the End of day e Preference relating to Position Accounting e Interface details Click the Preferences button to invoke the Preferences screen Preferences Interface Details Journal Account Width Inter Branch Scheme Inter Branch Entity Inter Branch Account Schedule Fund Inter Branch Scheme Inter Branch Account Normal Schedule Inter Branch Entity
228. ination In the IC Product Accounting Role Definition screen For the purpose of currency conversion an accounting role called Acquired is available 19 16 ORACLE End of day processes Maintaining a Conversion GL and Transaction Code simplifies the End of day process Basically two important things happen when the End of day processes are run Firstly interest is liquidated to the Acquired Interest GL and secondly all balances will be reduced to zero When you run the Beginning of day processes the next day the change in the currency conversion will be in place In addition balances will get restored Change in field values due to conversion The change in currency re denomination impacts amount based fields pertaining to Accounts Collaterals Credit Lines and Customer Limits The change in the value of these fields is reflected when you run the beginning of day processes The amount based fields which are affected by the change in currency denomination will be updated with the equivalent value in the new currency Accounts The following fields will reflect the new values e Temporary Over Draft limit e Sub limit e Uncollected Funds limit e Offline limit e Account Currency These fields can be found in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen Collateral In the Limits Maintenance Collaterals screen the following fields will be updated e Collateral Currency e Collateral Value e Limit Contribution e Issuer Exposu
229. indicate whether the products grouped under the respective category cater to cash based or non cash based transactions You can select the appropriate option aia ORACLE Exchange Rate Code and Rate Type The rate associated with this rate code will be used to derive the exchange rate when the currency of the transaction is different from the limit currency of the product category Similarly you have to select the Rate Type that is to be associated with the rate code The options available are as follows e Mid e Buy e Sell The rate code along with the rate type will determine the exchange rate that is to be used Debit Credit Indicator As part of Anti Money Laundering you can indicate the manner in which the system should track the Debit and Credit turnover limits for any of the limit types for the product category The options available are e Both Aggregate Together absolute values of debits and credits will be aggregated together e Both Aggregate Separately debits and credits will be aggregated separately e Debits alone or Credits alone Limit Code and Limit Amount At the product category level you can specify the limit amount that should be associated with each limit code for a limit type A list of all the limit codes maintained for the specific limit type Online Individual Daily turnover Batch Daily turnover Online and Monthly turnover in the Limit Codes Maintenance screen will be displayed in
230. ined inactive with interest overdue may be identified as NPAs Non Performing Asset In Oracle FLEXCUBE you can assign these accounts different status codes and define status criteria based on which the status movement will occur Refer the Core Entities user manual for details on associating status codes with a customer account class account These status codes are maintained in the Status Codes Maintenance screen Invoking Status Maintenance Screen You can invoke this screen by typing STDSTSCD in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 4 Status Code Maintenance E New E3 Enter Query Status Code Description Status Sequence Status Type Both Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status 17 1 ORACLE 17 2 1 In this screen you can maintain the following to user defined status of a loan or bill account status e A unique code for the status e A brief description for the status e A sequence number for the status e The type of status Indicate whether the status codes are maintained for an Account or for a Contract or for Both The type of status you choose depends on the status processing basis for your branch which is defined in the Branch Parameters Preferences maintenance If status processing basis is at individual account contract level you can choose
231. ing days are marked in black and the holidays in red All unauthorised records appear against a blue background On authorisation of that record the background disappears To define an additional holiday click the particular date which you need to be considered as holiday The system will mark that date as a holiday The system will change the color of the If you click a date that is already marked as a holiday the system will clear the holiday and treat that date as a working day The color of the date text is changed to black indicating that 22 1 2 Defining Clearing House Holidays date to red it is no more a holiday 22 1 3 Designating Unexpected Holidays for Clearing House The holiday calendar for your clearing house is maintained in the Clearing House Holiday Calendar screen In addition to the holiday calendar you may need to designate certain days as holidays unexpectedly without forewarning Alternatively you may also need to roll back a previously defined holiday date or set of dates You can do this using the Unexpected Holiday Maintenance screen ORACLE You can invoke this screen by typing CGDCLHOL in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Unexpected Clearing House Holiday Maintenance E New E3 Enter Query Clearing House Description Holiday Working Type Holiday Working From To Reason
232. ing on the product code involved in the contract being processed You can specify the following where clause as an extension of the SQL statement specified earlier WHERE PRODUCT_CODE SUBSTR P_CRN 4 4 Click add icon to define each subsequent component in the format Use the navigating icons to move between the various components of a sequence format 10 26 ORACLE 11 Maintaining Currency Denomination 11 1 Introduction In the Data Entry module you can specify a break up of a transaction amount for Teller transactions by denomination The system also maintains a break up of the till balances by denomination 11 2 Maintaining Currency Denomination Details In the Currency Denomination screen you maintain the standard currency denominations for each currency that your bank deals with You can invoke this screen by typing CSDDEMAN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Denomination Details E New E Enter Query Denomination Type Cash Issuer Code Currency Code Issuer Description Currency Description Denomination Details 10f1 Denomination Id Denomination Description Denomination Value Sequence Number Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status To maintain the denominations of a currency you need to specify the following e The code of the currency fo
233. intained in FT Value Date Spread maintenance e There would be no change in the derivation of the following processing dates Messaging Date Accounting Entry Date Rate Date e Ifthe Messaging Date of the FT transaction is derived as the application date then the message generation would be suppressed and the message will be generated once the branch available status changes to Yes e Accounting entries would be posted with tanked status if the accounting date derived is as of the application date e Advices associated with FT transaction events if any would be suppressed and generated once the branch available status changes to Yes After the branch available status is changed to Yes after the business date change then e The tanked status of the FT transaction would be set to No e The tanked accounting entries if any would be un tanked by the existing batch process for releasing the accounting entries e Advices of the FT transaction if suppressed would be generated e Ifthe payment message generation for FT transaction was suppressed the same would be generated during the transaction release The following FT operation requests when the branch available status is No would be accepted and the processing would be deferred till the branch available status is yes The requests would be tanked at the FC UBS Gateway messaging layer e Cancellation of FT Transaction e Amendment of FT transaction e _Liqu
234. ion Branch 2 Description General Ledger Accounts Due To Branch 2 az Description Due From Branch 2 a Description Inter Branch Currency Account Currency Contingent General Ledger Due To Branch 2 zz Description Due From Branch 2 Description MIS Group Due to Branch 2 Description Due from Branch 2 Description General Ledger Accounts Due To Branch 1 az Description Due From Branch 1 zZ Description Inter Branch Currency Account Currency Contingent General Ledger Due To Branch 1 Description Due From Branch 1 Description MIS Group Due to Branch 1 Description Due from Branch 1 Description Input By Authorized By Date Time Date Time Modification Number WB Authorized Open In this screen you maintain the following for each combination of branches that may be involved in an inter branch transaction e Branch Code of both the branches that are involved in the transaction e For each of the branches whether inter branch entries must be posted in transaction currency or settlement account currency e Customer accounts of Branch 1 Due to Branch 2 Due from Branch 2 e Customer accounts of Branch 2 Due to Branch 1 Due from Branch1 9 1 1 System Features The system generates a set of pairs of branches for which internal acco
235. ion screen where you can set your preferences as to viewing and printing the report Contents of the Report The contents of the report are discussed under the following heads Header The Header carries the title of the report information on the branch code the date and time the branch date the user id the module name and the page number of the report 319 ORACLE 35 9 35 9 1 Body of the Report Field Name Field Description Customer Name Indicates the name of the customer Customer Number Indicates the customer number First Nominee Indicates the name of the first nominee Second Nominee Indicates the name of the second nominee Address Indicates the contact address for the customer whose cheque has been rejected Client Account Number Indicates the Account Number of the client Account Closing Confirmation This report gives details about closing confirmation of an account in Account Closing Confirmation screen To invoke this screen type CSRPACCC in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button The screen is as shown below Account Closing Confirmation Customer Report Customer Number Date Contents of Report The contents of account closing confirmation have been discussed under the following heads Header The Header carries the title of the report information on the branch code th
236. ion Branch Select the appropriate branch from the list of branches available in the option list This will be available only for those users who has Multi Branch Operational check box enabled at User Maintenance Screen While clicking Ok button the system validates the access rights of the selected branch and function for the user If you don t have appropriate rights on the selected branch and function the system would raise an error message If you select a valid branch the system updates the same as transaction branch and the transaction would be posted for this branch Note The system performs the action level access rights validation only on Save operation After selecting the Transaction Branch you can enter the remaining details in the CrDrStat Maintenance screen Credit Rating Status E New amp Enter Query Branch Code Customer A C C No Debit C No Credit C Posting Allowed Remarks Change Log Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status You need to specify the following details 8 ORACLE Branch Code Specify the branch code The adjoining option list displays all the branch codes that are maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Customer A C Specify the customer account for which you are maintaining the credit debit status The adjoining option list displays all the customer account numbers t
237. ion you can indicate the holiday in a week for your branch You can select the day for holiday from dropdown list If you want to set only one holiday in a week for your branch select the day for Weekly Holiday 1 and leave Weekly Holiday 2 Blank If you want to opt for two holidays in a week select the days for Weekly Holiday 1 amp Weekly Holiday 2 Clearing Bank Code Specify the code by which your bank is identified in the Clearing Network you participate in This has to the same as that specified for your bank in the Clearing Bank Code Maintenance screen oe ORACLE MIS Group for Currency Mismatch Entries If the posting of automatic balancing entries due to currency and value date mismatches has been specified for your bank you can specify the MIS codes or groups to be used for posting the balancing entries Interdict Validation Required For your branch you need to indicate whether Interdict Validation is required for all Customers Customer Accounts Funds Transfers Standing Instructions Foreign Exchange Letter of Credit and DD transaction processed within your branch The options available are e Yes the details of CIFs and Customer Accounts captured in the specific branch of your bank will be sent to the GI system as and when they are captured in Oracle FLEXCUBE e No the details maintained in the specific branch will not be sent to the GI system for online verification Interdict Timeout Interval If you i
238. is quoted indirectly 1 GBP 1 5021 USD the USD will be defined as currency 1 and the GBP as currency 2 with the quotation method indirect Number of Units This indicates the number of units of currency to be used for currency conversion Spread Definition You need to indicate the method in which the spread for a currency pair needs to be defined There are two ways of defining the spread in points and in percentage The effective spread can be calculated using any of the following two methods e In points spread x points multiplier e In percentage spread 100 x mid rate The method of spread definition that you specify here applies to two instances e While maintaining exchange rates for this currency pair e While maintaining Customer Spread for this currency pair Specifying Points Multiplier Points are the smallest unit of measurement in the exchange rate of a currency pair If you have opted for a points system of defining spread you should specify the multiplication factor for the points to compute effective spread Suppose for the currency pair USD DEM your rates are as follows Mid Rate 1 6045 Buy rate 1 6040 18 ORACLE Sell rate 1 6051 The effective buy spread is 0 0005 1 6045 1 6040 and the effective sell spread is 0 0006 1 6051 1 6045 In the Rates screen where you define rates and spreads for a currency pair you can specify the buy and sell spreads as 5 and 6 instead of as 0 00
239. is to be divided The following are the features of the Period Code screen Financial Cycle For each financial cycle you maintain the following parameters Cycle This is a code for the financial cycle It acts as an identifier for the cycle For example while posting adjustments into a previous financial cycle you would identify the year through this code Input the code using a maximum of 9 characters alphanumeric For example the financial cycle extends from 1st April to 31st March in India A bank here could define its code for the year 1996 97 as FY 1996 97 Description This describes the financial cycle Enter description using a maximum of 35 characters alphanumeric Taking the above example you could enter Financial Year 1996 97 Start Date This is the first day of this Financial Cycle End Date This is the last day of this Financial Cycle Period Group The financial cycle defined above can be divided into different accounting periods To define individual accounting periods click on the first row under period code A period called FIN is created by the system This is an open ended period coinciding with the last day of the financial cycle for details refer to the section System Functions You can maintain the following parameters for each accounting period within a financial cycle Period Code This code identifies the accounting period Enter a code using a maximum of 3 characters alphanumeric
240. ized income is collected at contract level for the following modules mee ORACLE e Securities Unrealized Interest Discount and Premium accrued for the year e Derivatives unrealized income e Bills and Collections unrealized income e Letters of Credit unrealized income e Money Markets unrealized income 5 1 11 3 Indicating Revaluation Split Details Revaluation Split Required You can choose to break up revaluation profit loss into e Trading P amp L P amp L due to revaluation of foreign currency transactions during the day e Revaluation P amp L P amp L due to revaluation of opening balances balances without current day s turnover If you enable this preference all GLs which are marked for revaluation split will have their revaluation profit loss broken up into trading and revaluation P amp L for entries posted from this branch For further details on Split Revaluation refer the GL user manual 5 1 11 4 Specifying Suspense Product Maintenance 5 1 11 5 When a branch goes offline user posts the transactions allowed in offline mode Once the branch and host are online branch starts posting these transactions as force post If the force post fails then the host needs to post these transactions as a suspense product in the branch Debit Product Specify a valid debit product you need to maintain as Suspense Product The adjoining option list displays all the valid debit products maintained in the s
241. k Control Middle Office from Login SA Exempt Advance Interest Check this box to indicate that all the postings with this transaction code should not be considered for penalty interest calculation Escrow Processing Check this box to indicate that all the payments related to this transaction code should be considered for Escrow sweeps If this box is checked and the credit account Project account is Escrow enabled then the system will automatically compute predefined percentage of transaction amount and places an amount block on the credit account Project account Note Escrow processing is possible only if the trust account and escrow account are of the same currency and are with in Oracle FLEXCUBE Available Balance update through PPC Check this box to update the available balance on the project through PPC Salary Credit Select the type of salary credit from the adjoining drop down list This list displays the following values ake ORACLE e Normal Salary e Bulk Salary By default the system selects null value Note The value Bulk Salary can be selected only if the Availability Information is Immediate This applies when you use the option Bulk Salary along with a transaction code When a credit is made to an account through salary upload table along with a bulk salary enabled transaction code the system blocks the entire credit amount on that account with effect fro
242. lated in the handoff records will be picked up for Account Statement Generation processing vee ORACLE 5 3 Maintaining Role to Head Mapping at Branch Level You can maintain different General Ledgers for different branches for the accounting roles defined in the system If you have maintained Role to Head mapping for a product at the branch level the system uses these accounting heads instead of the heads maintained at the product level You can maintain Role to Head mapping for a combination of branch product and status in Branch Level Role to Head Mapping screen You can invoke this screen by typing CSDACRHM in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Branch Level Role to Head E New E3 Enter Query Branch Branch Name Product Code Product Description Status Role To Head Mapping Details 1 Of 1 Accounting Role Accounting Head Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status You can specify the following details in this screen Branch Code The branch code of the current branch gets defaulted here Branch Name The name of the current branch corresponding to the branch code gets displayed here Product Code Specify the product code for which you wish to maintain role to head mapping or select the product code from the option list provided Status Spe
243. lidated for uniqueness For example there could be only one exchange rate between USD and EUR for 31 07 2003 with Rate Type STANDARD with Rate Serial as 0001 Thus this will be a unique rate serial for a currency pair rate type combination for a given rate date When you enter the exchange rate for a currency pair the system will default the Rate Date as the Application Date and the Rate Serial as the latest available serial for the currency pair 1 The Rate Serial Number will be system generated However you can modify it if required This number takes into account the Rate Serial Number present in the Currency Rates History screen too The Rate Serial Number and the Rate Date will be displayed during authorization of the Rate in the Currency Authorization screen meg ORACLE 14 1 1 14 1 2 14 1 3 14 1 4 Authorizing Exchange Rates Authorization of exchange rates is done from the Currency Exchange Rates input screen Details like old value new value for each field buy rate mid rate etc are displayed Click authorise icon to authorize the record Revising Exchange Rates For revising the exchange rates for your bank or the branches invoke the Currency Maintenance screen Click the currency pair whose exchange rate you want to revise and click unlock icon on the toolbar Input modify the new rates for the pair Viewing Exchange Rates You can view the exchange rates in the Currency Exchange Rates View
244. m System will select this option by default but you can unselect it System will not allow unselecting this option once it is selected LDAP DN Template The LDAP DN template needs to be maintained here for each branch This is used in Oracle FLEXCUBE user maintenance form to populate corresponding LDAP user id automatically from the template Maintaining LCY Message Preference for Branch Click the LCY Msg Pref button in the Preferences screen to invoke the LCY Message Preference screen The screen is as shown below Branch Parameters LCY Message Preferences Description Messages Type 10f1 Module Module Description Local Currency Message Type Branch The system displays the branch details Description The system displays the description Module Specify the module details Module Description Specify the description of the module Local Currency Message Type Select the local currency message type from the drop down list Following are the options available in the drop down list aS ORACLE e Suppress LCY e Generate LCY Message Thru SWIFT e Generate PC Contract 5 1 13 Specifying UDF Details You can associate values to all the User Defined fields created and attached to the Branch Parameters Screen You can view the list of User Defined fields associated by clicking the Fields button The screen appears as shown below User Defined Fields Field N
245. m the date of upload This block remains active for the period maintained in CSTB_PARAM against the parameter BULKSALARY_BLOCK_ DAYS The number of days for expiry is mentioned terms of calendar days The system does not allow manual operations on the amount block for these accounts Statement Day Basis You need to specify when the transaction associated with the selected Transaction Code should appear in the account statement The available options are e Current Working Day e Previous Working Day 18 2 1 4 Accounting Entry Processing to Calculate Statement Date The accounting entry processing will be enhanced to calculate the Statement Date based on the Transaction Code Maintenance and the Statement Status at the Branch level The following illustration explains the calculation of Statement Date Assume two Transaction Codes TXN1 and TXN2 have been defined with Statement Date Basis as Current Working Day and Previous Working day respectively The Statement Date would be derived as follows For a transaction C1 posted on say 25 Jan 2004 with TXN1 the Statement Date would be derived as 25 Jan 2004 irrespective of the Branch Statement Status For a transaction C2 posted on 25th Jan 2004 with TXN2 the Statement Date would be derived as the Previous Working Day of 25 Jan 2004 if the Branch Statement Status is set to N specifying that the Branch is not yet ready for periodic statements processing For a transaction
246. main component will be passed with TRF_AMT tag and the equivalent entry will be passed with the AMT_EQUIV tag In case of accruals revaluation also if position entries are created the corresponding entries will be stored separately for hand off Aab ORACLE Note Pair wise Positioning Required will decide whether position creating pair entries need to be stored by the accounting processor separately for handing off to other system Propagate CIF to other Nodes You need to indicate whether or not the CIF number maintained in HO has to be propagated to other branches present in different instances Check this box to indicate the CIF number has to be propagated to other Nodes instances Propagate Customer Addresses to Nodes You need to indicate whether or not the customer addresses maintained in HO has to be propagated to other branches present in different instances Check this box to indicate the Customer addresses has to be propagated to other Nodes instances Propagate Bank Instruction Codes Details to Nodes This indicates whether or not the BIC data maintained in HO has to be propagated to other branches present in different instances Check this box to propagate BIC details Maintenance of Customer Identification Mask at Branch Node level This option gives you the flexibility to define different CIF masks at the Nodes Bank level If you select Bank from the option list then the CIF mask given at Bank level will be ap
247. mmon regional office the accounting entry would be routed through the HO e If you specify Direct each branch would have a direct accounting relationship with every other branch The receivable and payable accounts between the branches referred to as due from and due to accounts are maintained in the Inter branch parameters screen For example suppose the University Savings Bank has the following set up for its head office and branches in Headington Oxford Roosevelt Avenue Branch is the HO with Branch Code 000 Foxlake Drive Branch Branch Code 001 Mountainwood Road branch Branch Code 002 You have indicated that inter branch transactions should be routed through the Head Office Ms Tanya Agnihotri has an account in Branch 002 She makes a cash withdrawal from Branch 001 This being an inter branch transaction Branch 001 will have to recover the money from Branch 002 In this example the following movement of funds is involved e At Branch 001 the cash account is credited for the transaction amount and due from Head Office account debited e At Branch 000 the due from Branch 002 is debited and the due to Branch 001 is credited e At Branch 002 the Customer Account is debited and the due to Head Office account credited Inter Branch Entity Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to post accounting entries related to inter branch transactions to either of the following e Customer Accounts e General Ledgers
248. n Allocated Batch Number Range 1 Of 1 Start Number End Number Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status Specify the following details in this screen e The User Profile for which the restrictions are being maintained A list of all the User Profiles with access rights to the DE and PC modules is displayed in the option list You can select the appropriate e The branch of your bank for which the restrictions will be made applicable You can either choose a specific branch or make the restriction applicable to All the branches of your bank e The module for which you are maintaining the Allocated Batch Number Range This can either be PC or DE at ORACLE 2 1 4 1 e The batch number range which is indicated in terms of Start and End numbers The range that you specify is allocated to the user For distinct numbers the start number and end number of the range will be the same Note While processing DE and PC transactions the batch number specified by the user is val idated against the allotted range If the validation fails an error message is displayed These validations are made applicable even during the Batch Upload operations for the following functions 1 Journal Online Single Entry 2 Multi offset Entry 3 Teller Transaction Input SSO Enabled To enable Single Sign On SSO for your installation check the SSO
249. n appears as shown below 3 Branch Parameters Tax Maintenance Tax Cycle Consolidated Certificate Required Individual Certificate Required Tax Certificate Frequency Frequency Value Tax Cycle This is the current tax cycle for the branch This is a display field Whenever the tax cycle changes the field is updated during the date change authorization for that day Consolidated Tax Certificate Required Check this option to indicate Consolidated Tax Certificate is required for all the transactions done in the Tax Cycle This option works in conjunction with a similar option in the Customer Information Maintenance and the Tax Category Maintenance screen The Consolidated Tax Certificate would be generated at the frequency specified at the branch level Apart from this the certificate would also be generated at the end of the Tax Cycle The consolidated tax certificate would always display all the transactions pertaining to the current Tax Cycle Individual Tax Certificate Required Check this option to indicate Individual Tax Certificate is required for individual transactions under the selected tax category This option works in conjunction with a similar option in the Customer Information Maintenance and the Tax Category Maintenance screen Tax Certificate Frequency This field is enabled only if the Consolidated Tax Certificate option is checked You need to specify the frequency with which the tax certificate should be genera
250. n business day In the Account Revaluation Maintenance you must specify the following parameters that would be used by the batch revaluation process for revaluing FCY entries in Income Expense GLs Rate type Transaction code for posting entry based revaluation entries You can maintain these parameters for specific Income Expense GLs If you wish to maintain these parameters for all Income Expense GLs you can specify the STDPNL option in the GL Code field The STDPNL option signifies that the entry based parameters being maintained are applicable for all Income Expense GLs When the revaluation batch revalues an Income Expense GL it uses the rate type and transaction code maintained for the GL in the Account Revaluation screen If no maintenance exists for the specific GL the parameters maintained for the STDPNL GL Code option are used 13 ORACLE 20 1 20 2 20 Maintaining Branch Holidays Introduction For a year you need to define your weekly holidays and your calendar year annual holidays This is done in the Local Holiday Calendar screen The system uses the information maintained in this screen to do the following e To check that the value date of no Data Entry transaction falls on a holiday e To check that the start date maturing date and schedule date of a loans and deposit contract does not fall on a holiday e To effect a date change on the system today s date and
251. n currency pair Currency 1 If you have chosen Selected Currency Pair then specify the first currency that forms a pair The adjoining option list displays all valid currency codes maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one Currency 2 If you have chosen Selected Currency Pair then specify the second currency that forms the pair The adjoining option list displays all valid currency codes maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one Click OK to generate the report Contents of Report Header The Header carries the title of the report information on the branch code the ID of the user who generated the report the date and time at which it was generated the module covered in the report and reporting options Body of the report The report is sorted by currency pairs The following details are displayed Field Name Field Description Currency This gives the currency pairs for which rate report has been generated Pair Quotation This indicates the quotation type either direct or indirect No of Units This indicates the number of units of one currency being quoted against the other Rate Type This is the rate type Mid Rate This is the mid rate used for conversion Buy Rate This is the buy rate used for conversion Sale Rate This is the sell rate used for conversion Rate History Report This report gives details
252. n define buy and sell margins for a specific currency This spread is applied to floating interest components that involve the customer and currency combination You can define buy and sell margins for a customer in the Customer Spread Maintenance screen invoked from the Application Browser You can invoke this screen by typing 134 ORACLE CFDCUMRG in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button The margin that you define will be appropriately picked up and applied to arrive at the final rate that is applied to floating components of contracts that involve the customer currency combination The buy and sell margins that you define are for a customer and currency combination You can select the customer and currency combination from the option lists available For the selected currency customer combination you can define amount slabs and specify a Borrow and Lend margin for each slab To add a slab to the list click add icon and enter the slab details To remove a slab from the list highlight it and click delete icon Whenever you enter a contract in Oracle FLEXCUBE that involves the customer and currency combination the appropriate spread is applied to arrive at the floating rate to be charged The slab is selected based on the contract amount and depending on the nature of the contract the Borrow or Lend spread is applied Customer Spread Maintenance E New E3 Enter
253. n purge data from the following modules e Accounting e Currency e General Ledger e Interest and Charges e Messaging e MIS e Reconciliation e Receivable Liquidation You can also purge data relating to transactions For example you can purge the currency rates that you have maintained the messages in the messaging system of Oracle FLEXCUBE the User Data Elements that you used to compute interest interest statement details user information maintained in the Security Management System of Oracle FLEXCUBE customer information and so on ag ORACLE 26 3 The system will automatically purge data according to the parameters that you define in the Purge Details Maintenance screen Maintaining Purge Details In the Purge Details Maintenance screen you can define the parameters for purging data from the system For instance you may want to purge the contracts entered into in the previous financial cycle Or you may want to retain exchange rates in the system for a specific period These are examples of parameters that you can define in the Purge Details Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing CSDPURGE in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Purge Details Maintenance E New Enter Query Module Selection Module Id a Description Purge Criteria Status Retention Period Input
254. ncrease in the of PPC s At the project maintenance when ST CONO05 Decrease of project ever there is a change in the pro amount not allowed ject amount the system should validate and only allow an increase in the project amount and not allow a decrease In case of a JV the total of the ST PROJ 009 Total share should be share of individual customers 100 should be 100 In case of a JV each customer ST PROJ 028 Liability ID already in use should have a separate Liability ID it is operational control At the project maintenance each project should have unique Line ID for PPC lines The milestone start date and end ST PROJ 004 The milestone start date date should be validated against end date should be equal that of the project to or within the range of project start and end date The project status when changed ST PROJ 024 OPEN PPC s exist Pro to CLOSED should be allowed only ject status cannot be when all PPC s associated with the closed respective project are in CLOSED status In case of auto created lines sys ST CON012 Amendment of auto cre tem should not allow amendment ated lines not allowed on these lines The number of milestones cannot ST PROJ 027 Number of milestones exceed the number of PPCs cannot be greater than the number of PPCs 34 1 ORACLE The sum of the milestone percent ST PROJ 010 The sum of milestone age completion should be 100 compl
255. ncy Definition screen determine the manner in which transactions in the currency are handled in Oracle FLEXCUBE Currency Type When maintaining a currency in the Currency Definition screen you have to specify the type of the currency You can do this in the Euro Type field Choose the appropriate option from the following e The Euro itself e An In currency e An Out currency e Euro Closed National currencies of In countries are referred to as In currencies When maintaining other currencies you have to choose the Out Ccy option under Euro Type When the transition period ends the national currencies of the participating countries would cease to exist as valid legal tenders The Euro would be the only legal tender in the participating countries Consequently the Euro changes made to Oracle FLEXCUBE will no longer be required You can turn off the changes at the end of the transition period by e Closing all In currencies and 10 14 ORACLE e Choosing the Euro Closed option for the Euro Currency Definition ENew E3 Enter Query al Currency Code Alternate Currency Code Currency Name Currency Type ISO Numeric Currency Codel Country zz Position General Decimals Ledger InterestMethod 30 Euro 360 Position Equivalent General Ledger Spot Days Tolerance Limit Foreign Exchange J Index Base Currency Netting Days
256. ndicate that the details should be sent to the GI system you will also have to specify the interdict timeout interval period If the response time from the GI system takes longer than the time that you specify in this field the transaction will be timed out since the processing time exceeds the time stipulated in this field If you enable this preference you will have to identify the Code or ID of the function in Oracle FLEXCUBE for which such a validation should be performed by clicking on the GI button in the Branch Parameters screen Status Processing Basis In the Branch Parameters you can indicate the basis upon which status processing must be done at the branch for customer accounts as well as loan contracts Status processing can be done either at an individual contract account level or at a Group CIF level If you opt for Group CIF level processing it is done in two stages e The worst status among all contracts and accounts under a specific customer group or CIF is arrived at e All accounts and contracts involving the customer group or CIF are then moved to the worst status that was arrived at If you opt for status processing at individual contract account level the status of each contract or account would be assigned according to the status processing parameters that are operative for the contract or account If Status Processing is at Individual Contract Level then you can change the status and tri
257. need to identify the various components that would be part of the user reference number including details such as the length order value etc of each component You can maintain a unique format through the Sequence Generation Input screen You can invoke this screen by typing CSDSEQGN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button The screen appears as shown below Sequence Generation Input EbNew E3 Enter Query Sequence Code Branch Code Module Code Reset Frequency From To Sequence Detail El Component Order Component ComponentType Use in Sequence Generation ComponentLength Comp X X X Input By Authorized By Modification Date Time Date Time Number Wi Authorized E Open You can maintain the following details of the sequence format Sequence Code Each sequence format is identified by a unique sequence code You can devise a code comprising a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters Branch Code and Module Code You can maintain the format for a specific branch and module combination Select the branch code and the module code from the option list All authorized and active records will be displayed in the list Alternatively you can maintain a sequence format that will be applicable to all the branches ALL and all the modules AL available in
258. ning the account number For instance you will replace DD with PL for Poland US for the United States and so on e A Check Digit Number calculated according to an ISO Standard algorithm using the Country Code Bank Code and Account Number combination Since this is a two digit number you can use the identifier CC to specify this algorithm The system arrives at and replaces this identifier with the actual check digit based on the Country Code Bank Code and Account Number combination e The Bank Code of the bank where the IBAN resides This code is assigned to the respective Bank by its national bank There are no individual restrictions on the length of Bank Code and Account Number However the combined length of the Bank Code and Account Number should not exceed 30 characters You can use the identifiers a for alphabets and n for numerals as the identifiers to capture the length of the bank code e The Account Number of the customer account The bank in which the customer account resides assigns this number You can use the identifiers a for alphabets and n for numerals as the identifiers to capture the length of the account number For example you maintain an IBAN mask in the following format DDCCaaaaaaaaannnnnnaaaaaannnnnnnnn While capturing the IAB number you have to strictly adhere to the format mentioned above USccCHASEBANK000101 CBNYLI450000026 In place of the cc s the system will generate the check digit algorithm
259. nput You can define such a preference to be applicable to cross currency transactions involving e A currency pair e A specific product or all products e A specific module or all modules e A specific branch or all branches e A specific rate code The transaction amount limit above which the exchange rate must be entered for a high value transaction could be defined in terms of currency pair where the currency of the transaction is currency1 in the CCY pair defined in the maintenance To ensure that users manually enter exchange rates for high value cross currency transactions in Oracle FLEXCUBE you must specify the limit amounts that must be validated for each transaction in terms of currency pair product module and branch combination You can use the Product Limits Maintenance screen to specify the limits When you have specified these limits the system automatically validates the amount with each transaction for the currency pair product module and branch combination and accordingly if the limits are exceeded enforces the manual entry of exchange rates In case the limit between ccy1 and ccy2 is given in ccy2 the system will automatically convert the transaction amount to an amount in ccy2 using standard mid rate and check against the limit amount whether or not manual entry of exchange rates is required You can invoke the Product Limits Maintenance screen by typing CSDPXMNT in the field at the top right co
260. nrnnnnerernnnrnrrnnnreerrnnnrnnnnnnne 9 4 9 2 Defining Accounts for Inter Branch Fund Transactions cccceceeeeseeeeeeeenneeees 9 5 9 2 1 Querying on Netting Batch ceccceccteteeeceeenneeeeeesnteeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaeeeeeseaaes 9 6 Currency Maintenance ccececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeeececeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 1 TOT IntroductiOnivcx c iced eendineaeted eee ea i e aE ae SE e a 2 intl 10 1 10 2 Maintaining Currency Details 0 ececeee scence ee etneeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeetiaeeeeeeeeaas 10 1 10 2 1 Indicating Rounding Preferences e seeesissereeerrensrrrrrrrererrenerrinerreeerranns 10 6 10 2 2 Specifying Amount Format Mask cccccccccseccececteeeeteneneeeetesaeeeeeteeaeeees 10 7 10 2 3 Specifying Exchange Rate Limits 0 0 cccceccsccceceeseeeeeeeeesneeeseeeneeeesneeanees 10 8 10 2 4 Mapping Currency to Country cecccccccteeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeeeeeseneaeeeeeeenaeeees 10 8 10 2 5 Specifying User Defined FieldS cccccccccecceeeeeenteeeeeteeeeeeeeteneeaaeeeteeeatees 10 9 10 2 6 ANNOXUIC bi eeiecsesietheecieee eileen ieee del edie EE AEE E tenes 10 9 10 2 7 Specifying Currency Cut Off Parameters 00 cececccccctsseeeeeenteeeeeeeenaees 10 12 1023s Hardina Eoss ea coh hs toedaed tat venta a a eee ached deansads tated sd cade oath G 10 13 10 4 Maintaining Euro Related Information 0 cccceeeiceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tennessee eaeeeeee 10 14 10 4 1 Maintaining Currency Detallls cccccc
261. ntinue for subsequent accounts maintained for the same combination Note You can view all the dummy CIF numbers linked to a customer in the Customer Accounts Allocated Dummy CIF screen Maintaining Global Interdict Functions Click GI Functions button in the Branch Parameters Maintenance screen to invoke Branch Global Interdict Functions screen Using this screen you can integrate with Global Interdict oN ORACLE System for online verification of transactions before authorisation in order to comply with Office of Foreign Assets Control OFAC regulations in US Branch Parameters Global Interdict Functions Branch Global interdict Functions 1 0f1 Description Function Id 5 1 11 Maintaining Preferences To specify your preferences click Preferences button from the Branch Wide Parameters screen The Preferences screen is displayed Branch Parameters Preferences Netting Suspense General Ledger Walk tn Customer Internal Swap Customer Clearing Account Offset Clearing Account Weekly Holiday 1 Weekly Holiday 2 Clearing Bank Code MIS Group For Currency Interdict Timeout Interval Status Processing Basis Provisioning Frequency Uncollected Funds Basis Uncollected Funds Minor Age Limit Yrs Notification Days Cheque Stale Days Limit Expiry Advice Notification Back Value Days Sunday gt Saturday interdict Validation Required
262. ntion Margin The system displays the margin retained by the sponsor for this PPC However you can amend this field while creating the PPC Sponsor Amount The system displays the sponsor amount after applying the sponsor retention margin Bank Margin The system displays the margin retained by the bank for this PPC However you can amend this field while creating the PPC Lendable amount The system displays the lendable amount after applying the bank margin Amount Paid The system displays the amount that has been paid against this PPC Remarks Specify remarks if any Specifying Joint Venture Details In case of manual line linkage you need to operationally ensure the following points e Synchronization of Line End date and PPC end date e _Limitlines should have amounts equivalent to that of PPC lendable amount In case line currency is different from PPC currency lines should be created for the equivalent of PPC lendable amount by applying the rate conversion If there is any mismatch in the amounts while linking the manual lines the system will display an override message Party ID The system defaults the party ID from the project maintenance Ratio The system defaults the joint venture share ratio from the project maintenance Credit Line The system defaults the line ID The system uses this limit line for tracking the exposure of specific joint venture party If joint venture limit tracking is not required at
263. nto the Oracle FLEXCUBE holiday upload table The HF record has the following format Positi Par Manda oh Description Length Type tory Data 1 Tag Identifier 2 VAR Y HF CHAR2 3 Modification 1 VAR Y A addition Flag CHAR2 M modification D deletion U unchanged 4 Country 2 VAR Y ISO Country Code CHAR2 Code 6 Country 35 VAR Y Country Name Name CHAR2 first part 41 Country 35 VAR N Country Name Name CHAR2 second part 76 Date 8 VAR Y Date of a Holi CHAR2 day 84 Holiday type 1 VAR Y Code indicating CHAR2 type of Holiday see below 301 ORACLE 85 Special holi day info 320 VAR CHAR2 Restrictions applicable if a holiday is not applicable country wide or is not a full day HS For European countries The HS record comprises the Target holiday details for countries where EUR is the local currency The holiday record is uploaded into the Oracle FLEXCUBE holiday upload table The HS record has the following format Posi fudge Mand tion Description Length Type atory Data 1 Tag Identifier 2 VARCHAR2 Y HS 3 Modification 1 VARCHAR2 Y A addition Flag M modification D deletion U unchanged 4 Service Code 3 VARCHAR2 Y Value Added Service Code 7 Date 8 VARCHAR2 Y Date of a Holi day 15 Holiday type 1
264. o market In all foreign currency accounts the FCY current balance is displayed along with the LCY equivalent of the current balance The LCY equivalent current balance is the aggregate of the LCY equivalent of the various transactions that have been posted to the account In the Chart of Accounts GL Details screen you specify whether a GL should be revalued or not In the Account Revaluation Maintenance screen you specify parameters for account revaluation such as rate type the GL to which the profit or loss from revaluation should be posted etc You can invoke this screen by typing RVDSETUP in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Account Revaluation Setup E New E3 Enter Query General Ledger Code Description Transaction Code Description Rate Type Description Profit General Ledger Description Loss General Ledger Description Revalue Into Description Trading Profit GL Description Trading Loss GL az Description Netting of Offset Entries Entry Based Revaluation Rate Type Transaction Code Input By Authorized By Modification Date Time Date Time Number W Authorized W Open In this screen you can maintain the following parameters to define the revaluation parameters for a GL account I The general ledger accounts
265. o the project account The system creates the joint venture lines on authorization of the PPC maintenance with joint venture tracking required In case of manual line creation the system will create the lines in project currency Whenever there is across currency the system will use a standard mid rate to convert from limit currency to project currency to track utilization The LCY difference that may arise due to exchange rate differences will be handled by the ELCM CCY revaluation EOD batch You can view the limits detail such as line ID to create the project limits There are two types namely PPC Limits and Non PPC Limits The screenshot for PPC Limits is as follows Project Details and Maintenance E New amp Enter Query Project Details Customer Number Project ID Project Name Project Account Branch Project Account Liability No Project Value Branch Code Currency Number Of PPCs Default PPC Clearance Days Start Date End Date Sponsor Retention Margin Remarks J Ratio Change Allowed F JV Limit Tracking Required Bank Margin J Auto Line Creation for PPC F Limit Track Required through Commitment Main Milestones Venture Details HKOASUIE Non PPC Limits 10f 1 Credit Line Serial No Commitment Product Limit Type Limit Description Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Record Status Authorization Status Mod No
266. o the year 2000 using the arrows Step 3 To build the calendar for the year 2000 click on the Refresh button This button is called the refresh build up button because it builds the calendar for you Step 4 Select the currency for which you are defining holidays Please note e On invoking the calendar of any year you will notice that Saturdays and Sundays are marked as weekly holidays for the currency This is the default setting of the system e For identification the working days are marked in black and the holidays in red e All unauthorised records appear against a blue background On authorisation of that record the background disappears Defining Currency Holidays To define any other weekly holiday for the currency other than the default double click the day of the week listed on the top row of the screen For instance if you double click F all Fridays in the year would be marked as holidays To clear off the default weekly holidays Saturdays and Sundays double click on sa and s written on the top row To specify other holidays double click on that date the date would be marked as a holiday If you want to unmark a day specified earlier as a holiday double click on it once again You will notice that the day gets marked in black Because the change is yet unauthorised it appears against a blue background Uploading Holiday File SWIFT provides a country wise holiday file
267. o undo the modifications if needed before the records are authorized The maintenance log also will store the changes till they get authorized The new or the modified records are written to the static tables only after authorization 28 2 Tanking New and Modified Maintenance Records You can enable tanking of the creation and modification of maintenance records by selecting the Tanking Required option provided at the function Id level You need to enable the Tanking Required option in RAD tool as well You can enable Tanking Required option for individual function Ids in Function Description Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing SMDFNDSC in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Function Description E New amp Enter Query Function Id Name Module List Type Form User Function Id Menu Head MODULE Type String Maintenance Available Tanking Required Automatic End of Day aware Log Event Customer Access Dual Authorization Remarks Required Excel Export Required Multi Branch Access Field Log Required Auto Authorization Head Office Function Duplicate task check Ely Control String for functions and reports Duplicate Check Fields Function Description 1 Of 1 Language Codex Main Menu Sub Menu 1 Sub Menu 2 Balloon Help Description a Field Properties Maker Date Time Mod No Che
268. oduct Managers Product definition and authorization End of day operators Processing during end of day beginning of day Financial Controller Product Manag Generation of reports ers Documentation Accessibility For information about Oracle s commitment to accessibility visit the Oracle Accessibility Program website at http Awww oracle com pls topic lookup ctx acc amp id docacc Organization The manual is organized in the following manner About this Manual gives a brief introduction of the module the audi ence it addresses and the organization of the various chapters It also Chapter 1 includes the list of related documents to be referred if any and the conventions used in the document Bank Parameters explains the maintenance of various basic details Chapter 2 about your bank Chapter 3 Ramadan Maintenance explains maintenance of Ramadan year Dealer Maintenance explains how you can capture profiles of dealers Chapter 4 involved in buying and selling of foreign exchange Branch Parameters explains the process of creating and maintaining Chapter 5 branches of your bank with all necessary details 1 1 ORACLE Account Branch Transfer explains how you can maintain and process Chapter 6 account transfers from one branch of the bank to another Chapter 7 System Dates Maintenance explains how you can maintain s
269. odule The module for which the report is being generated amiy ORACLE Contract Ref No The reference number of the contract being reported Counter Party The name of the counter party Counter Party The name of the counter party involved Name Event Description The description of the event Exception The description about the exception 35 12 Uncollected Funds Report This report provides details of uncollected funds based on release date of the fund You can invoke this screen by typing ACRUNCOL in the field at the top right corner of the application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Uncollected Funds Print Uncollected Funds Print Date Present Date Accounts All Between Dates One From Date To Date ReportFormat PDF Printer At Client Report Output Print Printer Specify the following details Accounts Select the account for which the report is to be generated The options are e All System fetches all the accounts which has uncollected funds e One lfthis option is selected system fetches the report for a particular account which is selected in the option list Date option Select the date for which report has to be generated e Present Date System fetches the uncollected fund which are available in the current date e Between dates If between dates is selected then From date and to date is mandatory System fetches the Uncollected fund d
270. of Report The parameters specified while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the report Other content displayed in the report is as follows Header The Header carries the title of the report information on the branch code the ID of the user who generated the report the date and time at which it was generated and the modules covered in the report ael ORACLE Body You can find the following details in the body of the report Field Name Field Description Module The module for which the report is being generated Product Type The type of product for which the report is being generated Contract Ref No The reference number of the contract being reported Counter Party No The CIF ID of the customer involved Counter Party This is the name of the customer involved Name User Def Status The status if the user defined elements Event Date The date on which the event took place Seq No The sequence number of the event Event Description The description of the event Contract Status The status of the contract i e active closed etc Maker ID The identification number of the maker Checker ID the identification number of the checker Reversed Seq No The reversed sequence number 35 11 Core Exception Report This report gives details about core exception in Core Exception screen To invoke this screen type CSRPEXCP in the field
271. of a customer portfolio transfer or a bank merger the accounts will be transferred to the corresponding branch For further details on customer portfolio transfer and bank merger refer to the sections Transferring Customer Portfolio and Merging of Branches in chapter Branch Transfer of Loans of Retail Lending user manual oF ORACLE 7 1 7 System Dates Maintenance Introduction In the System Dates Maintenance screen you maintain the system dates for your branch for instance the business date for your branch which is the booking date for all transactions input in the branch The dates screen is maintained at the branch level by the respective branches Invoke this screen by typing STDDATES in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 2 System Dates Maintenance E New E3 Enter Query Branch Code Today Previous Working Date Next Working Date Input By Authorized By Modification Date Time Date Time Number Wi Authorized Open In this screen the following fields are maintained for your branch You define today s date previous working date and next working date for the first time during installation of the system for details refer to the installation manual Suppose Oracle FLEXCUBE is installed on 1 January 1998 in your bank In the dates screen you would input the f
272. of codes Chapter 18 that you can use to represent different types of transactions Account Revaluation Maintenance explains the maintenance of Chapter 19 l parameters for account revaluation Chapter 20 Maintaining Branch Holidays explains the maintenance of the holiday P calendar for the different branches of your bank Chapter 21 Maintaining Currency Holidays explains the maintenance of the holi P day calendar for the different currencies in which your bank transacts Maintaining Clearing Holidays explains the maintenance of the holiday Chapter 22 calendar for the different clearinghouses with which your bank trans acts Document Maintenance explains about the type of documents to be Chapter 23 submitted before opening an account and the document checklist to be maintained Chapter 24 Configuring Overrides details on configuring overrides of the system Ve ORACLE Maintaining Features explains the method of installing features in a Chapter 25 branch to improve the performance of the system during online or batch processes Chapter 26 Purging Data explains the details of purging data Chapter 27 Support 24x7 explains about the 24x7 support features in FCUBS Chapter 28 Tanking of Maintenance Records explains the process of tanking maintenance records Chapter 29 External Deal Maintenance explains the process of capturing deals booked in an external system Chapter 30 Ann
273. of relationship manager 35 21 Cheque Book Issued Report You can invoke Cheque Book Issued Report screen by typing CSRPCHB in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button The screen is as shown below Cheque Book Issued Report All Branches Single Branch Branch Date Range From Date To Date Report Format v Printer At Client Report Output z Printer Branch Code You can generate this report for all the branches or a single branch alone You can indicate the branch for which the report is being generated using the following options arar ORACLE 35 21 1 e All If you choose this the system will generate the report for all the branches e Single If you choose this you need to specify the branch code for which the report should be generated The option list displays all valid branch codes maintained in the system Choose the appropriate one Date Range From Date Specify a valid date from when you wish to generate the report from the adjoining calendar To Date Specify a valid date till when you wish to generate the report from the adjoining calendar Contents of the Report The parameters specified while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the report Other content displayed in the report is as follows Header The header carries the Report Name Branch Branch Date User Id Module
274. of the following criteria Authorization Status Record Status Document Type Document Category Document Description Click Search button The system identifies all records satisfying the specified criteria and displays the following details for each one of them Authorization Status Record Status Document Type Document Category Document Description aoe ORACLE 23 4 Maintaining Document Checklist Details You can maintain the various document checklist details in the Document Checklist Maintenance screen To invoke this screen type CSDDOCHK in the field at the top right corner of the Application toolbar and click the adjoining arrow button Document Reference E New E3 Enter Query Process Code Stage Document Details 10f1 El Document Category Mandatory F Mandatory ELCs Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status Specify the following details Process Code Specify the process code The adjoining option list displays the process codes that are maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one Stage Specify the stage in which you need to maintain the checklist details Document Category Specify the document category The adjoining option list displays all the document categories that are maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one Document Type Specify the type of do
275. old amount This charge is applicable only to savings accounts and Term Deposits TD It cannot be levied on current accounts The minimum threshold amount above which Zakat will be payable is decided every year before Ramadan In addition the percentage to be applied on the capital amount for calculation of Zakat is also decided This charge is levied on the savings accounts and TD accounts at Ramadan For savings accounts Zakat is computed on the balance as on the first day of Ramadan for all active accounts The applicable amount is then deducted from the accounts In the case of TD accounts Zakat is computed whenever there is a redemption of the principal It is computed on the redeemed principal amount provided the first day of Ramadan for any one year of the TD tenor falls between the profit start date of the deposit and the maturity date For computation and collection of Zakat you need to capture the first day of Ramadan every year Maintaining Ramadan Day You can capture the first day of Ramadan for a given year in the Ramadan Day Maintenance screen This is a bank level maintenance that needs to be done at your Head Office To invoke the Ramadan Day Maintenance screen type CSDRAMDN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Ramadan Day Maintenance E New E3 Enter Query Year First Day of Ramadan Input By Aut
276. ollowing Today s date 01 JAN 1998 Previous working date 31 DEC 1997 Next working date 02 JAN 1998 After EOD for a branch is run the system will not allow you to run any other operation in the branch till a date change has been invoked If you try to run any other application you will be prompted to invoke a date change first Simultaneously two different branches can be running on two different system dates This may happen when EOD for a branch is delayed for some reason fl ORACLE Based on today s date post authorization the system computes and updates the Current financial cycle and the Current period in the Branch Parameters screen Maintaining Dates Change For maintaining date change invoke the System dates maintenance screen after EOD for the day is run Click Unlock in the Action menu or click unlock icon The system populates the default dates in the screen For instance on the first working date i e 2nd of January 1998 the system dates will be updated to Today s date 02 Jan 1998 Previous working date 01 Jan 1998 Next working date 03 Jan 1998 Today s date is defaulted from Next working date of the old record Previous working date is defaulted from today s date of the old record The Next working date is picked up from the Local branch holiday calendar as maintained by you You can modify today s date and the
277. omer in Messaging System user manual Note Customer cover messages are always generated in new format MT202COV or MT205 COV For more details on new cover message formats refer settlements user manual Indicating Rounding Preferences Rule This refers to the method to be followed for rounding off fractional units of a currency The rounding preferences available are e Truncate The amount is truncated to the number of decimals specified for the currency e Round Up The amount is rounded up based on the number of decimals and the nearest rounding unit e Round Down The amount is rounded down based on the number of decimals and the nearest rounding unit 10 6 ORACLE 10 2 2 For example Amount i before Rounding Method Na or Rounding Amount anar Decimals Unit Rounding Rounding 1234 678 Truncate 2 1234 67 1234 678 Round up to the 2 01 1234 68 nearest rounding unit 1234 678 Round down to the 2 01 1234 67 nearest rounding unit Unit If you have selected Round Up or Round Down in the Rule field you need to indicate the nearest unit to which the rounding should take place The number of units specified here should not be greater than the number of decimals allowed for the currency Example The decimal points specified for currency A is 2 Rounding unit is 05 Amount for transaction is USD 100 326 which will be rounded off depending upon the d
278. on of separating the elements To do this you may use the following punctuation marks Dash Comma Asterisk Full stop Forward slash For Check Digit The last character in the customer account mask should always be a D or d This indicates the check digit which is generated by the system When specified in the mask the check digit component is generated using either of the following methods Modulo 11 Modulo 97 Modulo 11 with Weights User Defined Algorithm If you choose Modulo 97 all components of the account mask for example the Branch Code the Account Class the CIF ID etc should be numeric For example if you enter bbb in the ale ORACLE account mask field indicating that the branch code should be part of the account number and choose the Modulo 97 option ensure that the branch code is a numeric value such as 000 123 etc Note The maximum length of twenty characters for the customer account mask is inclusive of the check digit All customer accounts that are entered in any branch of your bank will compulsorily have to conform to the mask For example you want the following elements to be part of the customer account mask The currency of the account The nature of the account savings current etc and The Customer Id Given the above criteria the customer account mask would be ACLASSCCYCIFNUMBERn D T
279. on General Ledger Description Job Status Conversion General Description Auto Authorization Ledger Conversion Transaction Code Payment Messages Floating Rate Suspense Batch Entry Details Generate 103 Proceed without Suspense Entry Required Default Bank Operation maintaining float rate Suspense Transaction Code Sector Code Code Branch Code for Clearing Routing No Suspense Batch Number Clearing Through Branch Deferred Statement Reverse Suspense Entry Loan Direct Debit Sans Days Generation Days Install Installation Required v Maximum Real Suspense Amount Maximum Cont Suspense Amount Preferences SWIFT Address AccountMask CIF Range GlobalinterdictFunctions Tax Branch Currency Fields Maker Date Time Mod No Checker Record Status Date Time Authorization Status a ORACLE 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 2 5 1 5 3 Specifying Suspense GL The accounting entries generated by different modules of Oracle FLEXCUBE will be passed into the specified Suspense GL account if e The GL into which the entries are to be passed is not defined or e Ifthe GL has been closed Suspense GLs are of two types Real Suspense GL Local and Foreign Currency The accounting entries that belong to asset liability income or expense GL categories will be passed to the Real suspense GL To indicate the real suspense GL for a branch click option list and select a GL code from the option list Contingent Suspense GL Loc
280. ons available are System Date Relative Match Relative Closed Match Closed External Statement Retention Period The retention period as the term suggests is the period for which data is stored in the system For each module in Oracle FLEXCUBE you can specify the retention period When you run the purge process on any given day only the data that is beyond the retention period that you specified will be purged The following example illustrates this concept For example The requirement You would like to retain foreign exchange contracts that were liquidated 60 days prior to the running of the purge process in the system That is if the current system date is 30 June 1999 and you do not wish to purge the foreign exchange contracts that were liquidated between 1 May 1999 and 30 June 1999 Solution In the Retention Period field enter 60 note this value is expressed in days and in the Status field choose the Liquidated option Result If this setup is authorised and you run the purge process on 30 June 1999 the current system date all foreign exchange contracts that you liquidated prior to 1 May 1999 will be purged Contracts that were liquidated on or after 1 May 1999 will not be purged Entity Purging In entity purging you can archive or purge the data from the main tables and its child tables You can also configure the purge type and the frequency of data purging There are
281. onth therefore you would divide the financial cycle into monthly periods The financial year and the accounting periods are referred to in the Oracle FLEXCUBE system as the Financial Cycle and the Financial Periods respectively and are maintained at the bank level by your Head Office branch At the end of each financial period and financial cycle you can generate profit and loss statement and a balance sheet The system also offers you the flexibility of keeping a financial period financial cycle open allowing you to post adjustments to it and obtain a revised profit or loss statement balance sheet You can maintain these details in the Period Code Maintenance screen Invoking Period Code Maintenance Screen You can invoke this screen by typing STDPRCDE in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button The screen appears as shown below Period Code Maintenance E New Enter Query Financial Cycle Financial Cycle Description Start Date End Date Period Group 1 0f1 Period Code Start Date End Date A Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status 16 1 ORACLE In this screen you define the following e The financial cycle of your bank giving the start date and end date of each financial year e The period group financial periods into which each financial cycle
282. or code using Overrides Conversion screen Overrides Maintenance Branch Code Function id New Error Code EJ You can enter the following details Branch Code Specify the branch code If ALL is specified in all the branches the conversion will be done However if it is maintained for a specific branch only in that branch the conversion will be done Function Id Specify function Id for which the override should be treated as error New Error Code You can map an already existing error code as the conversion error code or can use the Override Maintenance screen to define the same You are not allowed to maintain map conversion error codes for the error code which is a conversion error code Note Ifyou encounter overrides while processing the system will check if any conversion error code mapped for the override for the combination of branch and function Id If available then the system will raise the mapped error code instead of the original error code The system will allow you to map conversion codes only for the error codes with type as Override Ifa modifiable error code is changed from Override to Error then the system will delete all the conversion error codes maintained for the same 24 2 2 Maintaining Error Codes According to the requirements of your bank you can configure the system to display an error message if you have n
283. or the currencies involved in the pair will be calculated using the through currency Note While maintaining a pair involving an In currency In Out and In In you can only specify the Euro as the Through Currency Please note that you cannot main tain a Through Currency for a pair constituted by an In currency and the Euro For more details on the manner in which Oracle FLEXCUBE handles the Euro refer the chapter Handling the Euro in this manual Whenever you define a through currency for a currency pair you will not be allowed to specify the following for the pair e Number of units 12 ORACLE 13 3 1 e Spread definition Quotation Method This is the method to be followed for quoting the exchange rate There are two methods direct and indirect In the Direct method the exchange rate for the currency pair is quoted as follows Buy rate mid rate buy spread Sell rate mid rate sell spread Ccy 1 Rate x Ccy 2 In the Indirect method the exchange rate for the currency pair is quoted as follows Buy rate mid rate buy spread Sell rate mid rate sell spread Ccy 2 Rate x Ccy 1 Example The market follows the direct quote convention for the currency pair USD DEM e g 1USD 1 6051DEM To maintain this pair you would specify currency 1 as USD and currency 2 as DEM and specify direct in this field For the USD GBP pair which
284. ort Output Print Printer 35 23 1 Contents of the Report The contents of the report are discussed under the following heads Header The header carries the Report Name Branch Branch Date User Id Module Run Date and Time So ORACLE Body of the Report Field Name Field Description Account Number Indicates the account number Account Name This indicates the name of the account Currency Indicates the currency of the account Amount Indicates the amount Instrument Number Indicates the instrument number Bank Name Indicates the name of the bank Clearing Date Indicates the date of clearing Value Date Indicates the value date of the demand draft Maker ID Indicates the identification of the maker of the record Maker Date Stamp Indicates the date when the record was created Reference Number Indicates the reference number 35 24 Temporary Overdraft Report You can invoke Temporary Overdraft Report screen by typing CSRTEMOD in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Imie ORACLE The screen is as shown below Temporary Overdraft Report Branch Details Customer All Customer Type Bank Single Corporate Branch Code Individual AIl Report Format PDF Printer At Client Report Output Print Printer Branch Code You c
285. ose the dealing currencies are USD and AUD 1USD 1 4166 AUD for Standard rate type Mid rate being 1 4166 Now to arrive at the spread the bank will use the following formula Spread 5 100 x Mid rate 1 4166 0 07083 Using the points system suppose the point quoted by the bank is 708 3 The points multiplier in this case would be 0 0001 depends on the decimal points that the mid rate extends to Usually it is 4 decimal places Spread Points 708 3 x Points Multiplier 0 0001 Now coming to the buy and sale rate computing there are two ways of computing the buy and sale rates Direct and Indirect Depending upon the quotation method you have specified in the Currency pair screen the system computes the spreads In the Direct method the buy and sell rates are calculated as follows Buy Rate Mid Rate Buy Spread Sell Rate Mid Rate Sell Spread For cross currency contracts the rate for the currency pair is 1 unit of Ccy 1 Rate 1 unit of Ccy 2 In the Indirect method the buy and sell rates are calculated as follows Buy Rate Mid Rate Buy Spread Sell Rate Mid Rate Sell Spread For cross currency contracts the rate for the currency pair is 1 unit of Ccy 2 Rate 1 unit of Ccy 2 The method of spread definition percentage or points that you have maintained for the currency pair is displayed on this screen Maintaining Currency Margins for Customer For each customer of your bank you ca
286. ot opted for batch balancing at the time of opening a batch aeg ORACLE This is indicated in the Overrides Maintenance screen before opening a batch You can invoke the Overrides Maintenance screen by typing CSDOVDMT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Overrides Maintenance ENew E3 Enter Query Language Language Description Error details Error Code Message Type Ignore Confirm Function Parameters Batch Type Ignore v Fields Conversion Input By Authorized By Modification Date Time Date Time Number W Authorized W Open According to your instructions in the Overrides Maintenance screen Oracle FLEXCUBE will either e Display an error message if balancing is not allowed at the time of opening a batch system will allow you to enter the details of the journal entry only if the option Balancing is checked e Display an override message reminding that the batch that has been opened will not be balanced even if the option Balancing is unchecked system will display an override and allows you to proceed further and enter the journal entry details e Ignore your selection for the option Balancing System will not display an error message or override irrespective of your selection for the option Balancing and you can proceed to
287. ount number No Debits Gives no debit status of the account number 3528 ORACLE Stop Payments Gives the accounts stop pay status Statement Cycle Gives the account statement cycle Statement Day Gives the account statement day Statement Type Gives account statement type Alternate Account Number Gives an alternative account number Branch Code Gives the branch code Currency Currency Customer Number Gives customer number Nominee Gives the first nominee details Nominee2 Gives the second nominee details Account Type Gives the account type Dr GL Gives all debit balances within a specific account class Cr GL Gives all credit balances within a specific account class Dr HO Line In this all accounts belonging to account class will report if they move to the status being defined Cr HO Line In this all accounts belonging to account class will report if they move to the status being defined Dr CB Line This is a GL to which all debit accounts belonging to an account class should report to Cr CB Line This is a GL to which all credit accounts belonging to an account class should report to ATM Facility Availability of ATM facility Cheque Book Facility Availability of cheque book facility Passbook Facility Availability of passbook facility Previous Statement Date Gives the date of the previous statement
288. ounts the Direct Posting flag in the Chart of Accounts maintenance must be turned OFF Note Additionally it is also recommended that these Control Account GL s that you have spec ified in the Bank Wide Parameters screen for the mismatch entries are not used as part of Role to Head Mapping in any of the products If maintained the system would pass mis match adjustment entries into the same GLs in which the main entries have been passed There is no system enforced validation of this and this aspect needs to be taken care of during Product set up Generating Automatic Balancing Entries In the case of transactions entered in any of the front end modules of Oracle FLEXCUBE the accounting process checks the entries at each business event and automatically generates the balancing entries in case of a mismatch in currency or value date entries or both Manually entered journal entries In the case of manually entered journal entries a journal batch that has been opened must be closed before it is authorized During closure the accounting process checks to see that the batch is balanced with respect to currency and value date entries If a mismatch is detected the accounting process raises an override to this effect Depending upon how the override is configured for your bank the user who has opened the batch could adopt either of the following courses of action e Ifthe override is configured to be an error the system
289. plied to all the branches under it Mudarabah Fund Shareholder Balance Type Specify whether the system should consider the month end balance or the monthly average balance of the GL to compute the shareholders investment in the linked Mudarabah fund Choose from the following options available in the drop down list e Monthly Average Balance e Month End Balance The option specified here will be common to all the shareholder GLs identified under the Mudarabah fund and once Mudarabah fund shareholder balance type is input and authorized it will not be allowed to modify later Staff Account Restriction Required Check this option to apply staff account restriction at the bank level Auto Account Closure Check this box to enable Account Auto Closure functionality If you select Node from the option list you will need to maintain CIF masks at the Node level in the Node wise CIF Mask Maintenance screen This would ensure that the branches maintained in different nodes instances have different CIF masks Aar ORACLE Click Nodewise CIF mask Maintenance button to access this screen The screen appears as shown below Node wise CIF Mask Maintenance CIF Mask CIF Mask Auto Generate CIF You can specify the following details here Nodes This indicates the node instance for which the CIF mask is required Select a node from the option list provided Customer Identification File Mask This indicates the
290. project level the system will not create the lines In case auto creation of lines is not chosen then you need to manually create limit lines and link them in this screen Serial Number Specify the line serial of the credit line Currency The system displays the line currency After specifying the PPC amount click on CALC button The will calculate the sponsor margin and the bank margin and arrive at the sponsor amount and the lendable amount respectively S218 ORACLE 33 4 3 Maintaining PPC Liquidation You can maintain the liquidation details in the PPC screen where in you can choose the payment of the loan or credit to the project account This transaction is logged in the PPC To invoke the PPC Liquidation screen type STDPPCLQ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button PPC Liquidation E New amp Enter Query PPC Liquidation Project ID Project Name PPC Id PPC Description Serial No Branch Code Loan Account Number Entry Number Currency Amount Maker Checker Mod No Project ID Specify the project ID Project Name Date Time Date Time Record Status Authorization Status The system displays the name of the project ID selected PPC ID Specify the PPC ID PPC Description The system displays the description for the PPC ID selected Loan Account Number Specify the loan or the account num
291. pute the exchange rate between GBP NLG In the absence of a direct exchange rate the system will look for a through currency to compute the rate If a through currency has not been maintained then the default local currency will be picked up as the through currency to compute the rate for a currency pair Maintaining Parameters for Currency Pair Currency Pair A currency pair specified as Currency1 and Currency2 in the Currency Pair screen represents the two currencies for which you need to maintain exchange rates To specify the pair choose from the list provided against Currency1 Select the pair for which you want to maintain parameters The pair should be selected according to the quotation method followed by the market which could be direct or indirect for details refer to the field quotation method Exchange rates can be defined for currency1 against currency2 or currency2 against currency1 The descriptions of the respective currencies are displayed below Through Currency If the exchange rate for a particular currency pair is not to be maintained specify the Through Currency via which the exchange rate between the currencies should be calculated To maintain a through currency for a currency pair check against the box Through Currency Then choose from the list codes provided against Code Select the currency code which you want to specify as the through currency The exchange rate f
292. quivalent Euro values of amounts in an In currency The locked in exchange rates defined for the Euro against the In currency will be used for currency conversions The reports with this feature are the e Currency Position report e Cash Flow report e FX Maturity report 10 19 ORACLE 10 4 8 Note These reports will not furnish the In currency and equivalent Euro values when you close the In currencies and choose the Euro Closed option for the Euro in the Currency Definition screen All advices that provide In currency details will also provide the equivalent Euro values Account Statements Statements provided for accounts in an In currency provide the Euro equivalent values of the following e The opening balance e The closing balance e Every transaction Maintaining Limits Type You can maintain various limit types and their values through the Limits Types Maintenance screen For example you can define and maintain various Limit types like price codes collateral types and price through this screen You can invoke this screen by typing LMDTYPES in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button The screen is as shown below E New E3 Enter Query Type Description Input By Authorized By Modification Date Time Date Time Number Wi Authorized E Op
293. r s of CIF is tracked for re use only in the following scenarios Ifthe user cancels without saving new customer maintenance 28 ORACLE Ifthe user deletes a new customer before authorizing it Unused customer account is regenerated on next day post cancelling or deleting Re generate unused CASA no Check this box to indicate that the unused CASA number needs to be re generated automatically Note Unused sequence number s of CASA is tracked for re use only in the following scenarios Ifthe user cancels without saving a new CASA maintenance Ifthe user deletes a new CASA before authorizing it The sequence numbers marked during delete operation is re used in ascending or der The sequence numbers marked during cancel operation is reused only from next working day to prevent concurrency issues Auto Generate CIF Numbers This indicates whether or not the CIF should be generated automatically Check this box to indicate the CIF number needs to be generated automatically Note Unused sequence number s of CIF is tracked for re use only if the CIF is generated auto matically Copy Exchange Rates to Branches Exchange rates are maintained for a currency pair and are used to calculate the equivalent of one currency against the other These exchange rates can be maintained in each branch or at the Head office You can indicate your preference If you check against the option Copy to Br
294. r field Specifying Revaluation Position Transfer Details You can transfer the currency positions from the individual branches to the designated branch during EOD The system transfers the position from the existing branch to the treasury branch When the position is negative in the given GL then the system will choose the Offset account as Position asset GL and when the position is positive in the given GL then the system will choose the Offset account as Position liability GL Sequence of the EOD between the designated branch and all other branches are operationally controlled You can maintain the following revaluation position transfer details Transfer Type Select the transfer type from the drop down list Following are the options available in the drop down list e Position e Reval Note Ifthe Transfer Type field is left blank then neither the position transfer nor revaluation transfer to the designated branch will be done For position transfer the Inter Branch in Local Currency check box in the Transac tion Code maintenance screen should be checked to avoid creating position due to IB posting Transfer Branch The system will identify the branch to which the revaluation position transfer should be done During account GL revaluation process the system considers this branch and the GL to pass one leg of the revaluation profit and loss entries The other leg of the entries will be passed based on the
295. r which you are defining denominations e A unique code to identify each denomination of the currency For example you can assign D1 D10 D50 for USD 1 10 50 e A description of the denomination unit e The denomination type coin or note e The value of the denomination in relation to one unit of the currency It could be a fraction for coins For example for the currency USD you can maintain the denominations as follows CURRENCY DENM DESCRIPTIO VALU NOTE CODE CODE N E COIN 11 1 ORACLE 11 2 0 1 USD D100 100 dollars 100 00 NOTE USD D50 50 dollars 50 00 NOTE USD D20 20 dollars 20 00 NOTE USD D10 10 dollars 10 00 NOTE USD D5 5 dollars 5 00 NOTE USD D1N 1 dollar Note 1 00 NOTE USD DiC 1 dollar Coin 1 00 COIN USD C25 25 cents 0 25 COIN USD C10 10 cents 0 10 COIN USD C5 5 cents 0 05 COIN USD C1 1 cent 0 01 COIN Denomination type Millionaire certificate is used to facilitate MC LMC Millionaire Certificate transactions You can have only one denomination with denomination type as Notes and the currency code should be the LCY code of each country Operations Allowed in the Currency Denomination Screen Following standard maintenance operations are possible in the Currency Denomination screen e Add e Modify e Delete e Authorize e Close e Re open e Inquiry e Logs all maintenances in the Audit Trail ORACLE 12 1
296. ransactions that are tanked would be released with tanked status as No and advices and payment messages if suppressed would be generated For the process that started when the branch available status was Yes then the Status change to No cannot be changed till the completion of the process This is applicable for DE Batch upload process 27 1 4 Processing Different Categories during EOD During EOD batch process the categories like maintenance and financial transaction process are explained below 27 1 4 1 Processing Maintenance The maintenance process includes e New Customer Creation e Customer Amendment e Customer Closure e New Account Creation e Account Amendment e Account Closure Creating Customers While creating customer if the branch available status is no then the creation date gets set to next branch working date The customer details report requests are accepted and the processing of the same starts only during the next branch available status The report would include the customer creation date also Creating Customer Accounts The customer account creation requests are processed with the tanked status as Yes if the branch is not available for transaction and these accounts are not considered for Interest amp Charges calculation process ate ORACLE 27 1 4 2 After the branch is available after the date change process tanked status gets changed to No and initiation entries of term depo
297. rce Code Module Description Transaction Limit Currency Product Code Customer Type All Product Description Product Transaction Limit Details 1 Of 1 Transaction Limit Level of Authorization Minimum Authorization Limit Cumulative ELCs Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status Module Identification Each module in Oracle FLEXCUBE is identified by a code First you have to identify the module for which the currency wise transactional limit is to be maintained A list of all the modules operational at your bank will be displayed in the option list You can choose the appropriate module code 10 21 ORACLE 10 4 9 1 Module Description The description associated with the module will be defaulted in the adjacent field Product Code Each module contains a number of products within it After you identify the module indicate the product within the module for which you would like to maintain a currency wise transactional limit You can select the appropriate product code from the option list In the Product Transactional Limits screen you can maintain the limits for e A specific module and a specific product e A specific module and all products select ZALL as the Product Code e All modules Select AL as the Module Code and all products Product Description The description associated with the module will be defaulted in the adjacent fiel
298. rd gets tanked till it gets authorized and the actual re opening happens after the All unauthorized modifications get displayed when you click Authorize menu option You can select a modification number and the records get authorized till that modification These records are un tanked and their status gets updated as Authorized You can authorize the All unauthorized records will be available for deletion You can select a modification number and system deletes all unauthorized modifications from the selected modification number If the modifications getting deleted are made by a user other than the current user the system All summary screens display data retrieved from both the summary data source and the table 28 2 2 Tanking Modified Records Authorization status as Unauthorized 28 2 3 Closing a Record closure gets authorized 28 2 4 Re opening a Record authorization 28 2 5 Authorizing a Record modifications partially if required 28 2 6 Deleting a Record displays an error message 28 2 7 Viewing Summary of Records that contains the unauthorized tanked records 28 2 8 Modifying Tanking Preferences You can modify the tanking preferences specified for a function Id if required This modification is possible only if all records related to that function Id are in Authorized status ae ORACLE 29 External Deal Maintenance 29 1 Introduction You can capture the details of a deal booked in
299. re Amount Credit Lines In the Limits screen of the Limits Maintenance module the following fields will reflect the new values e Credit Line Currency e Tenor limits e Tenor utilization e All Related Amounts Customer Limits In the Customer Maintenance screen of the Core Services module the following fields will be updated at BOD e Limit Currency e Liability Risk Limit e Customer Risk Limit Tiy ORACLE 10 4 4 Note Once the conversion process is complete the advices generated for your customer will car ry the following information The Old Value The New Value And the Exchange Rate used for the conversion As a consequence of currency re denomination you will not be able to pass entries where the value date falls before the currency conversion date Specifying Preferred ERI Currency for Counterparty For a counterparty and currency combination you can maintain a preferred ERI currency You can state this preference in the Settlement Instructions screen The Implication During the transition period settlements of components in In currencies can be made either in the same currency or in the Euro EUR depending on the settlement account s maintained Similarly components in Euro can either be settled in EUR or in an In currency In the settlement messages that are generated MT 100 MT202 the settlement amount would be reported in the Settlement Account Currency How
300. released with transaction date moved to next work ing date TD Account Processed partially Transaction status is un Redemption tanked and accounting entries if any would be un tanked Account Closure Not Allowed Processed normally Funds Transfer Transaction Accounting entries would be posted with tanked status Transaction Accounting entries are un tanked and processed Payments and Col lection Transaction Accounting entries would be posted with tanked status Transaction Accounting entries are un tanked and processed Retail Teller Trans actions Transaction Accounting entries would be posted with tanked status Transaction Accounting entries are un tanked and processed Clearing Transac tions Transaction Accounting entries would be posted with tanked status Transaction Accounting entries are un tanked and processed Instrument Trans actions Transaction Accounting entries would be posted with tanked status Transaction Accounting entries are un tanked and processed Utility Payment Transactions Transaction Accounting entries would be posted with tanked status Transaction Accounting entries are un tanked and processed 27 7 ORACLE 28 Tanking of Maintenance Records 28 1 Introduction The maintenance records that are created or modified in the system can be tanked till they get authorized so that it is possible t
301. rgin specified over the mid rate when you buy currency 1 for currency2 You can define the buy spread in two ways either in points or in percentage The system computes the effective buy spread for you Sale Spread This is the sell spread for a currency pair It can be defined as the profit margin specified over the mid rate when you sell currency 1 for currency 2 You can define the sell spread either in points or in percentage The system computes the effective sell spread for you Buy Rate Buy rate is the rate of exchange for a currency pair which is computed by the system based upon the mid rate the spread specified the spread definition and the quotation method maintained in the Currency definition screen Sale Rate Sell rate is the rate of exchange for a currency pair which is computed by the system based upon the mid rate the spread specified the spread definition and the quotation method maintained in the Currency definition screen You can also input the buy and sell rate for a currency pair In which case the system will compute the spread for the rate type Rate Date This is a display field When you enter the exchange rate for a currency pair the system will default the Rate Date as the Application Date The rate date will always be less than or equal to the application date Rate Serial This is a running serial number for the Rate Date You need to specify the serial number You entry will be va
302. rip tion This is the description of the account Event This is the event triggered on the transaction Fcy Amount This is the transaction amount in a foreign currency Exchange Rate This is the exchange rate used if the transaction is in any other currency Lcy Amount This is the transaction amount in local currency Auth ID This is the user ID of the user who authorized the transaction Total Debits Total amount debited under the respective user product and module Total Credits Total amount credited under the respective user product and module Grand Total Deb its This is the grand total amount of all the debit transaction grouped by transaction code and user Grand Total Cred its This is the grand total amount of all the credit transaction grouped by transaction code and user Cash Flow Report The Cash flow report gives details of the cash flow by accounts or by account class The report contains details of the Account Number or Account Class and the list of Accounts or Account Classes You can invoke this screen by typing ACRPCASH in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button The screen is as shown below Cash Flow Report Report Name ReportType Summary Include Call Notice Contracts Detail Notice Contracts Call Contracts Select Account Class Account All Records Ac
303. ription Currency 2 Currency Description Through Currency Through Currency Currency Code Number Of Units One Currency Name Hundred Quotation Method Direct Thousand Indirect Spread Definition Percentage Points Multiplier Points Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status System Features From among the currencies maintained in the currency screen the system builds all possible combinations of currencies in pairs For example if you have maintained the following currency codes USD YEN The system will give you a choice of defining parameters for the following pairs e USD INR e USD YEN e INR USD e INR YEN 13 1 ORACLE 13 3 e YEN USD e YEN INR It is however not obligatory to define parameters for all these pairs A currency pair needs to be maintained only if e You want to define a direct exchange rate for the pair for frequently traded currencies like INR USD or USD GBP or USD JPY for which market quotes are available e You want to define a through currency for the pair for those currencies which are not so well traded market quotes may not be available Therefore you can route the conversion rate for the pair via a through currency For example in the case of GBP NLG for which a direct exchange rate may not be available you can define a through currency say USD The exchange rate between GBP USD and NLG USD will be picked up by the system to com
304. rizer which should be greater than the user who is input the transaction For such overrides if you have specified that no online authorization is required the user can accept the override and it will not require any online authorization Error This would indicate that when an exception occurs an override message would be displayed and the transaction cannot be processed further that is it would stop being processed until the exception is corrected Online Authorization This would indicate that an override message would be displayed seeking confirmation from the user However in this case online authorization would be required as a mandatory procedure if the override were accepted Dual Authorization This would indicate that an override message would be displayed seeking confirmation from the user However in this case online authorization would be required as a mandatory procedure if the override were accepted Also at least two authorizers would be needed to authorize the transaction ano ORACLE 24 2 Override Types for Batch Functions For exceptions occurring during execution of automatic or batch processes you can assign the Ignore Override or Error sensitivities Specifying Override Type In the Overrides Maintenance screen all the error messages that would appear in each module with their respective error codes are displayed The functions with respect to which the error messages could b
305. rner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button The screen appears as shown below Product Max Limit EbNew amp Enter Query Branch Code Module Code Product Code Currency 1 Currency 2 Limit Details Rate Code Limit Currency Limit Amount Input By Authorized By Modification Date Time Date Time Number WB Authorized H Open 1a ORACLE 14 1 4 1 14 1 4 2 Branch Code You must specify the branch for which the limit amount will be applicable You can specify that the limits must be applicable for all branches Module Code You must specify the module for which the limit amount will be applicable You can indicate that these limits must be applicable for both the Data Entry DE and Funds Transfer FT modules Product Code You must specify the product transactions involving which the limit amount will be applicable You can specify that the limits must be applicable for all products Currency 1 You need to specify the currency1 applicable for defining the Transaction Amount limit beyond which the system will not default the Auto Exchange Rate All valid currencies defined in the Currency Pair Maintenance will appear for selection This currency is always the transaction currency of the contract Currency2 You need to specify the currency2 applicable for defining the Transa
306. ro type account Local currency of the current branch and the target branch are different in case of individual account transfer Minor age limit is different for the current branch and target branch os ORACLE 6 4 Note Staff restriction account class restriction and branch restriction are applicable while maintaining details of individual account transfer You can mark for rerun the accounts with status Error by clicking Resubmit but ton Such accounts are processed during EOD operations on the next day Transferring Account Class You can transfer all accounts that belong to an account class from one branch to another using Account Branch Class Transfer screen To invoke this screen type CSDACLTR at the top right corner of the Application toolbar and click the adjoining arrow button Account Class Branch Transfer EX New amp Enter Query Transfer ID Target Branch Account Class Target Branch Name Account Class Description Transfer Date Current Branch Code Current Branch Name Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status Specify the following details Transfer ID The system generates a unique transfer ID This will be used as a unique identifier of the account class transfer Current Branch Code Specify the current branch of the account class On processing the transfer the system will move the accounts
307. rred from the old main line to the new main line and the effect cascades to the ultimate parent line But existing records are not changed or updated Existing data will not reflect the change in the liability number for a customer e Revaluation has no effect on the limits history data e Limits history is not maintained country wise The data is archived during the EOD processing The history data is not updated for holidays Note If there is no change for a liability limit line data is not archived for that day Note This option can be enabled or disabled at any point of time Limits history will be recorded with effect from the day the option is enabled Disabling the option will however not auto matically purge history data ae ORACLE You have the option of querying Liability history and drilling down to Limits Line history and further drilling down to Contract wise Utilization history Clean risk data is displayed only as of the date of query and history for the same is not maintained Branch wise Limits This option indicates whether or not the limits tracking must be done at the branch level If this box is checked you will be allowed to view change only the lines created from that branch for a given liability To illustrate if you open any credit line facility in branch BR1 then in the Limit Restriction screen the only branch available will be BR1 Checking this option will also allow you to View det
308. rt information on the branch code the branch date the user ID the module name the date and time at which the report was generated and the page number of the report Body of the report The details of the uncollected funds that would be displayed in the report are as follows Field Name Field Description Currency This is the currency for which transaction details is being reported Revaluation Rate This is the revaluation rate Account This is the account for which transaction details is being reported Description This is the description provided Account Revalued This is the revalued account Account Balance This indicated the account balance LCY Equivalent before revaluation This indicates the amount equivalent to local currency before revaluation LCY Equivalent after revaluation This indicates the amount equivalent to local currency after revaluation Profit Loss This is the profit or loss incurred Profit Loss Amount This is the profit or loss amount P amp L Account This is the profit or loss account Currency This is the currency for which transaction details is being reported Rate This is the revaluation rate Category This is the GL category 35 20 ORACLE 35 14 Accounts Movement Report This report gives details of the movement of the accounts for that particular day You can invoke this screen by typing ACRP
309. ry No say in case the contractor did not receive money due to contractual terms elapse etc The system will display an override message when such an input is made 15 Partial liquidation of PPC is allowed and they will be tracked In case Entry No is provided loan payment will be considered only to the extent of PRINCIPAL payment and other component payments will not be considered 16 Project closure activities include Liquidating PPCs Marking PPCs as closed All PPCs should be liquidated before they are closed Closing all lines associated with the project Manually created lines can be closed using the close button in the facility screen Auto created lines created by system will be auto closed on the event of complete repayment and complete PPC liquidation Manually closing project account All lines associated with the project account should be closed All PPCs should be closed Manually closing project All lines associated with the project should be closed Commitment contracts will be auto closed on commitment maturity date through CL batch Event CLOC Closure of commitment contracts before closure of project will have to be operationally controlled Maintaining Project Financing Transaction Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to maintain the project finance transaction in a bank with the details of the project undertaken with the contract You can maintain these details using Project Detail and Maintenance scr
310. s Note The current financial cycle code and the current period code are displayed in the Branch Parameters Screen All details maintained in the Period Code Screen will automatically apply to any new branch if incorporated to your bank post maintenance of this screen The status of all periods in the new branch will be open System Functions The system offers you the flexibility of posting transactions into a previous accounting period which has passed its due end date For example lets assume your bank s financial cycle extends from 1st January to 31st December the first period starts on 1 01 96 ends on 31 03 96 Even beyond 31 03 96 you can keep the period open to be able to post for example expense bills you expect to receive in April After you have posted all adjustments you can close the period Even after you have closed the last accounting period of a year the system offers you the flexibility of posting adjustments to the financial year For each financial year the system generates an open status period called FIN Its start and end dates coincide with the last date of the financial cycle Into this one day period you can post the accumulated profits and loss for the financial cycle general reserves and statutory reserves for the current year after paying off the dividends After this one day period is closed the status of the financial cycle in the made by field status is displayed as closed With
311. s of OD accounts sequence Maintaining Dormancy Parameter Details You can maintain the dormant statuses for the customer account in the Dormancy Parameter Maintenance screen To invoke this screen type STDSTDOR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and click the adjoining arrow button Transaction Branch Select the appropriate branch from the list of branches available in the option list This screen will be available only for those users who has Multi Branch Operational check box enabled at User Maintenance Screen While clicking Ok button the system validates the access rights of the selected branch and function for the user If you don t have appropriate rights on the selected branch and function the system would raise an error message If you select a valid branch the system updates the same as transaction branch and the transaction would be posted for this branch Note The system performs the action level access rights validation only on Save operation wa ORACLE After selecting the Transaction Branch you can enter the remaining details in the Dormancy Parameter Maintenance screen Account Status Maintenance FE New amp Enter Query Branch Code Customer A C No Debit No Credit C Frozen Dormant Dormant Parameter Credit Debit Manual Any Remarks Change Log ELCs Date Time Checker Date Time
312. s system defaults the customer number here GL Class Specify the GL Class The adjoining option list displays a list of all the valid GL class codes and their description You can choose the appropriate one Note You can also select ALL as an option This indicates that all the GL codes are allowed for this branch Specifying ATM Details Specify the following details ATM Branch Specify the ATM branch Institution Identification Your bank may have a branch or multiple branches for different countries You have to capture the identification code that uniquely identifies your bank branch in the ATM transactions interchange environment Specify a code to identify the institution This institution ID will help identify whether a particular transaction has been sent from an external network or whether it has originated from your bank branch 4 ORACLE 5 1 4 2 Inter Branch Transaction Code You can specify the Transaction Code through which accounting entries for inter branch transactions should be settled Customer Transfer Check this option to indicate that transfer transaction should be permitted through the ATM Specifying Address Details For each branch of your bank you maintain the following parameters Branch Address Input the address of location of the branch Each line can have a maximum of 35 characters BIC Input the SWIFT address for a branch using 8 or 11 characters alphanumeric Telex
313. s Record Status Entity Id Description In the above screen you can base your queries on any or all of the following parameters and fetch records e Authorization Status e Entity Id e Record Status Select any or all of the above parameters for a query and click Search button The system displays the records meeting the selected criteria e Authorization Status e Record Status e Entity Id e Description Processing Ad hoc Purge You can process ad hoc purge through Ad hoc Purge Process screen An entity configured as automatic can also be started from this screen However this would not change the regular frequency cycle of the entity The next purge date is not effected or changed if started from 207 ORACLE this screen To invoke this screen type AEDPGOFP in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button Adhoc Purge Process amp enter query Entity Id Purge Frequency Weekly Number of Threads Description Next Purge Date Last Purge Date Query 1 Of 1 F Filter Name Column Data Type Operator RHS Maker Date Time Mod No Checker Date Time Record Status Authorization Status Entity Id Select the entity ID from the adjoining option list Purge Frequency The system displays the purge frequency Number of Threads The system displays the number of parallel streams in which the purge should be run However you can modify it
314. s for purging the data through Purge Parameter Configuration Maintenance screen You can query and modify entities in this screen However new operation is not allowed To invoke this screen type STDPGMNT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Purge Parameter Configuration amp Enter Query Entity id Description Purge Frequency Daily Last Purge Date Next Purge Date Query Commit Frequency 1 Of 1 Filter Name Column Data Type LeftHand Side Operator RightHand Side Branch Restriction Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status The following details are captured in this screen aoa ORACLE Entity Id Select the entity Id from the adjoining option list Purge Frequency Select the frequency of purge from the adjoining drop down list The available options are e Ad hoc If the frequency is selected as Adhoc then this particular entity will not be picked up for purging in the batch purge This entity can be purged only by the Adhoc Purge option e Daily The purge routine for the entity having daily frequency will run daily e Weekly The purge routine for the entity having weekly frequency will run every week The day of the week will be determined based on the purge start date If the purge start day is a Monday then the purge routine runs on every Monday If
315. s transaction code The system defaults to immediate which means that funds will be immediately available for withdrawal the immediate option on the screen Example Teller Transaction For all Clearing transactions you have the option to specify as to when will funds be made available for withdrawal Click the desired option Click On Value Date option if you want funds to be available on the date the transaction became effective Example A loan or a deposit Incase you want to specify the number of days after which funds should be available for withdrawal click on the option After Days Enter the number in the box It could be any two digit positive integer from 1 to 99 This option will make funds available for all transactions posted under this code on the specified date from the value date Example Demand Draft When you click the last option that is After Days with New Value Date and enter the number of days in the box then the original value date of the contract will take a new value date This new value date old value date the number of days input by the user in the box against the option Example Future dated funds transfer The difference between the third and fourth option being that in the latter case the old value date changes while in the former the value date does not change Ha ORACLE 18 2 1 2 18 2 1 3 Intra day Release If you want uncollected funds on a transaction posted using the transaction co
316. saction type e Description of the transaction type e The interval after which funds should be made available after the transaction Teel ORACLE 18 2 1 e Preferences regarding charges to be levied or not on number of transaction counts and total turnover amounts e Preference stating whether a transactions booked under this code should cause an account marked as dormant by the system to be re instated to active e Preference whether payment for a transactions posted under this code should be made through cheque e Preference indicating whether payment for a transaction booked under this code should be considered for Escrow transfer processing Maintaining Transaction Details The following parameters need to be maintained for a transaction type Transaction Code This is the code you assign to a transaction type This code identifies the type of transaction Enter 3 characters Alphanumeric For example for all transfer charges transaction you can give the code as TCT for incoming telex transfer you can input ITT In case you want to assign numeric codes only then for ease of operation similar transaction types should be grouped into a range For example you can set a range for all Money Market transactions say A1 A30 a different range for Bills and Collections B1 B30 and so on Description This is the description of the transaction type Enter the description using a maximum of 35 characters alphanumeric For
317. scription Customer Number Based on the account selected the system displays the customer number Customer Name Based on the customer number selected the system displays the name of the customer Once you have captured the details save the record The system will process the account transfer on the transfer date ca ORACLE 6 3 1 Viewing Account Branch Transfer Details You can search and view the details of account branch transfer using Branch Transfer Log screen To invoke this screen type CSDACLOG in the field at the top right corner of the Application toolbar and click the adjoining arrow button Branch Transfer Log E New E3 Enter Query Transfer Reference Number Source Branch Account Number Target Branch Transfer Date Status Customer No Account Class Error Details 1 Of 1 Error Code Error Message You can search for the account transfer details based on one or more of the following parameters I Transfer ID Account number Transfer date Customer number Source current branch Target branch Status of the transfer record Success Error Account class Once you have set the search parameters click search button The system displays the account transfers that match the search criteria Double click a record to view the details Note The system will not process the account transfer in the following circumstances The account is a Nost
318. se as settlement accounts Here you need to specify the range of numbers available for such auto created accounts by mentioning a start and an end number If you wish to retain the facility of auto creation of current accounts at loan initiation you will have to ensure that the account number mask does not have any user input character Note The range of numbers specified for the creation of current accounts should not overlap with the range specified for the creation of deposit or contra deposit account Fund account number ranges are enabled only in the fund branch Maintaining Customer Number Range You can specify a number range based on which the customers of your bank will be assigned CIF numbers for identification Since the number range is maintained at the branch level you can specify different number ranges for different branches of your bank To maintain the number range click the CIF Range in the Branch Parameters screen The Customer Number Range screen is displayed Branch Parameters CIF Range Start Customer Number End Customer Number Start Dummy Customer Number End Dummy Customer Number Specify the following in this screen Start Customer No This number is the basis on which the system generates the CIF numbers for customers of your branch The CIF number generation is determined by the following details Fis ORACLE e The CIF mask maintained in the Bank Wid
319. set as 100 When you click Query button the system validates whether Last N number of transactions is greater than the menu level MAX_RES_ROWS of the function ID ACDTRNQY If it is found greater than that then the system displays a configurable message Last N number of transactions is greater than the allowed maximum transactions to be retrieved If you do not enter the last N number of transaction and click the Query button and the number of transactions to be retrieved is greater than the menu level MAX_RES_ROWS for the function ID ACDTRNQY then the system will retrieve only the first MAX_RES_ ROWS number of transaction and display an information message Displaying only first MAX_RES_ROWS transactions The starting balance and running balance fields of the Customer Account Transac tion Query ACDTRNQY are not be applicable if you try to retrieve the Last N trans action 322A ORACLE 34 Error and Error Codes for Project Financing Error and Error Codes Validation Error Code Description System should not allow entering ST PPC 001 Max limit for number of PPCs if the total of PPC s already PPCs exhausted entered exceeds the allowed Whenever there is a change inthe ST CONO03 Decreasing number of of PPC s the system should vali PPCs not allowed date whether the change is an increase or decrease It should only allow an i
320. settlement amount in both the settlement account currency and an ERI currency If you opt to furnish the ERI value of the amount you have to enter the following in the Settlement Details screen e The ERI currency e The ERI Amount The screen appears as shown below on clicking Settlements button in the contract screen Settlement Details Reference Number Component Account Details Message Details Parties Parties Cover Parties Other Details Clearing Details Local Clearing IBAN Account Number Settlement Details Component Currency Branch Account Account Currency Dr Cr Original Exchange Rate Exchange Rate Rate Code zz az z I lt i Settlement Direction Component Description D Debit C Credit Signature Verification The system defaults to the ERI currency specified for the customer and currency combination You can change the default ERI currency The ERI amount that you specify will be validated against the Tolerance Limit specified for the ERI currency Settlements of Foreign Exchange Deals Oracle FLEXCUBE allows cross currency settlements of foreign exchange deals that involve an In currency You can settle the In currency leg in another In currency or in Euro Reports and Advices The following reports furnish the e
321. sion and IC Penalty are not checked on Transaction Code Maintenance screen on ORACLE 6 3 Transfer Bridge GL Specify the bridge GL to be used while moving the account balance from one branch to another Process Mode Specify the mode of processing the account transfer The drop down list displays the following options Sequential If you choose this the system will process the transfer in a sequential order I Job If you choose this the system will process the transfer as job Choose the appropriate one Number of Parallel Jobs Specify the number of parallel jobs This is the maximum number of jobs that may be submitted for processing at the same time Commitment Frequency Specify the commitment frequency While processing the transfer batch the system will perform commits based on the frequency set here Transferring Customer Account Branch Using Oracle FLEXCUBE you can transfer a customer account from one branch of the bank to another The account branch transfer is processed using Account Transfer screen To invoke this screen type CSDACCTR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and click the adjoining arrow button Bank Transfer E New E3 Enter Query Transfer ID Target Branch Current Branch Target Branch Name Current Branch Name Transfer Date 1 Of 1 Account Number Account Description Customer Number Customer Name
322. sit that are tanked are released with transaction date moved to next working date Processing TD Account Creation The Term Deposit creation requests are processed with the tanked status as Yes if the branch is not available for transaction If the customer account is displaying as tanked it indicates that the customer account creation request was processed when the branch available status is No or when branch date was ahead of host date The process when the TD account creation is received when the branch is unavailable or when branch date is ahead of host date is as follows e The TD account creation would be accepted with transaction status as Tanked e The initiation accounting entries will be posted as tanked entries The Term Deposit accounts that are in tanked status will not be considered for Interest amp Charges calculation process After the branch available status is changed to Yes then e The TD account tanked status will set to No e The Initiation entries of term deposit that are tanked would be released with transaction date moved to next working date Processing TD Account Redemption The Term Deposit Redemption Transactions are processed partially if the branch is not available for transaction or when branch date is ahead of host date Partial Redemption of the account is processed even after branch available status is No or branch date is ahead of host date e For TD redemption by Transfer to Savings
323. specified code of the country oer ORACLE 32 2 1 Developer Name Specify the name of the developer Telephone Specify the telephone number of the developer Email ID Specify the Email ID of the developer Fax Specify the fax number that should be linked with the specified developer Mobile Specify the mobile number of the developer Website Specify the URL of the website linked to the developer Viewing Project Details You can view the details of the projects linked to the developer by clicking Project button in the Developer Maintenance screen Projects Details 1 Of 1 Project Name Project Description Diamond District Here you can view the project names and descriptions that are linked to the specified developer gore ORACLE 32 2 2 32 3 Viewing UDF Details You can view the UDF details by clicking Fields button in the Developer Maintenance screen User Defined Fields Field Name Value Description Here you can view the field names and its value Viewing Developer Maintenance Summary You can view the summary of developer maintenance in the Developer Maintenance Summary screen You can invoke this screen by typing CSSDEVDT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Summary C advanced Sear
324. specify as the ERI Amount conforms to the Tolerance Limit defined for the ERI Currency in the Currency Definition screen That is the system computes the ERI equivalent of the settling amount using the pegged rates and compares the same against the ERI amount input by the user If the difference is within the tolerance limits defined for the ERI currency the user specified amount is used If the user specified ERI amount breaches the Tolerance Limit defined for the ERI currency the system calculates and reports the ERI Amount on the basis of the exchange rate defined for the settlement currency vis a vis the ERI currency The following example illustrates the application of the Tolerance Limit Note The system validates the ERI amount only when generating the settlement messages It does not validate the ERI amount at the time of input in the Settlement Message Details screen 119 ORACLE Currency pairs In the Currency Pair Definition screen you can specify a Through Currency When maintaining a pair involving an In currency In Out and In In you can only specify the Euro as the Through Currency Note You cannot maintain a Through Currency for a pair constituted by an In currency and the Euro 10 4 2 Maintaining Conversion GLs To facilitate the currency conversion process two additional parameters need to be maintained in the Branch Paramet
325. ss day the System should consider the uncollected funds that are allowed to be withdrawn as e The funds scheduled to be released on the current date today OR e The total uncollected funds available against the account subject to the Uncollected Funds Limit You can specify your preference by choosing any of the following options e Uncollected Funds If you select this option an amount up to or less than the uncollected funds limit defined for the account is allowed to be withdrawn on a given business day e Uncollected Funds Available Same Day If you select this option the funds allowed to be withdrawn against uncollected funds on a given business day are the funds scheduled to be released on the current date today Deferred Statement Generation Check this option to stop the automatic account statement generation at end of day If this option is checked then the account statement generation will be deferred to whenever you initiate action for executing Batch Operations for statement generation You can do this through the Branch Statement Status Change screen Enterprise GL Check this option if this branch needs to have an enterprise GL hand off Once checked the system will identify the said branch for creating an ASCII hand off file containing the relevant accounting entries to be sent to the external enterprise GL Minor Age Limit Yrs Specify the minor age limit This varies from nation to nation However If user does
326. t route Branch1 and Branch2 To specify a branch pair for which you want to define the customer accounts you can choose from a list of maintainable branch pairs displayed by the System The description of Branch 1 and Branch 2 are displayed below the respective branch codes Specifying General Ledger Details Specify the customer accounts which are involved in the inter branch transaction in the respective branches To maintain customer accounts for the branch pair specified the following parameters should be maintained Inter Bank Currency For each branch you have the option of specifying whether the inter branch entries must be posted in the transaction currency or the settlement account currency For the booking branch if the Inter branch Transaction Currency option specified is Transaction Currency inter branch entries are posted in the transaction currency only if e The local currency of both branches involved in the transaction is the same e One of the accounts in the entries belongs to the booking branch Due To Branch 2 This field identifies the customer account maintained in Branch 1 into which the credit accounting entry is passed a ORACLE 9 2 To specify the customer account select the appropriate account from the picklist of all the customer accounts maintained at Branch 1 Due From Branch 2 This field identifies the customer account maintained in Branch 1 into which a debit entry will be passed
327. t branch then the Head Office From the Head Office the entries would be routed through the Regional Office of the second branch e If you specify Direct each branch would have a direct accounting relationship with every other branch The receivable and payable accounts between the branches referred to as due from and due to accounts are maintained in the Inter branch parameters screen Inter Branch entity Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to post accounting entries related to inter branch fund transactions to a General Ledger that you have specified If you choose Normal as the inter branch routing and you have not selected the option Allow Corporate Access in the Branch Parameters screen the Inter Branch transfer options you have chosen will be used If you have selected the option Allow Corporate Access in the Branch Parameters screen and the branch is a fund branch the entity will be defaulted as General Ledger The GL will be based on the maintenance you have carried out in the Fund Inter Branch Accounts Maintenance screen for the fund id The same is explained in the chapter Accounts for Inter branch transactions Online GL Updates The update of GL balances can take place either on line or during End of Day For an on line update select this checkbox Re generate unused CIF ID Check this box to indicate that the unused CIF ID needs to be re generated automatically Note Unused sequence numbe
328. t categories have not been linked to a specific customer or a customer group the system picks up the limits maintained at the ge neric level for AML tracking purposes Also any new product category created and associated to the transaction code should be mandatorily associated with the ALL group ore ORACLE 31 4 Monitoring AML Accounting For AML reporting purposes while maintaining a transaction code you need to indicate whether AML monitoring is required for all accounting entries linked to the transaction code You can invoke this screen by typing STDTRNCD in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button The screen is as shown below e Transaction Code Maintenance E New amp Enter Query Transaction Details MIS Head Transaction Code External Code Description SwiftCode MSC Availability Information Immediate Anti Money Laundering Monitoring On Value Date Anti Money Laundering After Days with New Value Required Date Product Category After X days Statement Day Basis Current Working Day Days Intraday Release Overdraft Tracking Salary Credit Componenttype for Principal transaction Preferences Available Balance Check Cheque Mandatory Rogues Interests and Charges Interests and Charges Penalty Inclusions Transaction Count Inter Branch in Local Interests and Charges Currency Turnover Inclusion Consid
329. t currency 33 14 ORACLE You can maintain the PPC using PPC Maintenance screen To invoke this screen type STDPPCMN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button PPC Maintenance E New Enter Query Project ID PPC Amount Sponsor Retention Margin Sponsor Amount Bank Margin Lendable Amount Amount Paid Remarks PPC Id PPC Description Start Date End Date Milestone No Currency Calculate Joint Venture 1 Of 1 Party Id Credit Line Serial Number Currency Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status 33 4 1 Specifying PPC Maintenance Details Project ID Specify the project ID PPC ID The system displays the PPC ID PPC Description Specify the description of the PPC Start Date Specify the PPC start date End Date Specify the PPC end date Milestone No Specify the milestone sequence number Currency Specify the currency of the PPC PPC Amount Specify the amount of the PPC If the sum of the PPC amounts for all the PPCs presented for the specific milestone is greater than the milestone percentage calculated amount an error message is displayed 3313 ORACLE 33 4 2 The system will create the automatic limit lines for the lendable amount arrived at after applying the sponsor retention margin and the bank margin Sponsor Rete
330. t provided displays all valid module codes maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one Transactions Indicate the type of transactions that should be covered in the report The following options are available e All e This branch e Posted to Other Branch e This branch acted as bridge Products Indicate whether the reports should be generated for a single product or for all products If you choose Single you need to specify the product code for which the report needs to be generated The option list provided displays all valid product codes maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one User Indicate whether the reports should be generated for a transactions entered by all users or a single user If you choose Single you need to specify the user ID based on which the report needs to be generated The option list provided displays all valid user IDs maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one a4 ORACLE 35 3 1 From Specify the batch from which the transactions need to be considered for report generation To Specify the batch until which transactions need to be considered for report generation Print Copies Check this box to indicate that the report needs to be printed Position Entries Check this box to indicate that the report needs to cover position accounting entries Report Date Specify the date as on which the report needs to be generated Cl
331. tal Indicates Capital 35 25 ORACLE Registered Address Indicates Registered Address Address 2 Indicates Address 2 Address 3 Indicates Address 3 Country Indicates Country Business Indicates Business Director Name Indicates Director Name Personal Details Prefix Indicates Prefix First Named Indicates First Named Middle Name Indicates Middle Name Last Name Indicates Last Name Date Of Birth Indicates Date Of Birth Sex Indicates Sex Domicile Indicates Domicile Line 2 Indicates Line 2 Line 3 Indicates Line 3 Domicile Cntry Indicates Domicile Cntry Minor Indicates Minor Legal Guard Indicates Legal Guard Passport Number Indicates Passport Number Issue Date Indicates Issue Date Expiry Date Indicates Expiry Date Permanent Address Indicates Permanent Address Address Indicates Address 35 26 ORACLE Country Indicates Country National Id Indicates National Id Phone Indicates Phone Telex Indicates Telex Email Indicates Email Fax Indicates Fax Domestic Details Indicates Domestic Details Accommodation Indicates Accommodation Dependent Child Indicates Dependent Child Dependent Other Indicates Dependent Other Education Indicates Education Marital Status Indicates Marital Status Spouse Indicates Spouse
332. tches in accounting entries due to inter branch transactions the inter branch balancing entries are generated before any balancing entries for currency mismatches and then finally the value date mismatches Routing Mask A mask defines the manner in which a Routing Number is generated for your bank It is on the basis of the routing number that Oracle FLEXCUBE processes clearing transactions The following is a typical mask format BBBbbbSSS wherein BBB indicates the bank code pbb indicates the branch and SSS indicates the sector to which the branch belongs On the basis of the routing number clearing transactions are routed to the appropriate branch of your bank Clearing Bank Code Specify the code by which your bank is identified in the Clearing Network you participate in This has to the same as that specified for your bank in the Clearing Bank Code Maintenance screen Maintaining General Preferences In this screen you can define format masks for general ledger CIF choose if batch numbers should be auto generated by the system specify the details for cheque numbering etc Bank Parameters Maintenance x lt E gt Enter Query Bank Code Sank Name Head Office Branch Sranch Coce Branch Oescription Financial Preferences Le LOE EuL FATCA E Format mask Year End Profit and Loss Cif Mask General Ledger General Ledger Mask Transaction Coge Spread General Ledger Purge Days Spread
333. ted This would be a combination of the Tax Certificate Frequency and the Tax Certificate Day It could be any of the following e Monthly This indicates that the tax certificate would be generated every month The day of the month on which the Tax Certificate would be generated is defined in the Tax Certificate Day field e Quarterly Q This indicates that the tax certificate is generated once in three months The end month for the first quarter is defined in the Tax Certificate Day field The Certificate would be generated on the last working day of the month defined in the Tax Certificate Day field Subsequent end months would be derived by the system e Half Yearly H This indicates that the Tax Certificate would be generated once in six months The end month for the first half year period is defined in the Tax Certificate Day field The Certificate would be generated on the last working day of the month defined in the Tax Certificate day field Subsequent end months would be derived by the system mae ORACLE 5 2 3 5 2 4 5 2 5 e Yearly Y This indicates that the tax certificate would be generated once a year The month in which the certificate needs to be generated is defined in the Tax Certificate Day field The Certificate would be generated on the last working day of the month defined in the Tax Certificate Day field Frequency Value Select the appropriate month for tax certificate generation from the adjoinin
334. teria Authorization Status Record Status Branch Code Feature ID I Installed Click Search button The system identifies all records satisfying the specified criteria and displays the following details for each one of them Authorization Status Record Status Branch Code Feature ID I Installed Double click on a record to invoke the detailed screen for that record Aoa ORACLE 26 1 26 2 26 Purging Data Introduction Purging is a process by which you remove unwanted data from the system For example you may find the interest rates that you have maintained for a financial cycle useless a couple of years later You would want to remove such data from the system You can achieve this by purging the data of the system There are two types of purging data e Module Purging e Entity Purging User Defined Module Purging The purge function of Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to purge e Contracts and transactions that you have entered into e Data relating to transactions such as interest rates e Limits history Liability Lines and Line Utilization history e GLAverage Balance and Customer Account statistics You can purge the contracts or transactions that you have entered into in the following modules of Oracle FLEXCUBE e Foreign Exchange e Money Market e Loans e Deposits e Data Entry e Standing Instructions e Letters of Credit e Bills and Collections You ca
335. tes will not be responsible for any loss costs or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third party content products or services Contents Preface iine iaaa aaraa a Paa aae E Eara anaieri Eoaea amaa Eie 1 1 Ti UMTMOMUGHON pa cectades ohicetbecdtedeeda beneeedictg a EE E baa EE AEN 1 1 12 Auden oa E A T E E AAE E ES 1 1 1 3 Documentation Accessibility seaeesssiseeesesnieesinndetnnnnnantennnesnnnnaddinannnnanananaaiannnnana 1 1 1A Organizatora T aaa tele REET eA A A O AERE A 1 1 tS Related DOCUMONIS oreren na E adsense A AA 1 3 1o Glossary or ICONS aeea ies ach et dein aaah ad i NO 1 3 Bank Parameters cocc25cce5 concise daeccacacasieaclee deed ana cored ceedcettesataeneeecce eeeceacbee 2 1 2 1 Defining Bank Level Parameters 00 cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeiaeeeeeeeaes 2 1 2 1 1 Maintaining Financial Preferences ccccccccceccssteeeeeetnnteeeeeeenteeeeeeeniaes 2 2 2 1 2 Generating Automatic Balancing Entries cccccccceeeeeeenteeeeeetnteeeeeteeee 2 3 2 1 3 Maintaining General Preferences ccccccccceeeeeceeennteeeeeeenteeeeeeenaaeeeeeneeaas 2 4 2 1 4 Placing User Restrictions on Data Entry Batches 0 cccscceccsteteeeeeentees 2 7 2 1 5 Specifying UDF Detallls c ccccccccececeeteenneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeteeeeeeeeeseeeaaeeeenneenaeees 2 11 2 1 6 Specifying Account Generation Parameters at Bank Level cccee 2 11 2 1 7 Defining Bank wide Preferences cccccccsc
336. the option list positioned next to this field You can select the appropriate limit code and specify the limit amount that is to be linked with the code Note For a particular product category you can choose to maintain Limit Code and Amount com binations for all of any of the five Limit types They are The Online transaction limit Individual limits Daily turnover limits Monthly turnover limits Online daily turnover limits The transaction limits that you specify will be tracked online on a daily basis whenever you process a transaction involving the product category However individual daily and monthly turnover limits will be tracked only when the after the End of Day processes have been run successfully 31 2 Maintaining Limit Codes Before you begin the maintenance of product category records you should necessarily maintain limit codes through the Limit Code Maintenance screen While linking a limit amount with a limit code in the product category screen only valid limit codes that you have maintained through this screen will be made available for mapping ote ORACLE You can invoke this screen by typing CSDAMLLWM in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Limit Codes Maintenance E New Enter Query Limit Code Limit Type Online Limit Online Daily Turnover Description Daily Turnover Monthly Turnover In
337. the transaction limit currency and check against the transaction limit amount maintained for the product 10722 ORACLE 10 4 9 2 10 5 The system displays an appropriate message indicating the levels of authorization if the transaction amount booked is in excess of the maintained transaction limit Level Of Authorization Specify the number of authorisers to be involved in the authorising a particular transaction amount Note The level of authorization should be greater than one Minimum Authorization Limit This option is enabled only if the Cumulative option is checked Specify the minimum authorization limit required for a transaction The authorization limit cannot be greater than the transaction limit This amount is used to validate authorizer limit while authorizing the contract Cumulative Check this option to indicate that multiple authorisers are allowed to authorise a transaction The authorisers must have equal or greater than the minimum authorization limit maintained in this screen The system displays an appropriate error message if the authoriser tries to authorise a transaction having transaction amount greater than the minimum authorising limit Validating Transaction Amount during Contract Processing While saving a contract the system will check the transaction amount against the cut off amount maintained for the module and product currency involved in the transaction If both the transaction
338. the value as Y if you need to allow propagation of holidays If the PROPOGATION_OF_LOH value is maintained as Y then the system will enable propagation of holiday maintenance from Head branch to other active branches under the following condition Holiday details are authorized Holiday details are not maintained for the year for the active branches Only when the new holiday details are maintained and authorized for the first time Propagation of holiday maintenance at HO will be allowed for Un authorized branch also subsequent modification after first authorization if year is not maintained for the branch When a new branch is created and authorized for the first time Un authorized branch with modifications after first authorization and no holiday details maintained for the year For the branches which are restricted Propagated records will have the Maker ID and Checker ID details of the HO ads ORACLE 21 1 21 2 Introduction 21 Maintaining Currency Holidays You need to maintain a yearly list of holidays for the currencies defined in the currency screen This is done in the Currency Holiday Calendar screen The system uses the information maintained in this screen to check whether any settlement involving a foreign currency in the foreign Exchange Money market Funds Transfer Loans amp Deposit modules falls on that currency s holiday If yes then the system will display a m
339. tion This is the description provided Account Revalued This is the revalued account Account Balance This indicated the account balance Lcy Equivalent before reval This indicates the local currency before revaluation Lcy Equivalent after reval This indicates the local currency after revaluation Profit Loss This is the profit or loss incurred Profit Loss Amount This is the profit or loss amount P amp L Account This is the profit or loss account Currency This is the currency for which transaction details is being reported Rate This is the revaluation rate Category This is the category 35 19 Black Listed During Contract Booking Report You can invoke Black Listed During Contract Booking Report screen by typing CSRPBLCB in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button ORACLE The screen is as shown below Black Listed During Contract Booking Date Report Format PDF Printer At Client Report Output Print Printer Date Specify the date when the contract was black listed from the adjoining calendar 35 19 1 Contents of the Report The contents of the report are discussed under the following heads Header The header carries the Report Name Branch Branch Date User Id Module Run Date and Time oe ORACLE Body of the Report
340. tion on the branch code branch date the ID of the user who generated the report the date and time at which it was generated the modules covered in the report the product codes covered in the report batch information transactions covered in the report and printing preference Body of the Report This report is sorted module wise For every module the following details are displayed e Module e Product e User ID The following transaction details are displayed Field Name Field Description Reference Number This is the reference number of the deleted transaction Account Branch This is the branch where the account resides Sog ORACLE Account Number This is the account number Currency This is the currency of the transaction Debit Credit This indicates the nature of the transaction debit or credit Transaction Code This is the transaction code Status This is the status of the transaction Value Date Indicates the value date of the transaction Account description This is the account description Fcy Amount This is the transaction amount in foreign currency Transaction Descrip tion This is the description of the transaction code Exchange Rate This is the exchange rate LCY Amount This is the Amount in Local currency Narrative This is the narrative text associated with the transaction Instrument Number T
341. tional currencies of In countries are referred to as In currencies When maintaining other currencies you have to choose the Out Ccy option under Euro Type When the transition period ends the national currencies of the participating countries would cease to exist as valid legal tenders The Euro would be the only legal tender in the participating countries Consequently the Euro changes made to Oracle FLEXCUBE will no longer be required You can turn off the changes at the end of the transition period by 1 Closing all In currencies and 2 Choosing the Euro Closed option for the Euro Specifying Exchange Rate Limits Click PC button in the Currency Definition screen to invoke Limits screen Auto Exchange Rate Credit Limit Debit Limit You can specify the credit limit and the debit limit for the exchange rate in this screen The transaction amount of a PC contract must not exceed the limit specified here Mapping Currency to Country Click Currency Country Mapping button in the Currency Definition screen to invoke Clearing Zones Country Codes for Currency screen 108 ORACLE 10 2 5 10 2 6 The screen appears as shown below 3 Clearing Zone Country Codes for the currency Currency Code Country Code and Description Country Code Country Description C e ooo You can map a currency code to a country in this s
342. tions The clearing transactions are processed with the tanked status as Yes if the branch is not available for transaction During the clearing transaction query the transaction can be viewed as tanked if the CG transaction is tanked and that the request was processed when the branch available status is No or when branch date was ahead of host date The process when the clearing transaction is received when the branch is unavailable or when branch date is ahead of host date is as follows e The Clearing transaction would be accepted with transaction status as Tanked e The accounting entries would be posted with tanked status After the branch available status is changed to Yes then e The transaction status of the Clearing transaction will be changed to Active aie ORACLE e The tanked accounting entries if any would be un tanked by the batch process for releasing the tanked accounting entries Processing Instrument Transactions The instrument transactions are processed with the tanked status as Yes if the branch is not available for transaction During the DD transaction query the transaction can be viewed as tanked if the DD transaction is tanked and that the request was processed when the branch available status is No or when branch date was ahead of host date The process when the instrument transaction is received when the branch is unavailable or when branch date is ahead of host date is as follows e The
343. tle of the report information on the branch code branch date the ID of the user who generated the report the date and time at which it was generated and the modules covered in the report Soa ORACLE Body of the Report The following details are displayed Field Name Field Description Date This gives the date for which a future dated transaction is booked for the account Reference Num This is the reference number of the future dated transaction ber Inflow This is the inflow amount Outflow This is the outflow amount Balance This is the available balance Currency This is the currency of the account Customer This is the name of the customer Account This is the account number of the customer Account Class This is the account class Opening This is the opening balance of the account 35 6 Current Rates Report This report gives details on rates for currency pairs You can invoke the screen by typing CYRTCURR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Currency Rates Selection All Currency Pairs Selected Currency Pair Currency Choice Currency1 Currency2 Report Format Printer At Client Report Output Printer Specify the following details se ORACLE 35 6 1 35 7 Selection Indicate whether the report should be generated for all currency pairs or for a give
344. tlement is transferred through the Nostro accounts For instance let us take the following two outstanding contracts entered into by bank A both settling on January 10 1998 e Bought from bank B 1 Million USD in exchange for 35 Million INR e Sold to bank B 1 2 million USD in exchange for 18 million INR The above contracts can be settled in either of the two ways given below on the settlement date e Settle both contracts separately e Net the settlements of the two contracts If your bank has a netting agreement with the counterparty the settlement entries are posted to this Netting suspense GL and the net amounts are settled through the nostros Walk in Customer For your branch you can create a walk in customer ID against which you track all those customers who do not hold a regular account with your bank but have approached the bank for a transaction say for encashment of traveler s checks or for manager s checks Internal Swap Customer You need to specify an internal swap customer for processing internal swaps The names of all the customers of your bank will be displayed in the option list provided This will be a unique customer meant for processing internal swaps Clearing Account Specify the default GL account to be used for clearing transactions at the branch Offset Clearing Account Specify the default offset GL account to be used for clearing transactions at the branch Weekly Holiday 1 amp 2 Using this opt
345. to which the profit or loss on revaluation is to be posted The account to which the revaluation profit is to be debited or loss credited I The rate type to be used to revalue the GL The transaction code for posting the revaluation entries 19 1 ORACLE The rate type to be used for accounting entry based revaluation of profit and loss GLs The transaction code that would be used to post revaluation entries due to accounting entry based revaluation of profit and loss GLs General Ledger Code This is the code of the GL account for which you are specifying revaluation parameters Transaction Code This is the transaction code under which the accounting entries would be posted to the defined revalued GL account Rate type This is the rate type to be used for revaluation of this GL Profit General Ledger If the result of revaluation is a profit the profit amount is credited to this profit GL If fora GL you have opted for revaluation split then Revaluation Profit as opposed to Trading Profit is posted into this GL Revaluation split segregates revaluation profit loss into Trading Profit Loss Profit Loss due to revaluation of FCY entries posted into the GL during the current day Revaluation Profit Loss Profit Loss due to revaluation of opening FCY balances excludes current day s turnover Loss General Ledger If the result of revaluation is a loss the loss amount is debited to this loss GL If fora GL
346. tracts e Head Office The default currency for the Head Office e Reporting The default currency in which all financial reporting should be done You will not have an option to modify the default currencies that you specify after the Bank Parameters record has been stored and authorized Auto Generate Currency and Value Date Mismatch Entries You can specify that balancing entries must be generated automatically by Oracle FLEXCUBE in the case of currency or value date mismatches in accounting entries due to transactions that are not balanced with respect to currency or value dates for each branch single entity of your bank To specify the automatic generation of such balancing entries for currency mismatches select the options Auto Generate Currency Mismatch Entries and for generation of balancing entries to correct value date mismatches select Auto Generate Value Date Mismatch Entries in the Bank Wide Parameters screen If indicated in the Bank Wide Parameters balancing entries will be automatically generated for any event if a mismatch of currency or value date entries or both is involved in any module of Oracle FLEXCUBE with the exception of manually entered journal entries Specifying Control Accounts for Auto Balancing Entries Real and Contingent If you specify that such automatic balancing entries must be generated you can also specify the control accounts into which the entries must be booked There
347. umerals in as many languages as you generate messages ie ORACLE Text You must describe the following numerals in the Description field in the language that you specify in the Language field e 1 2 3 upto 10 e 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 and 90 e 100 e 1 000 e 10 000 e 100 000 e 1 000 000 e 10 000 000 and so on In certain languages One thousand One million and so on are expressed simply as thousand and million If you are defining verbal equivalents of amounts in such a language do not choose the Prefix One option Statements and messages printed in such a language will describe amounts such as 1000 simply as thousand Choose the Prefix One option if you would like amounts such as 1000 described as One thousand Currencies In this screen you can also describe the pre decimal and the post decimal units of a currency in different languages Enter the verbal equivalent of the pre and post decimal units of a currency in the Pre Decimal and Post Decimal fields respectively For example if you would like to describe the decimal units of USD enter 1 The currency in the Currency field 2 The pre decimal description as Dollars 3 The post decimal description as Cents 4 Final Text to be attached to the currency You can opt to prefix or suffix an amount with its currency If you would like the suffix an amount with its currency
348. unts for Inter Branch Transactions A transaction that takes place in a branch of your bank may involve accounts that are maintained in another branch For example a customer has an account in the Head Office branch and approaches another branch of the bank for a cash withdrawal For each combination of branches that may be involved in an inter branch transaction you can define the currency and the respective customer accounts to which the related accounting entries will be posted The accounting entries for such inter branch transactions can be routed in one of the following ways e Directly where each branch will have a direct accounting relationship with all other branches e Through a Regional Office where two branches involved in a transaction will interact through a common RO e Through the Head Office where the two branches involved in the inter branch transaction will interact only through the HO This route for all transactions is defined in the Bank parameters screen In the Inter branch Parameters Maintenance screen you define the internal accounts for pairs of branches that would be involved in any inter branch accounting Invoke this screen by typing ACDIBMNT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button l ORACLE The screen appears as shown below inter Branch Accounts Maintenance E New Enter Query Branch 1 Descript
349. unts should be maintained The pairs generated depend upon on two factors e The reporting structure for the branches as created in the Branch parameters screen and e The route defined for inter branch transactions in the Bank wide parameters Preferences screen 2 ORACLE For example the following represents the reporting structure of your bank HO If you have defined a direct inter branch accounting route then you need to maintain an accounting relationship for each possible combination of e Branch and branch e Branch and RO e RO and HO e Branch and HO For the above mentioned reporting structure the system will offer the following pairs of branch combinations to be maintained 1 BR1 BR2 2 BR1 RO1 3 BR2 RO2 4 RO1 HO 5 RO2 HO 6 BR1 RO2 7 BR2 RO1 8 BR1 HO 9 BR2 HO 10 RO1 RO2 If you have defined through RO inter branch accounting route then you need to maintain an accounting relationship for each possible combination of e Branch and RO HO e ROand RO In the branch and RO pair the RO should be that RO to which this branch reports For the above mentioned reporting structure the system will offer the following branch pairs to be maintained 1 BR1 RO1 2 BR2 RO2 3 RO1 HO 4 RO2 HO 5 RO1 RO2 If you have defined through HO inter branch accounting route then you need to maintain an accounting relationship for each possible combination of e Branches and HO
350. urnover limits for the particular customer group and product category combination Monthly turnovers are updated for the Customer Number Product Category and Currency combination ane ORACLE 32 Developer and Developer Project Maintenance 32 1 32 2 Introduction In Oracle FLEXCUBE you can maintain details of the real estate developer and developer projects You can link the developers to loan accounts Maintaining Developer Details You can maintain contact and project details of the developer in the Developer Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing CSDDEVDT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 3 Developer Maintenance E New E Enter Query Developer Code Developer Name Address Telephone Email Id Fax Mobile Zip Website Country Country Name Project Fields ELCs Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status Here you can specify the following details Developer Code Specify the unique code of the developer Address Specify the address of the developer Zip Specify the ZIP code of the developer Country Specify the code of the country to which the developer belongs The adjoining option list displays all valid country codes maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Country Name The system displays the corresponding country name based on the
351. us applications including applications that may create a risk of personal injury If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate failsafe backup redundancy and other measures to ensure its safe use Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law you may not use copy reproduce translate broadcast modify license transmit distribute exhibit perform publish or display any part in any form or by any means Reverse engineering disassembly or decompilation of this software unless required by law for interoperability is prohibited The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error free If you find any errors please report them to us in writing This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content products and services from third parties Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third party content products and services Oracle Corporation and its affilia
352. y a value comprising of as many characters as specified in the Component Length field However this field is used only if the value of the component is required to be constant static type in all the user reference numbers generated at your bank If the component value is changing constantly Dynamic type for every contract the system will automatically pick up the value from the DB table based on the SQL query that you maintain for the purpose Component Column and Component Table If your component is of the dynamic type you will need to mention the name of the Oracle FLEXCUBE column from where the system will pick up the component value Further if you wish to include a manipulated column value in sequence generation you will need to include SUBSTR as well in the column name For eg to include only the first four characters of the product group associated with the product code involved in a contract you will specify the following in the Component Column field SUBSTR PRODUCT_GROUP 1 4 You need to mention the table name also if the component type is dynamic The following table names are available in the option list provided e DUAL e STTM_BANK e STTM_BRANCH e CSTM_PRODUCT For our example the table name would be CSTM_PRODUCT Component Where Clause The condition or the where clause of the SQL code is specified here In the example discussed above the system will pick up the appropriate product group depend
353. y the market The system offers the choice of maintaining both the currencies as currency1 or currency 2 USD against DEM and DEM against USD For the pair specified the following parameters need to be maintained to arrive at the buy and sell rate of currencies e Rate Type e Mid Rate e Buy Spread e Sell Spread e Buy Rate e Sell Rate Rate Type This is the rate type for which you are maintaining exchange rates for a currency pair For different transaction categories your bank would like to maintain different exchange rates For example traveller s check is purchased at a certain rate whereas a bill of exchange is bought at a different rate In the front end modules where you define products to cater to the various transaction types of your bank you can link an appropriate rate type to the product For instance you create a product to cater to outgoing cross currency transfers by SWIFT For this product if you define the rate type to be STANDARD then for all contracts linked to this product the Standard Rate Type would be applied i ORACLE Mid Rate Mid rate is an indicative exchange rate for a currency pair It is the average of the buy and sell rate quoted by the market for a currency pair For example currency 1 USD Currency 2 INR Buy rate 1 USD 1 7020 INR Sell rate 1 USD 1 7040 INR Mid Rate 1 7030 Buy Spread This is the buy spread for a currency pair It can be defined as the profit ma
354. y the system Component Type You need to identify the type of each component in the sequence format A component can be constant through out or change for every contract processed at your bank You can associate a component with one of the following types e Static To include any hard coded component in the sequence format you will specify the type to be static For instance you may want the first two characters of your bank s name to be part of all the user reference numbers generated at your bank The component type would be static in this case e Dynamic You will specify the component to be of the dynamic type if its value is picked up from the Oracle FLEXCUBE table Eg Product Group A running number would always be dynamic in nature 122 ORACLE Use in Sequence Generation You need to indicate whether the component being defined should be used in sequence generation or not Specify YES or NO as per your choice You can also choose to display the reference number in the advices that are generated for a contract Component Length You can also specify the length of each component in the sequence format The component value is dependent on the component length maintained For instance if you specify 2 as the component length the value should comprise of only two characters Component Value As stated earlier the component value is dependent on the component length Based on the length you can specif
355. you want to change the day of the week then Next Purge Date needs to be updated e Monthly The purge routine for the entity having monthly frequency will run every month It is advised that the purge routines are not configured during the month ends as Purge Anniversary dates so as to reduce the processing load on the month ends e Quarterly The purge routine for the entity having quarterly frequency will run every quarter e Half Yearly The purge routine for the entity having half yearly frequency will run every 6 months e Yearly The purge routine for the entity having yearly frequency will run every year Last Purge Date The system displays the date on which the entity is purged Next Purge Date Specify the next date for purging the entity The system populates this date if purge frequency is not ad hoc The next purge date is left blank initially The system picks up for automatic purging of data and updates the subsequent dates only if the next purge date is provided Commit Frequency Specify the commit frequency while purging the data The default value for commit frequency is 100 For example If the value is 100 which is default then the purge routine will commit after every 100 records Query The system displays the full query for the entity Filter Details Filter Name The system displays the name of the purge filter criteria Column Data Type The system displays the data type for the filter
356. your bank Name You can also specify the detailed name of the bank This name will always be displayed whenever the bank code is used Specifying Details of Head Office Branch After specifying a code to identify your bank you should specify details of the head office of your bank el ORACLE 2 1 1 1 Code From the list of the branches you have already maintained of your bank designate one as your Head Office Description The description of the branch designated as Head Office is displayed Maintaining Financial Preferences In this screen you can maintain information regarding default currency for the branch specify if balancing entries must be automatically generated in case of mismatches define routing mask clearing bank code etc Specifying Default Currency Codes 2 1 1 2 You can indicate currency preferences for your bank You can specify preferences to indicate the default currencies for the following purposes e Local The currency that you indicate as the local currency will be taken as the local currency for all branches of your bank and the default currency for all transactions input into Oracle FLEXCUBE The income and expense balances of your bank will also be maintained in this currency e Discount If the discount rate for a particular currency is not maintained the discount rate of the specified discount currency will be picked up for discounting profits on forward foreign exchange con
357. your bank Reset Frequency You need to specify the frequency at which the system will drop and recreate the sequence numbers once again At the reset frequency that you specify all sequence numbers of the sequence format will be dropped and recreated again during the End of Day processing The options available are e None e Daily 124 ORACLE e Monthly e Yearly For example let us assume that the running number in the sequence format is 4 characters long starting from 0001 and the reset frequency is Monthly Further let us assume that the sequence number of the last contract processed on the last day of the month is 0199 At EOD of the last day of the month the sequence numbers generated till date will be dropped and the system will begin regeneration starting from 0001 once again for all subsequent contracts Range You can specify a range of sequential reference numbers If you specify such a range then no additional details need be specified If you do not specify a range you can specify additional details specific to each component of the sequence format In addition to the above details you should also maintain details specific to each component of the sequence format The details are as follows Component Order Each component is assigned an order number based on which they would appear in the user reference number The component order is automatically generated by the system and is non editable Component Each
358. ys Credit Value Date Spread Hour Minutes Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status In this screen you can maintain the cut off time cut off days and the value spreads to be applicable for e Each customer for a product and currency combination e All customers for each product and currency combination These currency cut off parameters are validated in respect of a funds transfer transaction only if currency cut off checks are specified as applicable in the product preferences for the product involving the transaction For details about how the currency cut off checks are applied on a funds transfer transaction refer the chapter Processing a Funds Transfer Contract in the Funds Transfer User Manual Handling Euro On 1 January 1999 eleven countries that are part of the European Union embarked on the first phase of economic integration called the Economic and Monetary Union EMU In Oracle FLEXCUBE the eleven countries participating in the first phase of the EMU are referred to as In countries and the respective national currencies as In currencies All other countries are referred to as Out countries The first phase of the EMU referred to as the transition period ushered in a new single European currency the Euro EUR During this phase the National Currency Denominations of In countries would co exist with the Euro That is trans
359. ystem P dates for the branches of your bank Chapters Web Service Maintenance explains the process of WebService Map p ping and other details regarding maintenance of external WebService Accounts for Inter Branch Transactions explains how you can main Chapter 9 tain internal accounts for branches involved in inter branch transac tions Currency Maintenance explains the process of maintaining currencies Chapter 10 l in the system with all necessary static attributes Maintaining Currency Denomination explains the maintenance of Chapter 11 es standard currency denominations for each currency Chapter 12 Expressing Amounts in Words describes the details of maintaining amounts in words Defining Currency Pairs explains the maintenance of static attributes Chapter 13 for currency pairs for which exchange rate quotes are available Maintaining Exchange Rates explains the maintenance of exchange Chapter 14 i rates used to buy and sell currencies one for another Maintaining Currency Spread for a Customer explains the mainte Chapter 15 l nance of currency spread and margin details for a customer Chapter 16 Period Code Maintenance explains the maintenance of financial peri P ods into which each financial cycle is to be divided Status Code Maintenance explains the maintenance of codes that you Chapter 17 can assign to the different statuses that a contract or a customer account can attain Transaction Code Maintenance explains the maintenance
360. ystem You can select the appropriate one Description The system displays the description based on the selected debit product Credit Product Specify a valid credit product you need to maintain as Suspense Product The adjoining option list displays all the valid credit products maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one Description The system displays the description based on the selected credit product Specifying International Banking Account Number MASKS The IBAN or International Bank Account Number is a unique account number that is used to identify a customer s account in a financial institution internationally International Bank Account Numbers in your bank are generated in the format of the account mask that you specify in the Branch Parameters screen Therefore you have to first define IBAN masks The IBAN Mask Since IBANs should be maintained in a particular format you should first define the format in which the IBAN should be captured You should also indicate the format in which the bank code of the bank in which the account resides should be maintained a8 ORACLE The maximum length of an IBAN should be 34 characters The IBANK Mask should be a combination of the following parameters e An ISO Country Code which has a maximum length of two characters The identifier that you can use to indicate the country code is DD The identifier will be replaced by the actual country code while defi

Core Services User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents